Sharp DVD Recorder DV HR300U User Manual
DVD RECORDER  
WITH HARD DISC  
MDOVDEL-HR300U  
OPERATION MANUAL  
•
The region number  
for this recorder is 1  
1
IMPORTANT / IMPORTANTE  
EZ SET UP (AUTO CHANNEL /CLOCK SET UP)  
EZ SET UP (PROGRAMACIÓN AUTOMÁTICA DE CANAL/PUESTA EN HORA DEL RELOJ)  
1
2
3
4
Connect Antenna/Cable  
to Recorder first.  
Then, plug into AC Power  
Outlet.  
Do not press the POWER  
button until completion of  
EZ Set Up.  
EZ SET UP complete.  
EZ SET UP completo.  
En primer lugar conecte  
la antena/el cable a el  
producto.  
A continuación,  
enchúfelos al  
tomacorriente de CA.  
No pulse el botón de  
ALIMENTACIÓN  
(POWER) hasta haber  
terminado la EZ SET UP.  
Detail: Please see page 26.  
Detalle: véase la página 122.  
• Please read this Operation Manual carefully before using your Recorder.  
• Instrucciones importantes de seguridad y guía de operación rápida en español  
➝Página 119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS  
CAUTION: Please read all of these instructions  
tions for later use.  
before you operate this product and save these instruc-  
ANTENNA LEAD-IN WIRE  
Electrical energy can perform many useful functions. This  
product has been engineered and manufactured to assure  
your personal safety. BUT IMPROPER USE CAN RESULT IN  
POTENTIAL ELECTRICAL SHOCK OR FIRE HAZARDS. In  
order not to defeat the safeguards incorporated in this  
product, observe the following basic rules for its installation,  
use and servicing.  
GROUND CLAMP  
ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT  
(NEC SECTION 810–20)  
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS  
(NEC SECTION 810–21)  
ELECTRICAL  
SERVICE  
EQUIPMENT  
GROUND CLAMPS  
1. Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions  
should be read before the product is operated.  
2. Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions  
should be retained for future reference.  
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING  
ELECTRODE SYSTEM  
(NEC PART 250, PART H)  
NEC- NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE  
3. Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the  
operating instructions should be adhered to.  
4. Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions  
should be followed.  
5. Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before  
cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a  
damp cloth for cleaning.  
6. Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by  
the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.  
7. Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water–for  
example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry  
tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool; and the like.  
8. Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart,  
stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing  
serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the  
product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table  
recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the product.  
Any mounting of the product should follow the manufacturer’s  
instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recom-  
mended by the manufacturer.  
15. Lightning – For added protection for this product during a  
lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for  
long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and  
disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent  
damage to the product due to lightning and power-line surges.  
16. Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be  
located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric  
light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines  
or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme  
care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or  
circuits as contact with them might be fatal.  
17. Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords,  
or integral convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of  
fire or electric shock.  
18. Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind  
into this product through openings as they may touch danger-  
ous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or  
electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product.  
19. Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself as  
opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous  
voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service  
personnel.  
9. Transportation – A product and cart  
combination should be moved with care.  
Quick stops, excessive force, and  
uneven surfaces may cause the product  
20. Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the  
wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel  
under the following conditions:  
and cart combination to overturn.  
10. Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided  
for ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the product and to  
protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be  
blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by  
placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface.  
This product should not be placed in a built-in installation such  
as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or  
the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to.  
11. Power Sources – This product should be operated only from  
the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you  
are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult  
your product dealer or local power company. For products  
intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer  
to the operating instructions.  
12. Grounding or Polarization – This product is equipped with  
either a two-wire polarized plug (one plug blade bigger than the  
other) or a three-wire grounded plug (a third pin for grounding).  
The two-wire polarized plug will fit only one way into the power  
outlet. The three-wire grounded plug will fit only into a ground-  
ing-type power outlet.  
a. When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged.  
b. If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the  
product.  
c. If the product has been exposed to rain or water.  
d. If the product does not operate normally by following the  
operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are  
covered by the operating instructions, as an improper  
adjustment of other controls may result in damage and  
will often require extensive work by a qualified technician  
to restore the product to normal operation.  
e. If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way.  
f. When the product exhibits a distinct change in perfor-  
mance, this indicates a need for service.  
21. Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required,  
be sure the service technician has used replacement parts  
specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics  
as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire,  
electric shock, or other hazards.  
22. Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to  
this product, ask the service technician to perform safety  
checks to determine that the product is in proper operating  
condition.  
If the plug does not fit, ask your electrician to replace your  
obsolete outlet. Do not modify the plug. To do so will void the  
safety feature.  
23. Heat – This product should be situated away from heat sources  
such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products  
(including amplifiers) that produce heat.  
13. Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be  
routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by  
items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention  
to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point  
where they exit from the product.  
14. Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or  
cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna  
or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection  
against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810  
of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides  
information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and  
supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an  
antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location  
of antenna-discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes,  
and requirements for the grounding electrode. See diagram  
below.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS .......................  
Features .......................................................  
Accessories .................................................  
Precautions about Using This Product.....  
3
6
7
8
About START MENU.................................... 29  
About START MENU ...................................................... 29  
Basic START MENU Operation ..................................... 29  
Clock Setting ............................................... 30  
Auto Clock Setting ......................................................... 30  
Manual Clock Setting ..................................................... 31  
Automatic Daylight Saving-Time (DST) Adjustment....... 31  
About Hard Disc (HDD) ............................... 10  
Recording Format .......................................................... 10  
Unrecordable Material.................................................... 10  
Hard Disc Operation (Recording/Playback/Time Shift  
Channel Setting ........................................... 32  
Channel Setting ............................................................. 32  
Adding/Erasing Channel Memory .................................. 32  
Recording) ................................................................... 10  
Initialization .................................................................... 10  
CPRM (control) Information ........................................... 10  
Display Information..................................... 33  
Content of TV Screen Display ........................................ 33  
Checking the Channel.................................................... 33  
Checking Remaining Time of HDD and  
Number of Titles .......................................................... 33  
Checking Remaining Time of DVD and  
About DVD ................................................... 11  
Types of Discs that Can Be Used with This Recorder ... 11  
Discs that Cannot Be Used with This Recorder ............. 11  
Types of Discs for Recording ......................................... 12  
Recording Formats ........................................................ 13  
Recording Time .............................................................. 13  
Disc Remaining Time ..................................................... 13  
Using the Proper Disc .................................................... 14  
Time display for Recording and Playback  
Number of Titles .......................................................... 34  
Switching Front Panel Display ....................................... 34  
Preparation to Operate This Recorder ...... 35  
Time Shift Viewing/Chasing Playback ...... 36  
Time Shift Viewing ......................................................... 37  
Chasing Playback .......................................................... 37  
(Video mode only) ....................................................... 14  
Unrecordable Material .................................................... 14  
Initialization and Finalization ..................... 15  
Initialization (Formatting)................................................ 15  
Allowing Discs to Be Played Back  
Recording to HDD ....................................... 38  
Direct Recording to HDD ............................................... 39  
Setting the Record End Time during Direct Recording  
(Simple Recording Timer) ............................................ 39  
with Other DVD Players (Finalization) ......................... 15  
About the Contents of the Disc ................. 15  
Title, Chapter and Track ................................................. 15  
Icons Used on DVD Video Disc Case ............................ 16  
The Icons Used in This Operation Manual ..................... 16  
Recording to DVD ....................................... 40  
Loading Disc .................................................................. 40  
Direct Recording to DVD................................................ 40  
Setting Recording Mode (HDD/DVD) ......... 42  
HDD Recording Mode and Recording Time................... 42  
DVD-R/RW Recording Mode and Recording Time ........ 42  
Setting the Manual Recording Mode (MN) ..................... 42  
Important Information ................................. 17  
Disc Precautions ............................................................ 17  
Copyright........................................................................ 17  
Cautions Regarding Recording ...................................... 17  
Timer Recording.......................................... 43  
Easy Recording Guide ................................................... 43  
Timer Recording with VCR Plus+® System .................... 45  
Timer Recording by Specifying Date,  
Time and Channel ....................................................... 47  
Favorite Program Timer Recording ................................ 49  
Timer Program Detail Setting ......................................... 51  
Confirm, Change and Cancel a Timer Program ............. 54  
Major Components...................................... 18  
Main Unit (Front) ............................................................ 18  
Front Panel Display ........................................................ 18  
Main Unit (Rear)............................................................. 18  
Remote Control Unit ...................................................... 19  
Loading the Batteries ..................................................... 20  
Operating a TV Using the Remote Control (Universal  
Remote Control) .......................................................... 21  
Setting the Remote Control Code .................................. 21  
Automatic Recording of Satellite Broadcast  
(AV AUTO REC) ..................................... 55  
Connecting to a Satellite Receiver, etc. ......................... 55  
Recording with AV AUTO REC....................................... 55  
To Cancel the AV AUTO REC Function.......................... 56  
Basic Connection........................................ 22  
Easy Connection ............................................................ 22  
Using Other Types of Video Output ............................... 23  
CATV or Satellite Receiver Connections ..... 24  
Connecting to a Cable Box or Satellite Receiver (1)...... 24  
Connecting to a Cable Box or Satellite Receiver (2)...... 25  
Dubbing (HDD/DVD) .................................... 57  
Dubbing Method and Dubbing Types ............................. 57  
Limitation during Dubbing .............................................. 57  
Timer Dubbing/Dubbing Immediately (HDD↔DVD)  
High Speed Dubbing (HDD→DVD) ............................. 59  
Dubbing Titles Recorded as Favorite Program .............. 61  
EZ Set Up ..................................................... 26  
Turning the Power On .................................................... 26  
Connection Guide ....................................... 27  
Selecting the On-screen Display Language ................... 27  
Selecting the TV Terminal .............................................. 27  
Selecting the TV Screen Aspect Ratio ........................... 27  
Advanced Setting ........................................................... 28  
Completing the Initial Setting ......................................... 28  
Eliminating Problems (Recording, Timer  
Recording, Dubbing)............................. 62  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
HDD Playback.............................................. 64  
Playback ........................................................................ 64  
Playback from REC LIST ............................................... 65  
Playback by Selecting Title Number (Direct Playback) .. 66  
Viewing Favorite Programs ............................................ 66  
Other Types of Playback ................................................ 67  
Enjoying High Quality Sounds................... 93  
Playing 2 Channel Audio with an Analog Connection .... 93  
Playing Dolby Digital (5.1 Channel) and DTS Audio with a  
Digital Connection ....................................................... 93  
Playing 2 Channel Audio with a Digital Connection ....... 94  
Recording from External Equipment......... 95  
Recording from a Digital Camcorder Using i.LINK ......... 95  
Recording from a Camcorder (VCR) Using an Analog  
DVD/CD Playback ........................................ 69  
Loading Disc .................................................................. 69  
DVD-R/RW Playback ..................................................... 69  
DVD Video Playback ...................................................... 70  
Audio CD/Video CD Playback ........................................ 70  
Other Types of Playback ................................................ 71  
Playback by Selecting with the Menu in the DVD .......... 73  
Connection .................................................................. 97  
Function Setting .......................................... 98  
Basic Operation for REC FUNCTION Setting ................ 99  
Basic Operation for VIEW/PLAY SETTING.................... 101  
Basic Operation for ADJUSTMENT Setting ................... 105  
Initialization .................................................................... 106  
Finalization ..................................................................... 106  
Basic Operation for INITIALIZE/FINALIZE..................... 107  
MP3 File Playback ....................................... 74  
To Play Another File (music title) during Playback ......... 74  
To Skip the File during Playback .................................... 74  
Settings During Playback ........................... 75  
Troubleshooting ..........................................108  
Service Information (For the U.S.) ............. 110  
On-screen Error Messages ........................ 111  
Glossary....................................................... 114  
Specifications.............................................. 117  
Function Control............................................................. 75  
Simultaneous Recording/Playback  
Function ................................................. 77  
Viewing the Program Being Recorded from the Beginning  
while Recording to HDD (Chasing Playback) .............. 77  
DVD/CD Playback during HDD Recording (Simultaneous  
Recording/Playback) ................................................... 77  
Playing Back a Title on the HDD during DVD Recording  
(Simultaneous Recording/Playback) ........................... 77  
Viewing Another Program Recorded on HDD while  
Recording to HDD (Simultaneous Recording/  
Playback) ..................................................................... 77  
Function Menu............................................. 78  
How to Use the FUNCTION MENU ............................... 78  
Editing (HDD/DVD) ...................................... 79  
About Editing.................................................................. 79  
Editing Procedure .......................................................... 79  
Switching between Original and Play List (Play Lists can  
be created only for HDD or VR mode) ........................ 80  
Editing an Original Title (HDD/DVD) .......... 81  
Erasing Unnecessary Scenes from an Original Title  
(ERASE SCENE)......................................................... 81  
Inputting/Changing Title Name  
(CHANGE TITLE NAME)............................................. 83  
Changing Thumbnail (CHANGE THUMBNAIL) ............. 84  
Making Sections in a Title (DIVIDE CHAPTER)............. 85  
Combining Chapters Together  
(COMBINE CHAPTERS) ............................................. 86  
Disabling Title Edit and Erase (TITLE PROTECT)......... 86  
Erasing All Titles............................................................. 87  
Erasing by Selecting a Title (or Chapter) ....................... 87  
Editing a Play List (HDD/DVD) ................... 88  
Creating a Play List ........................................................ 88  
Adding a Scene from an Original to a Play List  
(ADD SCENE) ............................................................. 89  
Changing the Title Sequence (MOVE TITLE) ................ 91  
Erasing Unnecessary Scenes (ERASE SCENE) ........... 92  
Inputting/Changing Title Name  
(CHANGE TITLE NAME)............................................. 92  
Changing Thumbnail (CHANGE THUMBNAIL) ............. 92  
Making Sections in a Title (DIVIDE CHAPTER)............. 92  
Combining Chapters Together  
(COMBINE CHAPTERS) ............................................. 92  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features  
A new timer recording system:  
A variety of hard disc t DVD  
1
5
“Easy Recording Guide”  
dubbing functions  
1High speed dubbing*3  
Enables high speed dubbing from hard disc to DVD  
so you can enjoy creating your own video library.  
For high speed dubbing, use discs conforming to DVD-  
RW Ver. 1.1/2g or DVD-R Ver. 2.0/4g.  
2Rate conversion dubbing  
The mode can be selected from 32 levels just like  
recording mode. This enables recording at the  
optimal picture quality, given the remaining empty  
space on the disc.  
• The Recorder is equipped with a high-capacity hard  
disc, so you’ll have more chances than ever before  
for timer recording, and the new timer recording  
system makes this even easier. A schedule grid of  
times and channels is displayed on the screen, and  
by simply designating cells in the grid with the  
remote control, timer programming becomes as  
easy as circling your favorite shows in the newspa-  
per. You can also see at a glance which time slots  
are already programmed, and avoid any overlap.  
*3  
3Exact dubbing  
High-capacity hard disc lets you  
This automatically adjusts to the optimal record  
mode so that the material is dubbed exactly into the  
remaining area on the disc.  
2
record and view series and your  
favorite programs*1  
• For trendy dramas, series and other shows you  
want to watch and record, without missing a week,  
use the “Serial Program Timer” feature.  
For news and information programs which you  
watch everyday and don’t need to store, set  
“Overwrite Program Timer”.  
• Recorded programs can be viewed by simply  
calling them up with the remote control, so there is  
no need to search through a lot of programs.  
Programs recorded with “Serial Program Timer” can  
be batch dubbed onto DVD*2, so you can easily  
save your favorite dramas on DVD.  
The time normally required for a program of an hour on  
High Speed Dubbing to a double speed compatible disc  
Time Required  
Approx. 30 min  
Approx. 15 min  
Recording Mode  
Speed  
Approx. 2g  
Approx. 4g  
Approx. 8g  
Approx. 12g  
FINE  
SP  
LP  
Approx. 7.5 min  
Approx. 5 min  
EP  
“Time Shift Viewing”, “Chasing  
Playback” and “Simultaneous  
Recording/Playback” —functions  
you can only get with a hard disc  
6
*1  
This function is only available with hard disc.  
Up to 5 titles can be dubbed in a batch.  
*2  
DVD-R/RW recording/playback  
with outstanding compatibility  
3
1Time shift viewing  
While you are watching a program, the phone  
rings.… At times like this, you can pause the  
program being broadcast by pressing a button, and  
then watch the rest of the program at your leisure  
after you finish your phone call. You can also switch  
to the current broadcast scene just by pressing  
■STOP/LIVE button.  
• This Recorder is compatible with digital recording  
on rewritable DVD-RW discs and one-time record-  
able DVD-R discs. It has two recording formats:  
“VR (Video Recording) mode” which has a wealth of  
editing functions, and “Video mode” which can be  
played back with existing DVD players. This lets  
you enjoy recording and dubbing to suit your  
purpose.  
2Chasing playback  
You return home earlier than expected while timer  
recording is in progress…. At times like this, you  
don’t have to wait for recording to end. You can  
immediately view the program from the beginning.  
3Simultaneous recording/playback  
Even while recording to the hard disc, you can  
enjoy playback of a DVD, or programs already  
recorded on hard disc. You don’t have to wait for  
recording to finish.  
High picture quality design (Used  
in all hard disc and DVD modes)  
1Progressive scanning playback  
High-quality, high-density video with no jagged  
contours and no flicker.  
2VBR (Variable Bit Rate) recording  
Constantly maintains optimal high picture quality by  
varying the bit rate (amount of video data) for each  
scene depending on the video content (e.g.  
whether movement is fast or slow).  
4
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features  
2Colored buttons  
Comprehensive editing functions  
(Only titles recorded on the hard disc or in VR  
mode on DVD-RW can be edited.)  
The remote control has colored buttons with four  
different colors. Functions are displayed in four  
different colors on the screen, and the Recorder  
can be operated by directly designating these  
functions.  
7
1Play list edit  
This lets you gather only the needed parts (i.e. a  
“Play List”) from a recorded original video (title).  
You can rearrange scenes and combine them with  
other scenes, or rearrange titles. This is convenient  
when you want to dub and save only the necessary  
scenes and titles.  
3Luminous buttons  
Luminous buttons are used for key control buttons  
on the remote control so they are easy to see in the  
dark.  
Digital connection (i.LINK) with a  
2Chapter edit  
9
digital video/audio source equip-  
This lets you divide a title into chapter units during  
recording/playback or using the edit screen. After  
dividing, a list of recordings (thumbnails) can be  
displayed in chapter units, so you can copy, erase  
or dub to the play list in chapter units.  
3Erase scene  
ment  
• The DV IN terminal allows you to capture, edit and  
store material from a digital camcorder equipped  
with a DV terminal.  
This lets you erase unnecessary scenes. This is  
convenient when you want to cut out the commer-  
cials in a recorded program before dubbing.  
4Batch erasing of titles/chapters  
Titles and chapters which become unnecessary  
after editing can be batch erased by selecting them  
from the list of recordings (thumbnails).  
5Edit undo function*4  
If you mistakenly erase data during editing, this  
function lets you restore it to its immediately  
preceding state, just like “Undo” on a PC, so you  
can edit worry-free.  
*4 Edit undo can only be used once. It only works when  
“UNDO” is assigned to a colored button (green) displayed  
on the screen.  
MP3 file playback  
10  
• This Recorder allows you to playback MP3 files  
recorded on CD-R/RW.  
VCR Plus+*5 System  
11  
• The VCR Plus+ System allows you to program your  
Recorder for timer recording simply by inputting the  
PlusCode Programming number. The PlusCode  
numbers are listed in most newspapers, television  
guides, and local CATV listings. Simply by inputting  
this PlusCode number, you can program your  
Recorder for timer recording, eliminating the need  
to input program start time, stop time, channel, date  
and other information which is necessary for  
ordinary timer programming.  
Simple operation and user-friendly  
design using a new remote control  
8
*5 VCR Plus+ and PlusCode are registered trademarks of  
Gemstar Development Corporation. The VCR Plus+  
system is manufactured under license from Gemstar  
Development Corporation.  
1START MENU  
Press START MENU button on the remote control,  
and display the list of main functions on the screen.  
After that, you can operate by using the Cursor  
buttons and SET/ENTER button on the remote  
control, so this Recorder can be used easily even  
by a person who is unfamiliar with operation.  
Accessories  
Two “AAA” size batteries  
Remote control unit  
(RRMCGA198WJSA)  
(R-03, UM/SUM-4)  
Video/audio cable  
(QCNW-B557WJPZ)  
Round coaxial cable  
(QCNW-B656WJPZ)  
for the remote control unit  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Precautions about Using This Product  
Do not use at locations at high  
temperature.  
Do not place objects on the Re-  
corder.  
• If you leave this equipment at a location which rises to an  
abnormally high temperature (like the inside of a car with  
the windows shut), this may cause deformation of the  
cabinet or malfunction. Be very careful not to allow the  
area abound the Recorder or discs to reach a high  
temperature.  
• Do not place any objects, such as vases or lighted  
candles on the top of the Recorder.  
• Set up at a location where there is adequate space above  
the Recorder  
• Do not place a TV or other heavy object on the Recorder.  
Doing so may result in problems like noise appearing on  
the screen, or deformation of the cabinet.  
Keep away from magnetic ob-  
• Do not place the Recorder on any equipment which gets  
hot.  
• Do not place at a location which is exposed to direct  
sunlight, or near a heater. Be careful because doing so  
will have an adverse effect on the cabinet and compo-  
nents.  
jects.  
• Keep the Recorder away from strong magnetic objects.  
Handle the Recorder carefully.  
• Do not drop the Recorder, or subject it to strong impact or  
vibration. Doing so will cause malfunction. Be careful  
when carrying or moving the Recorder.  
No fingers or other objects inside  
• Do not put any foreign object on the disc tray.  
When moving or shipping the  
Recorder  
• Remove the disc before wrapping the Recorder. In case  
you will not be using the Recorder for a while, remove the  
disc, and turn off the power.  
Do not remove the cabinets.  
• Do not remove the Recorder cabinets. Touching parts  
inside the cabinet could result in electric shock and/or  
damage to the Recorder. For service and adjustment  
inside the cabinet, please contact the nearest Sharp  
Authorized Service Center.  
When using the Recorder during  
rain or snow  
• If you use the Recorder during rain or snow, be careful  
not to allow it to get wet.  
Do not cover the fan or ventila-  
tion holes on the back of the Re-  
corder.  
Dew formation  
• Dew may form on the surface of and inside the Recorder  
if you suddenly carry it from a cold location to a warm  
location, or use it in a cold room where heating has just  
been turned on (i.e. on a winter morning). If dew forms,  
let the Recorder sit with the power off until the dew  
disappears. Using the Recorder with dew formation  
present may cause malfunction.(See page 17.)  
• When setting up the Recorder, do not cover the fan or  
ventilation holes on the rear of the Recorder. This will  
interfere with the cooling fan and cause malfunction. Be  
especially careful of this point when housing the Recorder  
in a TV stand or AV rack.  
• Do not use the Recorder on carpets, or on a bed or sofa,  
or wrap the Recorder in cloth or other material. This will  
interfere with the cooling fan and cause malfunction.  
Avoid dust and smoke.  
• Do not place the Recorder at a location which is unstable,  
subject to heavy vibration or where there is a lot of dust or  
tobacco smoke. Doing so may cause malfunction or  
accidents.  
Set up the Recorder so it is hori-  
zontal.  
• Do not stand the Recorder up vertically or place it upside  
down. Doing so will cause malfunction.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Precautions about Using This Product  
• In the unlikely event that the hard disc (HDD) malfunc-  
tions for some reason, you cannot replace it by yourself. If  
you disassemble the Recorder you will void the warranty.  
Please contact the nearest Sharp Authorized Service  
Center. We cannot provide compensation for data content  
if data is lost or not recorded.  
Upkeep of cabinet  
• The cabinet surface employs a lot of plastic. Do not wipe  
these surfaces with benzene or thinner because this may  
cause deterioration or paint peeling.  
Connected equipment  
• Read carefully the “Precautions for Use” in the operation  
manual for any equipment connected to the Recorder.  
Power conservation  
• When you are finished using the Recorder, conserve  
power by turning power off. If you go on a trip, or  
otherwise will not use the Recorder for a long time,  
unplug the power cord from the AC outlet to ensure  
safety.  
• Do not apply volatile liquids like insecticide to the  
cabinet. Also, do not allow long-term contact with  
materials like rubber, vinyl products or synthetic leather.  
Doing so may cause problems like paint peeling.  
• Do not affix stickers or tape to the Recorder. Doing so  
may cause cabinet discoloration or damage.  
• If the cabinet or front panel display gets dirty, gently wipe  
it off with soft cloth like flannel. If it is extremely dirty, soak  
a cloth in neutral detergent diluted with water, wring the  
cloth well, wipe, and then wipe again with a dry cloth.  
Using powerful cleaners may cause discoloration,  
deterioration or paint peeling. We recommend testing any  
cleaners at an inconspicuous location on the Recorder.  
If you do not use the Recorder for  
a long time  
• Failure to use the Recorder for a long time may cause  
problems, so turn on power and operate the Recorder  
from time to time.  
Requests regarding setup  
• Do not cover the fan or ventilation holes on the back of  
the Recorder. Doing so will interfere with heat radiation  
and cause malfunction.  
Electromagnetic interference  
• If you use a mobile phone or other electronic equipment  
near the Recorder, video may be disturbed or become  
noisy during playback or recording due to electromag-  
netic interference.  
Notes about use  
• The Recorder and cabinet may become a little hot,  
depending on the use environment when using this  
Recorder. This is not a malfunction.  
Antenna  
• To avoid the effects of radio interference, set up the  
antenna at a location away from busy roads, electric  
wires for train, electric transmission lines and neon signs.  
This is effective for preventing electric shock accidents in  
the unlikely event that antenna falls down.  
• When unplugging the power cord (to move the Recorder,  
etc.), first turn off power (STANDBY indicator on the front  
of the Recorder lights up red) to protect the hard disc  
(HDD).  
• When power is turned on, the fan will rotate to cool the  
Recorder.  
• Immediately after plugging the power cord into an AC  
outlet, or after recovery from a power failure, the unit may  
fail to operate for more than ten seconds because the  
Recorder is performing system adjustment.  
• Do not make the antenna line unnecessarily long, or  
bundle it. Be careful because doing so will cause the  
picture to be unstable.  
• The antenna is exposed to the weather, so be careful to  
periodically check and replace it. This will ensure a  
beautiful picture. Antennas are particularly susceptible to  
damage at locations with heavy smoke and soot, and  
locations exposed to sea breeze.  
Notes about this operation  
manual  
• In this operation manual, the terms “the Recorder”, “this  
Recorder” or “your Recorder” refer to the “DV-HR300U  
DVD Recorder with Hard Disc”.  
Hard disc (HDD)  
• This Recorder records programs onto a hard disc (HDD).  
The hard disc is equipped with a safety mechanism to  
protect data from impact, vibration and dust. However, to  
prevent loss of recorded data, you should be particularly  
careful of the following points:  
• The screen displays and Recorder illustrations given in  
this operation manual are for explanatory purposes, and  
may differ somewhat from the actual screen and Re-  
corder.  
• Do not subject the Recorder to any impact.  
• Do not use at a location which is unstable or subject to  
vibration.  
• Do not move the Recorder while the power is on.  
• Do not unplug the power cord from the AC outlet  
during recording or playback. First turn power “OFF”,  
and then unplug the power cord from the AC outlet.  
• Do not use at a location with abrupt temperature  
variation (variation of more than 50°F [10°C] per hour).  
• The Recorder will malfunction if used at a cold location  
(41°F [5°C] or less) or an extremely hot location (95°F  
35°C] or higher).  
• If you carry the Recorder from a cold location to a  
warm location, let the Recorder sit for a while before  
using it.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About Hard Disc (HDD)  
This Recorder has a built in hard disc (abbreviated  
“HDD”) for recording and playback. Beware of the  
following points when setting up and using the Recorder.  
Failure to observe precautions may cause damage to  
the HDD itself or its content, failure of the disc to  
operate, or recording of noise.  
In the unlikely event that there is some problem like loss  
of recorded video or audio content due to a HDD  
malfunction, please be aware beforehand that Sharp will  
bear no responsibility to compensate for the content  
which could not be recorded or edited, for the loss of  
recorded or edited video, or for other related direct or  
indirect damages.  
• Do not subject to any vibration or impact.  
• Do not place at a cramped location which might block the  
cooling fan or ventilation port on the back of the Re-  
corder.  
• Do not place at a location with severe temperature  
variation.  
■ If a power failure occurs  
• The content being recorded or timer recorded will be  
damaged if power failure occurs.  
• The content being played back may be damaged.  
■ For important recording  
• If the HDD malfunctions, the content recorded on the  
HDD may be lost. If you wish to save content perma-  
nently, we recommend copying or moving the content  
to DVD-RW or DVD-R.  
s If the Recorder is set up at a location with severe  
temperature variation, dew may form on and inside the  
Recorder. If the Recorder is used with internal dew  
formation present, this may cause HDD damage or  
malfunction. We recommend keeping variation in room  
temperature within 50˚F (10˚C) per hour.  
NOTE  
• If a message indicating a HDD error is displayed (such as  
“CANNOT OPERATE DUE TO ERROR.”) and the HDD has  
malfunctioned, you cannot replace the HDD by yourself.  
If you disassemble the Recorder, the warranty will  
become void. Also, recovery of data is impossible. If  
playback is possible, re-record the recorded content onto  
a DVD-R/RW disc, and contact your nearest Sharp  
Authorized Service Center.  
• Do not place at a location with high humidity.  
• Place the Recorder horizontally, never at an incline.  
• When the power is on, do not unplug the power cord from  
the AC outlet, turn off the breaker for the area where the  
Recorder is set up, or move the Recorder.  
s When moving the Recorder, first turn off the power and  
then unplug the power cord from the AC outlet.  
Recording Format  
■ HDD recording is done using the variable bit rate  
format for more efficient recording.  
The following phenomena may occur.  
With the variable bit rate format, the remaining amount  
which can be recorded may increase or decrease relative  
to the display of the remaining amount of HDD space.  
• When the display indicates that the remaining amount of  
HDD space is low, first delete unnecessary programs,  
and then record with an extra margin in the amount of  
remaining space.  
• Even if you delete a program, the remaining amount may  
not increase by the amount of deleted time. When  
recording new video, record with an extra margin in the  
amount of remaining space.  
Hard Disc Operation  
(Recording / Playback / Time Shift  
Recording)  
• If the Recorder is used in a cold location (a location at  
low temperature), the drive will only allow live viewing  
after power is turned on until the HDD is ready. During  
this time, the Recorder will not allow Time Shift Viewing,  
recording, display of recording lists or playback of  
recorded programs. Please wait until the HDD is ready.  
Initialization  
• Initialization erases all video recorded on the HDD. Be  
sure to dub important recordings onto DVD-R/RW discs  
before initializing.  
• With this Recorder, part of the HDD capacity is used as a  
system management area.  
Unrecordable Material  
• This Recorder is equipped with a copy guard function  
that prevents recording of video software or broadcast  
programs that contain a signal that restricts copying in  
accordance with copyrights and so forth.  
• In the case a copy guard signal is contained in a source  
video that occurs partway through recording, recording is  
paused at that point. Recording resumes when the copy  
guard signal is no longer present, while no recordings will  
be made for the part where the copy prevention signal is  
present.  
CPRM (control) Information  
• There are 3 types of copy control signals: “Copy Freely”,  
“Copy Once” and “Copy Never”.  
“Copy Never” programs cannot be recorded on HDD.  
When a “Copy Once” enabled program is copied from  
HDD to DVD-RW, the video is not copied — it is moved  
from the HDD to the DVD-RW (i.e. the content recorded  
on the HDD is erased).  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About DVD  
Types of Discs that Can Be  
Used with This Recorder  
• DVD video players and discs have region numbers,  
which dictate the regions in which a disc can be played.  
The region number for this product is 1. (Discs marked  
ALL will play in any player.)  
• DVD Video operations and functions may be different  
from the explanations in this manual and some operations  
may be prohibited due to disc manufacturer’s setting.  
• If “CANNOT OPERATE THIS FUNCTION.” or “THIS  
OPERATION IS PROHIBITED BY THE DISC.” is displayed,  
either the disc or Recorder is prohibiting the function.  
Read the disc’s manual along with this manual.  
• If a menu screen or operating instructions are displayed  
during playback of a disc, follow the operating procedure  
displayed.  
• The following discs can be played back and recorded  
with this Recorder. Do not use an 8 cm (3") adapter (for  
CDs).  
• Since this Recorder is compatible with the NTSC format,  
use discs that contain the letters “NTSC” on the disc or  
package.  
• Use discs that are compatible with standards as indi-  
cated by the presence of the following logo marks on the  
disc label. Playback of discs not complying with these  
standards is not guaranteed. In addition, image quality or  
sound quality is not guaranteed even if such discs are  
able to be played back.  
Discs that Cannot Be Used with  
This Recorder  
Discs For Recording and Playback  
Recording  
■ The following discs are unable to be played back or  
are not played back properly on this Recorder. If such  
a disc is mistakenly played back, the speakers may  
be damaged due to the large volume. Never attempt  
Disc Type  
Contents  
Disc Size  
Format  
VR mode  
DVD-RW  
•Ver.1.1  
12 cm (5"),  
•Ver.1.1  
Video mode  
single-sided/  
double-sided,  
single layer disc  
8 cm (3"), single-  
sided, single  
layer disc *2  
(CPRM  
to play back such discs.  
Audio + Video  
(Movie)  
compatible)*1  
•Ver.1.1/2g  
(CPRM  
CDG, Photo CD, CD-ROM, CD-TEXT, CD-EXTRA, SVCD,  
SACD, PD, CDV, CVD, DVD-ROM, DVD-RAM, DVD-Audio  
compatible)*1  
DVD-R  
•Ver.2.0  
•Ver.2.0/4g*3  
Video mode  
■ Discs with unusual shapes cannot be played.  
• Discs with unusual shapes (heart-shaped or hexagonal  
discs, etc.) cannot be used. The use of such discs will  
cause a fault.  
4.7  
*1  
*2  
“Copy Once” broadcasts and other programs that can  
be recorded only once can be recorded.  
DVD-R/RW 8 cm (3") single-sided, single-layer discs can  
only be used for recording in the Video mode. Some  
discs of this type may not be able to be recorded.  
Not compatible with 4g high speed dubbing. When high  
speed dubbing is used, the system will switch to 2g.  
■ The following DVD video discs cannot be played.  
• Discs not containing “1” or “ALL” for the region number  
(discs sold outside the authorized marketing area).*5  
• Discs recorded in PAL format.*6  
*3  
• Discs produced illegally.  
• Discs recorded for commercial use.  
*5  
The region number for this product is 1.  
This Recorder is compatible with the NTSC format.  
*6  
Discs for Playback (Playback Only)  
Make sure to check the format of the disc before  
purchasing.  
■ The following DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW discs cannot be  
Recording  
Disc Type  
Contents  
Audio + Video 12 cm (5")  
(Movie) 8 cm (3")  
Disc Size  
Format  
DVD Video Region  
number  
Video mode  
played.  
ALL  
1
• Discs on which data has not been recorded cannot be  
played back.  
• Discs may not be played back depending on the  
recorder used for recording.  
■ The following Audio CD discs cannot be played.  
• Discs containing a signal for the purpose of protecting  
copyrights (copy control signal) may not be played  
back with this Recorder.  
DVD+R/DVD+RW  
Video CD  
Video mode  
Audio + Video 12 cm (5")  
(finalized disc (Movie)  
only)  
Video CD  
Audio + Video  
(Movie)  
• This Recorder has been designed on the premise of  
playing back Audio CDs that comply with CD (Com-  
pact Disc) standards.  
Audio CD *4  
Audio CD  
(CD-DA)  
Audio  
12 cm (5")  
8 cm (3")  
CD-R/CD-RW  
Audio CD  
(CD-DA)  
Audio  
■ The following CD-R/RW discs cannot be played.  
• Discs on which data has not been recorded cannot be  
played back.  
MP3 file  
• Non-finalized discs cannot be played back.  
• Discs recorded in a format other than a Video CD/  
Audio CD and MP3 file format*7 cannot be played back.  
• Discs may not be played back depending on their  
recording status or the status of the disc itself.  
• Discs may not be played back depending on their  
compatibility with this Recorder or the recorder used  
for recording.  
Video CD  
Audio + Video  
(Movie)  
*4  
This Recorder has been designed on the premise of  
playing back Audio CDs that comply with CD (Compact  
Disc) standards. CDs containing a signal for the purpose  
of protecting copyrights (copy control signal) may not be  
able to be played back with this Recorder.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
Æ
                       
Playing MP3 discs  
• Some MP3 files are not played in the order they were  
recorded.  
                       
Æ
                       
The following files cannot be played on this  
Recorder.  
About DVD  
*7 About MP3 file format  
Types of Discs for Recording  
MP3 files are audio data compressed in MPEG1 Audio  
layer 3 file format. “MP3 files” have “.mp3” as extensions.  
(Some files that have “.mp3” extensions or files that have  
not been recorded in MP3 format will produce noise or  
cannot be played.)  
• DVD-RW and DVD-R discs can be recorded with this  
Recorder. The recording format that can be selected may  
vary according to the disc version and type of disc.  
• Make sure to use a disc that has the words “For Video” or  
“For Recording” on the disc or disc jacket for recording  
and playback with this Recorder.  
Recording Format  
Disc Type  
VR mode  
Video mode  
• The maximum number of layers which can be  
recognized, including files and folders, is 8.  
• The multi-session discs cannot be played.  
• It is recommended to record data at a lower speed as  
data recorded at fast speed can produce noise and  
may not be able to be played.  
DVD-RW Ver. 1.1  
DVD-RW Ver. 1.1  
(CPRM)  
DVD-RW Ver. 1.1/2g  
(CPRM)  
×
×
DVD-R Ver. 2.0  
DVD-R Ver. 2.0/4g  
—
×
• The more folders there are, the longer the reading  
time.  
• Depending on the folder tree, reading MP3 files can  
take time.  
DVD-RW Discs  
• Folder or track (file) names are limited to 8 characters.  
Folder or track (file) names that go over 8 characters  
will be abbreviated. (Certain letters or symbols in  
folder names or title name may not be displayed.)  
• The playing time may not be correctly displayed  
during MP3 file playback.  
• DVD-RW discs are available in Ver. 1.1, Ver. 1.1  
(CPRM compatible) or Ver. 1.1/2g (CPRM  
compatible).  
• When a disc has been recorded in the VR mode, it  
can be recorded and erased repeatedly. Erasure also  
allows the recording time to be increased.  
• When a disc has been recorded in the Video mode,  
additional recording is possible until the disc is full.  
The recording time does not increase*8 even if titles  
are erased, but if the disc is initialized (see pages 15  
and 106) full recording time is possible.  
• Discs that have more than 257 folders or 1,000 files.  
• When both Audio CD format and MP3 files format are  
recorded on a disc. (The disc is recognized to be an  
Audio CD and only tracks in the Audio CD format are  
played back.)  
*8  
Recording time can only be increased when the last  
title is erased (titles cannot be erased after a disc  
has been finalized).  
DVD-R Discs  
• DVD-R discs can only be recorded in the Video  
mode.  
• Although additional recordings can be made until the  
disc is full, disc space does not increase even if titles  
are erased (because erasure here refers only to  
making the titles not visible).  
• Although these discs can be played back with other  
DVD players once they have been finalized, the discs  
can no longer be recorded or erased after they have  
been finalized.  
• Discs can be additionally recorded and edited with  
this Recorder only until they are finalized.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                                                  
Æ
                                                                                  
VR mode  
                                                                                  
Æ
                                                                                  
Video mode  
About DVD  
Recording Formats  
Recording Time  
• There are two recording formats available with this  
Recorder: the VR mode and the Video mode.  
• The recording format that can be selected may differ  
depending on the disc. Refer to the section on Types of  
Discs for Recording (page 12).  
• The recording mode that can be set varies according to  
the recording format. Refer to the table below for the  
applicable recording mode.  
Recording  
Recordable Time  
About 60 minutes  
Description  
Mode  
• Recording in the VR mode and Video mode cannot be  
mixed on one disc.  
FINE  
When you want to record high-  
quality images.  
SP  
LP  
About 120 minutes  
About 240 minutes  
This is the standard recording  
mode.  
VR (Video Recording) Mode  
The VR mode is the basic DVD-RW recording format,  
and lets you enjoy the various editing functions  
When you want to record for a long  
period of time with slightly lower  
image quality.  
available with this Recorder.  
EP  
About 360 minutes  
When you want to place priority on  
recording time.  
• When a disc has been recorded in the VR mode, it can  
be recorded and erased repeatedly. Erasure also allows  
the recording time to be increased.  
• Recordable time is based on the recording time when  
using a 4.7 GB disc. Since recording capacity varies  
according to the recorded material, there may be cases  
where there is much more disc space remaining on the  
disc when recording is completed.  
• Refer to page 42 about the recordable times when you  
choose “MN” (manual) Recording mode.  
* Since recording to DVD is performed using VBR (variable  
bit rate, refer to the section on VBR Control on page 116)  
with the exception of some recording modes, recording  
time varies according to the material to be recorded.  
• Recorded discs can only be played back with DVD-RW  
compatible DVD players*9.  
• “Copy Once” programs can also be recorded*10  
.
*9  
• Although there are some cases in which the disc must  
be finalized, the disc can be recorded and erased  
after it has been finalized.  
• DVD-RW compatible DVD players have the following  
indication.  
DVD players with this indication have the function of  
being able to play back DVD-RW discs recorded in  
the VR mode with a DVD recorder.  
When using a DVD-RW Ver. 1.1 disc (CPRM compatible).  
Recorded programs cannot be played back with other  
DVD players (including DVD-RW players) or DVD  
recorders not compatible with CPRM.  
• Recordable time may be shorter than that indicated above in  
the case of recording material of poor image quality such as  
broadcasts from televisions with poor reception.  
• This does not guarantee the length of recording time. Actual  
recording time may be shorter than that indicated above  
depending on image quality and other aspects.  
• The total of recording time and remaining time may not always  
agree with the recordable time of the recording mode.  
• Block-like images may become conspicuous during scenes  
containing rapid movement due to the characteristics of digital  
image compression technology.  
*10  
Video Mode  
This recording format is compatible with commercially  
available DVD players and DVD-ROM drives.  
• Discs recorded in the Video mode cannot be recorded  
repeatedly or their content overwritten.  
• When recording in the Video mode, discs can be played  
back, additionally recorded and edited only with this  
Recorder until they are finalized. Editing functions are  
limited.  
• Discs recorded in the Video mode can be played back  
with other DVD players by finalizing them after recording.  
(However, this does not guarantee that these discs can  
be played back on all DVD players.)  
Disc Remaining Time  
• Additional recordings can be made as long as there is  
available space on the disc. (Additional recordings  
can also be made after the disc is finalized.)  
• Erasing unnecessary recordings lets you increase the  
remaining time on the disc. (The disc can also be  
erased after it has been finalized.)  
• When a Play List (see page 88) is created, disc space  
will not increase even if portions of titles or titles of  
Play List are erased.  
• Recordings onto DVD-R/RW discs using the Video mode  
employ a new standard approved by the DVD Forum in  
2000, and compatibility with this standard is left to the  
discretion of the respective DVD player manufacturer.  
Consequently, there are some models of DVD players  
and DVD-ROM drives that are unable to play back DVD-  
R/RW discs.  
• Additional recordings can be made with this Recorder  
provided there is available space on the disc until the  
disc is finalized.  
• In case you record on a DVD-RW disc, recordable  
time will increase if you erase the last recorded title  
unless you finalize the DVD-RW disc.  
• “Copy Once” programs cannot be recorded.  
• In case you record on a DVD-R disc, recordable time  
will not increase even if you erase titles (see page 87).  
(The erase function only hides the title, it does not  
actually erase it. It does not actually delete the  
recorded contents.)  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Select the disc and recording format to be used  
according to the objective of the recording.  
Select the disc and recording format by referring  
to the table below.  
                                                                         
Æ
                                                                         
This Recorder is equipped with a copy guard  
function that prevents recording of video software  
or broadcast programs that contain a signal that  
restricts copying in accordance with copyrights and  
so forth.  
                                                                         
Æ
                                                                         
The proper image may not be obtained in the case  
a copy guard signal is contained in the images  
input from equipment connected to the external  
input jacks (LINE IN 1, LINE IN 2, LINE IN 3 or DV  
IN) of this Recorder.  
                                                                         
Æ
                                                                         
About DVD  
Using the Proper Disc  
Unrecordable Material  
Objective  
Disc Used  
Recording Format  
Example:  
• DVD videos  
•
When you want to play  
Recordable  
Video mode  
recording  
+
back a recorded disc with DVD-R disc  
a DVD player or DVD  
• PPV (pay-per-view) broadcasts  
Video compatible PC  
finalization  
4.7  
• When not re-recording a  
recorded disc (when  
making a permanent  
recording or when you  
do not want the  
Example:  
recording to be erased)  
• Images not output at proper brightness  
• Incorrect output of picture size and other data  
Connect such equipment directly to your TV  
without going through this Recorder.  
In the case a copy guard signal is contained in a  
source video that occurs part way through record-  
ing, recording is paused at that point. Recording  
resumes when the copy guard signal is no longer  
present, while no recordings will be made for the  
part where the copy prevention signal is present.  
•
When you want to play  
Recordable  
Video mode  
back a recorded disc with DVD-RW disc recording  
a DVD player or DVD  
Video compatible PC  
• When you want to  
repeatedly record and  
erase a recorded disc  
Ver. 1.1 or Ver.  
1.1 (CPRM  
compatible)  
+
finalization  
• When you want to edit  
a disc recorded with  
this Recorder  
Recordable  
VR mode  
DVD-RW disc recording  
Ver. 1.1 or  
• When playing back with Ver. 1.1  
+
(finalization)  
a DVD-RW compatible  
player with the  
following indication  
(CPRM  
compatible)  
• When you want to  
repeatedly record and  
erase a recorded disc  
• When you want to  
record a “Copy Once”  
Recordable  
VR mode  
DVD-RW disc recording  
satellite broadcast, etc. Ver. 1.1  
(CPRM  
compatible)  
Time display for Recording and  
Playback (Video mode only)  
• With this Recorder, the displayed record/playback time is  
about 0.1% shorter than the actual recording time. In  
video like TV broadcasts, video is sent at a rate of about  
29.9 frames per second. For convenience, this Recorder  
calculates using a value of 30 frames per second.  
(If, for example, you record one hour, the time display on  
the Recorder will be: 60 minutes x 0.999 = 59.94 minutes  
= 59 mins. 56 secs.)  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Initialization and Finalization  
Initialization (Formatting)  
Initialization is required when using DVD-RW discs in the Video mode. (See page 106 for details about Initializa-  
tion.)  
When an unused DVD-RW disc is placed in the Recorder immediately after the disc has been purchased, the Recorder is set  
to automatically begin initializing in the VR mode. The settings can also be changed so that discs are initialized in the Video  
mode (page 106).  
When using a DVD-RW disc in the Video mode without changing this setting, initialize the disc in the Video mode after first  
completing initialization in the VR mode (page 106).  
• Initialization causes the entire previously recorded contents of the disc to be erased.  
• It takes about 1 minute to 1 minute and 30 seconds for initialization to be completed.  
Allowing Discs to Be Played Back with Other DVD Players (Finalization)  
Discs must always be finalized in order to play them back with another DVD player after having been recorded in  
the Video mode. (See page 106 for details about Finalization)  
Finalize discs on which all recordings have been completed so that they can be viewed with another DVD player or a DVD  
Video compatible PC. Discs that are not finalized may not be able to be played back with other DVD players or DVD Video  
compatible PCs. (However, this does not guarantee that finalized discs can be played back on all DVD players or DVD Video  
compatible PCs.)  
• Finalizing a DVD-R disc prevents all recording and editing of that disc.  
• Although DVD-RW discs can be re-recorded by initializing even after they have been recorded in the Video mode and  
finalized, all previously recorded contents are erased.  
• Finalization is required if a disc recorded in the VR mode cannot be played back with a DVD-RW compatible player. (Discs  
formatted in the VR mode can be recorded and edited even after finalization.)  
• Finalization takes from several minutes to about an hour. (Processing takes longer if there is considerable available space  
on the disc.)  
The following operations may cause malfunction.  
• Operating discs recorded or edited by this Recorder in a DVD recorder or PC’s DVD drive manufactured by other manu-  
facturers.  
• Using the discs in above situation again with this Recorder.  
• Operating discs recorded or edited by a DVD recorder or PC’s DVD drive made by other manufacturers than the one for  
this Recorder.  
About the Contents of the Disc  
Title, Chapter and Track  
• DVDs are divided into “Titles” and “Chapters”. If the disc  
has more than one movie on it, each movie would be a  
separate “Title”. “Chapters”, on the other hand, are  
subdivisions of titles. (See Example 1.)  
Example 1: DVD  
• Video CDs and Audio CDs are divided into “Tracks”. You  
can think of a “Track” as one tune on an Audio CD. (See  
Example 2.)  
Title 1  
Title 2  
Chapter 1  
Chapter 2  
Chapter 3  
Chapter 1  
Chapter 2  
Recording on a DVD-R/RW disc  
• One recording is treated as one title and the chapters will  
be inserted automatically every 10 minutes. You can  
choose the chapter interval from the following: 10  
minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, or off (page 98).  
• Each title, chapter and track will be numbered in order.  
Title, chapter and track may not be numbered in some  
discs.  
Example 2: Video CD or Audio CD  
Track 1  
Track 2  
Track 3  
Track 4  
Track 5  
Recording on a DVD-RW disc in VR mode  
• When you pause during recording or erase the scene using edit function, chapter marks will be inserted automatically. You  
can also insert chapter marks at your favorite scenes (page 85).  
Recording in Video mode  
• You cannot insert chapter marks at your favorite scenes.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About the Contents of the Disc  
The Icons Used in This  
Operation Manual  
Icons Used on DVD Video Disc Case  
When you buy a DVD Video disc, the back of the disc case  
usually contains various information about the contents of  
the disc.  
HDD  
...................... Indicates the functions that can be  
performed for the hard disc.  
.............. Indicates the functions that can be  
DVD VIDEO  
1
2
performed for DVD Video discs.  
DVD-RW  
VR MODE  
DVD-RW  
VIDEO MODE  
... Indicates the functions that can be  
performed for DVD-RW discs.  
VR MODE:  
1. English  
2. Chinese  
1. English  
2. Chinese  
2
2
• Indicates that the function will  
operate when recording in VR mode  
or playing back a disc recorded in  
VR mode.  
3
4
5
1 23  
4 56  
16:9 LB  
2
VIDEO MODE:  
• Indicates that the function will  
operate when recording in Video  
mode or playing back a disc  
recorded in Video mode.  
z Audio tracks and audio formats  
DVD discs can contain up to 8 separate tracks with a  
different language on each. The first in the list is the  
original track.  
This section also details the audio format of each  
soundtrack—Dolby Digital, DTS, etc.  
DVD-R  
................... Indicates the functions that can be  
performed for DVD-R discs.  
.................. Indicates the functions that can be  
performed for Video CDs.  
.................. Indicates the functions that can be  
performed for Audio CDs.  
.................. Indicates the functions that can be  
performed for CD-R discs in MP3  
format.  
VIDEO CD  
AUDIO CD  
Dolby Digital  
A sound system developed by Dolby Laboratories Inc.  
that gives movie theater ambience to audio output when  
the Recorder is connected to a Dolby Digital 5.1  
channel processor or amplifier.  
CD-R  
MP3  
CD-RW  
.................. Indicates the functions that can be  
performed for CD-RW discs in MP3  
format.  
DTS  
MP3  
DTS is a digital sound system developed by Digital  
Theater Systems for use in cinemas. This system uses 6  
audio channels and provides accurate sound field  
positioning and realistic acoustics. (By connecting a  
DTS Digital Surround decoder, you can also listen to  
DTS Digital Surround sound.)  
Linear PCM  
Linear PCM is a signal recording format used for Audio  
CDs.  
The sound on Audio CDs is recorded at 44.1 kHz with  
16 bits. (On DVD discs, sound is recorded at between  
48 kHz with 16 bits and 96 kHz with 24 bits.)  
x Subtitle languages  
This indicates the kind of subtitles.  
c Screen aspect ratio  
Movies are shot in a variety of screen modes.  
v Camera angle  
Recorded onto some DVD discs are scenes which have  
been simultaneously shot from a number of different  
angles (the same scene is shot from the front, from the  
left side, from the right side, etc.).  
b Region code  
This indicates the region code (playable region  
number).  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                                                  
Æ
Æ
                                                                                  
Always Make Sure to Test Record First  
                                                                                  
                                                                                  
Compensation for Recordings  
Important Information  
Disc Precautions  
Copyright  
• It is the intent of Sharp that this product be used in full  
compliance with the copyright laws of the United States  
and that prior permission be obtained from copyright  
owners whenever necessary.  
Be Careful of Scratches and Dust  
• DVD-R and DVD-RW discs are sensitive to dust, finger-  
prints and especially scratches. A scratched disc may  
not be able to be recorded, or important data recorded  
may not be able to be played back. Handle discs with  
care and store them in a safe place.  
• This product incorporates copyright protection technology  
that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents  
and other intellectual property right owned by Macrovision  
Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright  
protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision  
Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited  
viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by  
Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or  
disassembly is prohibited.  
Proper Disc Storage  
Place the disc in the center of  
the disc case and store the  
case and disc upright.  
Avoid storing discs in locations  
subject to direct sunlight, next  
to heating appliances or in  
locations of high humidity.  
Do not drop discs or subject  
them to strong vibrations or  
impacts.  
Avoid storing discs in locations  
where there are large amounts  
of dust or locations where mold  
tends to grow easily.  
Apparatus Claims of U.S. Patent Nos. 4,631,603,  
4,577,216, 4,819,098 and 4,907,093 licensed for  
limited viewing uses only.  
• Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.  
“Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of  
Dolby Laboratories.  
• “DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are trademarks of Digital  
Theater Systems, Inc.  
• Certain audio features of this product manufactured  
under a license from Desper Products, Inc. Spatializer®  
N-2-2™ and the circle-in-square device are trademarks  
owned by Desper Products, Inc.  
• The DVD logo is a registered trademark.  
• i.LINK refers to the IEEE 1394-1995 industry specification  
Handling Precautions  
• If the surface is soiled, wipe gently with a soft, damp  
(water only) cloth. When wiping discs, always move the  
cloth from the center hole toward the outer edge.  
and extensions thereof. The  
logo is used for products  
compliant with the i.LINK standard.  
•
is a trademark.  
• VCR Plus+ and PlusCode are registered trademarks of  
Gemstar Development Corporation. The VCR Plus+  
system is manufactured under license from Gemstar  
Development Corporation.  
• Do not use record cleaning sprays, benzene, thinner,  
static electricity prevention liquids or any other solvent.  
• Do not touch the surface.  
• Do not stick paper or adhesive labels to the disc.  
• If the playing surface of a disc is soiled or scratched, the  
Recorder may decide that the disc is incompatible and  
eject the disc tray, or it may fail to play the disc correctly.  
Wipe any soiling off the playing surface with a soft cloth.  
“Licensed under one or more of U.S. Pat. 4,972,484,  
5,214,678, 5,323,396, 5,530,655, 5,539,829, 5,544,247,  
5,606,618, 5,610,985, 5,740,317, 5,777,992, 5,878,080  
or 5,960,037.”  
Cleaning the Pick Up Lens  
• Never use commercially available cleaning discs. The  
use of these discs can damage the lens.  
• Request cleaning of the lens to the nearest Sharp  
Authorized Service Center.  
Cautions Regarding Recording  
• Make a test recording with a DVD-RW disc first before  
making any important recordings to confirm whether  
or not the recorded material is recorded properly.  
Warning of Dew Formation  
• Dew may form on pick up lens or disc in the following  
conditions:  
• In the event a recording is unable to be made due to a  
problem with this Recorder or a disc, or due to an  
external factor such as a power failure or condensa-  
tion of moisture and so forth, the manufacturer is not  
responsible for compensation for unrecorded contents  
or incidental damages.  
• Immediately after a heater has been turned on.  
• In a steamy or very humid room.  
• When the Recorder is suddenly moved from a cold  
environment to a warm one.  
When dew forms:  
It becomes difficult for the Recorder to read the signals  
on the disc and prevents the Recorder from operating  
properly.  
To remove dew:  
Take out the disc and leave the recorder with the power  
off until the dew disappears. Using the recorder with  
dew formation may cause malfunction.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12 ÆREC (pp. 39, 41)  
                                                                                               
                                                                                               
17  
                                                                                               
|
                                                                                               
PLAY (pp. 64, 70)  
Major Components  
Main Unit (Front)  
1
2 3  
4
5
6
7
8
To open the  
front door, lay  
your finger on  
this part and pull  
toward you.  
9
10  
11  
12 13 14 15  
16 17 18 19  
1 POWER (p. 26)  
7 Disc tray (p. 40)  
8 OPEN/CLOSE (p. 40)  
9 RESET (p. 110)  
10 LINE IN 3 (p. 97)  
• AUDIO Input jacks  
• VIDEO Input jack  
• S-VIDEO Input jack  
2 STANDBY indicator (p. 26)  
3 TIMER indicator (p. 44)  
4 CHANNEL "/'  
13 REC STOP (pp. 39, 41)  
14 REC PAUSE (pp. 39, 41)  
15 HDD (p. 35)  
5 PLAY/REC indicators  
(for HDD) (pp. 39, 64)  
6 PLAY/REC indicators  
(for DVD) (pp. 41, 69)  
16 DVD (p. 35)  
18 ■ STOP/LIVE (pp. 64, 69)  
11 DV IN terminal (p. 95)  
19 STILL/PAUSE (pp. 67, 71)  
Front Panel Display  
1 Chapter indicator (p. 34)  
1
2
3
2 Disc Remaining Time indicator (p. 34)  
3 Title indicator (p. 34)  
4 Dubbing indicator (p. 60)  
7
5 Recording Mode indicator (p. 39)  
6 AV AUTO REC indicator (p. 55)  
7 Information Display (p. 34)  
4
5
6
8
9
8 Tamper Proof indicator (p. 38)  
9 Simple Recording Timer indicator (p. 39)  
Main Unit (Rear)  
4 LINE IN 1 (AUTO REC) (p. 55)  
• AUDIO Input jacks  
• VIDEO Input jack  
• S-VIDEO Input jack  
5 LINE IN 2  
• AUDIO Input jacks  
• VIDEO Input jack  
• S-VIDEO Input jack  
1
2
3
6
7
6 LINE OUT 1 (p. 22)  
• AUDIO Output jacks  
• VIDEO Output jack  
• S-VIDEO Output jack  
7 LINE OUT 2 (p. 93)  
• AUDIO Output jacks  
4
5
8 9  
• VIDEO Output jack  
• S-VIDEO Output jack  
8 DIGITAL AUDIO Output COAXIAL jack  
1 PASS THROUGH jack (p. 22)  
(p. 93)  
2 IN FROM ANTENNA jack (antenna or cable  
input) (p. 22)  
9 DIGITAL AUDIO Output OPTICAL terminal  
(p. 93)  
3 COMPONENT Video Output jacks (p. 23)  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                                             
Æ
                                                                             
REC (pp. 39, 41)  
Major Components  
Remote Control Unit  
1 POWER (p. 26)  
OPEN/CLOSE (p. 40)  
2
3 Number buttons (pp. 21, 45)  
4 CH DISPLAY (p. 33)  
5 TIME SHIFT (p. 37)  
6* START MENU (p. 29)  
1
2
18  
7* HDD (p. 35)  
8* REC LIST/DVD TITLE (pp. 65, 73)  
9* Cursor buttons ('/"/\/|) (pp. 27, 29)  
10* EXIT (p. 29)  
11 COLOR BUTTON (pp. 43, 65)  
Blue (A), Red (B), Green (C), Yellow (D)  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
3
4
5
6
7
8
12*  
REV (pp. 37, 67, 71)  
13* STILL/PAUSE (pp. 37, 67, 71)  
14* ■ STOP/LIVE (pp. 37, 64, 70)  
15  
16  
F.ADV  
,
SKIP  
(pp. 67, 70, 71)  
27  
28  
17 REC STOP (pp. 39, 41)  
18 TV CONTROL buttons (p. 21)  
19 CH "/'  
20 DIRECT (p. 66)  
21 VCR PLUS+ (p. 45)  
22 ERASE (p. 45)  
23 DUBBING (p. 59)  
24 P IN P (p. 77)  
25 INPUT/ Repeat (pp. 68, 71, 96)  
26* DVD (p. 35)  
27* ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST / DVD MENU  
(pp. 65, 73, 80)  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
16  
35  
36  
17  
28* SET/ENTER (pp. 27, 29)  
29* n RETURN (p. 29)  
30* |PLAY (pp. 37, 64, 70)  
31*  
FWD (pp. 37, 67, 71)  
32* SLOW (pp. 67, 71)  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
33 REPLAY (pp. 67, 71)  
34 SKIP SEARCH (pp. 67, 71)  
35 REC MODE/ ZOOM (pp. 39, 41, 68, 72)  
36 REC PAUSE (pp. 39, 41)  
37 ANGLE (p. 72)  
38 FUNCTION (p. 75)  
39 FAVORITE PROG. LIST/AV AUTO REC  
(pp. 50, 55, 66)  
40 CHAPTER MARK / CONNECTION GUIDE/  
RESET (pp. 27, 39, 41, 64, 69)  
41 AUDIO (pp. 33, 68, 72)  
NOTE  
42 SUBTITLE (p. 72)  
• Buttons marked with “*” are made of  
luminous rubber for easy visibility even in  
the dark. (The degree of brightness will  
decrease as time passes.)  
43 DISPLAY/BACKLIGHT (pp. 34, 44)  
44 ON SCREEN (p. 33)  
45 TAMPER PROOF (p. 38)  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Major Components  
Loading the Batteries  
1 While pressing Y down, 2 Load the batteries.  
3 Slide the battery cover  
in the direction of the  
arrow until it clicks.  
slide the battery cover in  
the direction of the  
arrow.  
Load the two “AAA” size batteries (R-03,  
UM/SUM-4) supplied with the remote  
control unit. Make sure that the battery  
poles  
and  
are positioned as  
indicated.  
NOTE  
• Do not subject the remote control unit to shock, water or excessive humidity.  
• The remote control unit may not function if the Recorder’s remote sensor is in direct sunlight or any other strong light.  
• Incorrect use of batteries may cause them to leak or burst. Read the battery warnings and use the batteries properly.  
• Do not mix old and new batteries, or mix different brands.  
• Remove the batteries if you will not use the remote control unit for an extended period of time.  
Operating range of remote control  
Remote sensor  
About 30°  
About 30°  
Front 22.96ft.  
Remote control  
unit  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
'
                     
/
                        
"
                        
Major Components  
Operating a TV Using the  
Remote Control  
Setting the Remote  
Control Code  
• Two types of remote control codes operate  
this Recorder: RC-1 and RC-2. If you  
operate this Recorder by remote control  
along with another SHARP DVD recorder or  
DVD player placed next to it simulta-  
neously, switching the remote control code  
(both the Recorder and remote control) to  
one of the signals (RC-1 or RC-2) will let  
you operate only with this Recorder.  
• Make sure to set the Recorder and remote  
control to the same remote code. You can  
not operate the Recorder if they are not set  
to the same code.  
(
Universal Remote Control)  
The Universal Remote Control may operate the  
basic functions of 21 different types of TVs.  
To enter the Manufacturer’s Code for your TV,  
follow the instructions below.  
There is no guarantee that the universal  
remote control will function with your TV.  
Setting the  
Manufacturer’s Code  
1 Press POWER and CH ' of TV  
CONTROL simultaneously.  
Setting the Remote Con-  
2 Enter the 2-digit Manufacturer’s  
Code with the Number buttons  
(Ex. 02-“0”, “2”) within 10  
trol Code of the Remote  
Example: Setting the code to “RC-2”.  
seconds after releasing POWER  
and CH ' of TV CONTROL.  
1 Press and hold POWER and 2  
together for more than 5 seconds.  
3 Point the remote control unit  
towards the TV and then press  
POWER of TV CONTROL.  
• If the TV turns on/off, setup was  
successful. If not, repeat the proce-  
dure using another code.  
2 Press POWER of this Recorder to  
see if you can turn it on/off.  
• If you cannot, go to step 3.  
NOTE  
• The remote control code of the remote  
becomes “RC-1” when you change the  
batteries.  
See the list below for the Manufacturer’s Code  
and the buttons which work with each brand.  
POWER  
Buttons on the Remote  
CH '/"  
INPUT  
Setting the Remote Con-  
trol Code of the Recorder  
Brand  
EMERSON  
FISHER  
FUNAI  
Code  
19  
17  
VOL  
/
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
—
—
×
×
—
×
×
×
×
—
×
×
×
×
×
3 Press POWER to turn off the  
06  
GE  
07, 09  
18  
15  
Recorder.  
GOLDSTAR  
HITACHI  
JVC  
CHANNEL Front display  
panel  
4 Press and hold CHANNEL"and  
'on the Recorder together for  
more than 5 seconds.  
16  
09  
11  
MAGNAVOX  
• Each time this operation is performed,  
the code of the Recorder toggles  
between “RC-1” and “RC-2”. The front  
panel display changes as the code  
changes.  
• Press POWER on the remote control  
to see if you can turn on/off the  
Recorder.  
MITSUBISHI  
PANASONIC  
PIONEER  
RCA  
SAMSUNG  
SANYO  
14  
13, 21  
03  
07, 09  
20  
17  
01  
02  
SHARP  
SONY  
10  
TECHNOL ACE  
TOSHIBA  
04  
12  
×
×
×
—
If remote control does not  
work  
05  
08  
ZENITH  
Press POWER on the remote control and  
check the front panel display (RC-1 or RC-2).  
Set the remote control code according to the  
display and press POWER to see if you can  
turn on/off the Recorder.  
NOTE  
• If the batteries in the remote control unit are  
changed, the code settings must be re-  
entered.  
• Some brands have more than one code  
listed above, due to changes in the codes.  
In such cases, try another code to find the  
code that operates your TV.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Connection  
1 Connect the TV antenna  
cable to the IN FROM  
ANTENNA jack on the rear  
of this Recorder.  
Easy Connection  
The following connection is the basic connection to watch or record TV programs.  
To use a cable box or satellite receiver, see “CATV or Satellite Receiver Connec-  
tions” on pages 24 and 25.  
2 Connect the PASS  
THROUGH jack on the rear  
of this Recorder to the  
antenna input jack on your  
VCR using the supplied  
coaxial cable.  
Important!  
•Be sure to turn off and unplug from the AC outlet this Recorder and all  
equipment before connecting the cables.  
•This Recorder is equipped with copy protection technology. The playback  
picture from this Recorder will not appear correctly on your TV when you  
connect this Recorder to your TV via a VCR (or your VCR via this Recorder)  
using video/audio cables.  
NOTE  
•If you connect this Recorder directly  
to your TV, skip the next step.  
TV  
3 Connect the antenna  
output jack on your VCR to  
antenna input jack on your  
TV using a coaxial cable.  
To video/audio  
input jacks  
To video/audio  
input jacks  
4
Connect the VIDEO/AUDIO  
Output jacks on this Re-  
corder to the video/audio  
input jacks on your TV using  
the supplied video/audio  
cable.  
Video/audio  
cable  
(supplied)  
Video/audio  
cable  
(commercially  
available)  
4
Be sure that the colors of the  
jacks and plugs match up when  
connecting the cable.  
5
Coaxial cable  
(commercially available)  
To antenna  
input jack  
3
NOTE  
•To connect using S-video or  
component cables, see “Using  
Other Types of Video Output” on  
page 23.  
To antenna  
output jack  
To video/audio  
output jacks  
VCR  
5 Connect the video/audio  
output jacks on your VCR  
to the video/audio input  
jacks on your TV using a  
video/audio cable.  
To antenna  
input jack  
Coaxial cable  
(supplied)  
Important!  
2
•When using this connection, set  
“PROGRESSIVE OUT” to  
“PROGRESSIVE SCAN OFF” (see  
page 102).  
To PASS  
THROUGH  
After the connection  
Plug in the power cords of the TV and  
VCR. Then go to “EZ Set Up” (see  
page 26).  
The Recorder  
To antenna/CATV  
wall outlet  
To IN FROM  
ANTENNA  
1
Antenna cable  
(commercially available)  
To VIDEO/AUDIO  
Output jacks  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Connection  
Using Other Types of Video Output  
In order to view clearer DVD images, it is recommended that you use a commer-  
cially available S-video or component video cable when connecting your TV to the  
video output.  
TV  
Connecting Using  
an S-VIDEO Output  
Connect the S-VIDEO Output  
jack on this Recorder to the S-  
video input jack on your TV  
using an S-video cable (com-  
mercially available).  
To S-video  
input jack  
Important!  
•When using this connection, set  
“PROGRESSIVE OUT” to  
“PROGRESSIVE SCAN OFF” (see  
page 102).  
S-video cable  
(commercially  
available)  
After the connection  
Plug in the power cord of the TV. Then  
go to “EZ Set Up” (see page 26).  
The Recorder  
To S-VIDEO  
Output jack  
TV  
Connecting Using  
the COMPONENT  
Video Output  
To component  
input jacks  
Connect the COMPONENT OUT  
jacks on this Recorder to the  
component input jacks on your  
TV using a component video  
cable (commercially available).  
Important!  
Component  
• When using this connection:  
If your TV is compatible with  
progressive-scan component  
video, set “PROGRESSIVE OUT” to  
“PROGRESSIVE SCAN ON” (see  
page 102).  
video cable  
(commercially  
available)  
The Recorder  
If not, set it to “PROGRESSIVE  
SCAN OFF”.  
After the connection  
Plug in the power cord of the TV. Then  
go to “EZ Set Up” (see page 26).  
To COMPONENT  
Video Output jacks  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CATV or Satellite Receiver Connections  
1 Connect the TV antenna/  
Connecting to a Cable Box or Satellite Receiver (1)  
CATV cable and coaxial  
The following connection is the connection to a cable box or satellite receiver  
cables as shown on the  
when receiving only a few scrambled channels. When many or all the channels  
are scrambled, see the connection on page 25.  
left.  
You can watch TV channels.  
Using this connection, you can:  
2 Connect the VIDEO/AUDIO  
•Record unscrambled CATV signals by selecting them on this Recorder.  
Output jacks on this  
Recorder to the video/  
audio input jacks on your  
TV using the supplied  
video/audio cable.  
•Record scrambled CATV signals by selecting them on the cable box or satellite  
receiver and selecting the input used on the Recorder.  
•Record a channel while you watch another.  
•Record using the “AV AUTO REC” function (see page 55) when LINE IN 1 is  
used for cable box/satellite receiver connection.  
You can watch video played back  
on the Recorder.  
TV  
To video/audio  
input jacks  
3 Connect the IN 1 (AUTO  
REC) VIDEO/AUDIO jacks  
on this Recorder to the  
video/audio output jacks  
on your cable box or  
satellite receiver using a  
video/audio cable.  
Video/audio  
cable  
(supplied)  
You can record scrambled CATV  
channels when using a cable box  
or satellite receiver for decoding.  
2
Coaxial cable  
(commercially available)  
To antenna  
input jack  
NOTE  
•These are standard video connec-  
tions. You can use S-video or  
component connections if they are  
available.  
1
To antenna  
output jack  
Cable box/  
Satellite receiver  
To video/audio  
output jacks  
Important!  
•Connect this Recorder directly to  
your TV and not via the cable box,  
satellite receiver, or a VCR.  
•When using this connection, set  
“PROGRESSIVE OUT” to  
“PROGRESSIVE SCAN OFF” (see  
page 102).  
To antenna  
input jack  
Video/audio cable  
(commercially available)  
Coaxial cable  
(supplied)  
3
1
After the connection  
To PASS  
THROUGH  
Plug in the power cords of the TV and  
cable box/satellite receiver. Then go to  
“EZ Set Up” (see page 26).  
The Recorder  
To IN 1 (AUTO REC)  
VIDEO/AUDIO jacks  
To VIDEO/AUDIO  
Output jacks  
To antenna/CATV  
wall outlet  
To IN FROM  
ANTENNA  
1
Antenna cable  
(commercially available)  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CATV or Satellite Receiver Connections  
1 Connect the TV antenna/  
CATV cable and coaxial  
cables as shown on the  
left.  
Connecting to a Cable Box or Satellite Receiver (2)  
The following connection is the connection to a cable box or satellite receiver  
when many or all the channels received are scrambled.  
Using this connection, you can:  
You can watch TV channels.  
•Record any CATV signals by selecting them on the cable box or satellite  
receiver.  
•Record using the “AV AUTO REC” function (see page 55) when LINE IN 1 is  
used for cable box/satellite receiver connection.  
2 Connect the VIDEO/AUDIO  
Output jacks on this  
Recorder to the video/  
audio input jacks on your  
TV using the supplied  
video/audio cable.  
You can watch video played back  
on the Recorder.  
NOTE  
•With this connection, you cannot record a channel while you watch another.  
TV  
3 Connect the IN 1 (AUTO  
REC) VIDEO/AUDIO jacks  
on this Recorder to the  
video/audio output jacks  
on your cable box or  
satellite receiver using a  
video/audio cable.  
To video/audio  
input jacks  
You can record scrambled CATV  
channels.  
Video/audio  
cable  
NOTE  
To antenna  
(supplied)  
input jack  
•These are standard video connec-  
tions. You can use S-video or  
component connections if they are  
available.  
2
Coaxial cable  
(commercially available)  
1
To VIDEO/AUDIO  
Output jacks  
To PASS  
THROUGH  
Important!  
•Connect this Recorder directly to  
your TV and not via the cable box,  
satellite receiver, or a VCR.  
•When using this connection, set  
“PROGRESSIVE OUT” to  
“PROGRESSIVE SCAN OFF” (see  
page 102).  
The Recorder  
After the connection  
To IN 1 (AUTO REC)  
VIDEO/AUDIO jacks  
To IN FROM  
ANTENNA  
Plug in the power cords of the TV and  
cable box/satellite receiver. Then go to  
“EZ Set Up” (see page 26).  
Video/audio cable  
(commercially available)  
Coaxial cable  
(supplied)  
3
1
To video/audio  
output jacks  
To antenna  
output jack  
Cable box/  
Satellite  
receiver  
To antenna  
input jack  
To antenna/CATV  
wall outlet  
1
Antenna cable  
(commercially available)  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EZ Set Up  
Important! (Caution during EZ Set Up):  
• Do not press POWER on the Recorder or remote control.  
The EZ Set Up function automatically sets the tuner channels and clock when the  
antenna cable is connected to the rear of the Recorder and the power plug is  
then connected to an AC outlet.  
POWER  
Important!  
When using a cable box:  
• See “CATV or Satellite Receiver Connections” on pages 24 and 25.  
• Leave power on the cable box turned on and select a channel that carries EDS signals.  
1 Make sure that the antenna cable is connected. For connection configuration, refer to “Basic  
Connection” on page 22.  
2 Connect the power plug of the Recorder to an AC outlet.  
3 The tuner channels and clock will automatically be set.  
• This Recorder can monitor and use time-signals (EDS signals), which are provided by some TV stations, to automati-  
cally adjust the clock. This Recorder automatically searches EDS signals, but if you are in a hurry to use timer  
recording or know the channel of the EDS signal carrier in your area, follow the procedure in “Auto Clock Setting”  
(page 30) or “Manual Clock Setting” (page 31).  
During Auto Channel Setting  
During Auto Clock Setting  
EZ Set Up complete  
• Channel number is increasing.  
NOTE  
• If power is supplied to the Recorder before the cable is connected, EZ Set Up will not be able to preset the channels into  
memory. If this occurs, press RESET inside the front door of the Recorder (see page 18). The EZ Set Up function will work  
again.  
• If the power is turned on during EZ Set Up, Auto Channel Setting will be interrupted and the tuner channels will not be  
preset.  
• Auto Clock Setting may take several minutes.  
• If Auto Clock Setting is not completed within 30 minutes, there may be no channels with EDS signals. In this case, set the  
clock manually. (See “Manual Clock Setting” on page 31.)  
• If the antenna signal is weak, the Auto Clock Setting function may not operate.  
• During initial channel setting, the channels are set into the AIR channel setting. To watch CATV channels, select “CATV” on  
the “CHANNEL PRESET” screen. (See “Channel Setting” on page 32.)  
• If you press POWER again immediately after turning off,  
Turning the Power On  
After finishing EZ Set Up, press POWER on the  
remote control or Recorder to turn on the power  
the Recorder may not turn on. If this happens, wait a  
while and then turn on power again.  
About the Power Supply  
of Recorder.  
• Do not unplug the power cord immediately after you  
• When you turn on power, the HDD button and DVD button  
on the front of Recorder will blink. If either the HDD or  
DVD button is blinking, system processing is in progress,  
so wait until the button lights up.  
When the Recorder power is turned on for the first time after  
purchase, following EZ Set Up, the OSD LANGUAGE Select  
screen is displayed and the Connection Guide function will  
then operate. Follow the procedure shown on pages 27  
and 28. From the second time on, the OSD LANGUAGE  
Select screen will not appear after EZ Set Up.  
plug it into the AC outlet (less than about 15 seconds  
after plugging in). In very rare cases, this may cause  
the memory to revert to its initial state, and all timer  
programs will be erased. If this happens, EZ Set Up  
will be performed automatically. If you pull out the  
power plug while power is on, it will take a while for the  
hard disc to get ready when you turn on power the  
next time. During this time you can only view live  
broadcasts.  
•
• If you turn on power in a low-temperature environment,  
only live broadcast viewing is possible until the hard  
disc (HDD) reaches its operating temperature.  
To Turn the Power Off  
Press POWER on the remote control or Recorder  
to turn off power.  
• The HDD or DVD button on the front of Recorder will go  
out, and the STANDBY indicator will light up.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connection Guide  
Before using the Recorder, use the  
Connection Guide function for easy initial  
settings regarding TV connection, on-screen  
language, etc.  
Selecting the TV Terminal  
5 Press '/ "to select the type of  
video input terminal on the  
connected TV.  
Preparation  
•Turn on the power of TV.  
•Switch TV input to the AV input used to  
connect to the Recorder.  
CONNECTION GUIDE  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
SELECT TV TERMINAL  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
1 Press and hold CONNECTION  
COMPONENT (Y, PB, PR)  
GUIDE for more than 2 seconds.  
6 Press SET/ENTER.  
Selecting the On-screen  
Display Language  
•The “SELECT TV MODE” screen is  
displayed.  
2 Press '/ "to select the lan-  
Selecting the TV Screen  
Aspect Ratio  
guage you want to use.  
OSD LANGUAGE  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
7 Press '/ "to select the screen  
SELECT OSD LANGUAGE  
ENGLISH  
aspect ratio of the connected TV.  
CONNECTION GUIDE  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
FRANÇAIS  
ESPAÑOL  
SELECT TV MODE  
WIDE 16:9  
NORMAL 4:3  
NOTE  
•You can change On-Screen Display  
Language afterward using the Connection  
Guide function.  
8 Press SET/ENTER.  
•The “ADVANCED SETTINGS”  
Confirmation screen is displayed.  
3 Press SET/ENTER.  
9 Press \/|to select “YES” or  
•The “START TV SET UP” screen with  
“OK” button is displayed.  
“NO”, then press SET/ENTER.  
CONNECTION GUIDE  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
CONNECTION GUIDE  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
START TV SET UP.  
ADVANCED SETTINGS  
SETUP CAN BE CHANGED AFTERWARD.  
OK  
YES  
NO  
4 Press SET/ENTER.  
• When “YES” is selected  
•The “SELECT TV TERMINAL” Select  
screen is displayed.  
The “ADVANCED SETTINGS” screen  
is displayed. Proceed to step 10.  
• When “NO” is selected  
NOTE  
The “INITIAL SETTING COMPLETE”  
screen with “OK” button is displayed.  
Proceed to step 17.  
•Press RETURN to go back to the preced-  
ing screen during the setting procedure.  
Continued on Next Page |||  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connection Guide  
14Press '/ "to select “DIGITAL  
AUDIO OUT”, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
Advanced Setting  
10Press '/ "to select “PRO-  
GRESSIVE OUT”, then press  
SET/ENTER.  
CONNECTION GUIDE  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
IMAGE/SOUND SET LIST/ADV SET  
[
]
]
]
]
SET  
SET  
SET  
SET  
TV MODE  
NORMAL (4:3)  
CONNECTION GUIDE  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
[
[
[
PROGRESSIVE OUT  
DD OUTPUT LEVEL  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  
OFF  
NO  
IMAGE/SOUND SET LIST/ADV SET  
Dolby Digital  
[
]
]
]
]
SET  
SET  
SET  
SET  
TV MODE  
NORMAL (4:3)  
[
[
[
PROGRESSIVE OUT  
DD OUTPUT LEVEL  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  
OFF  
NO  
Dolby Digital  
•The “DIGITAL AUDIO OUT” screen is  
displayed.  
•The “SETS PROGRESSIVE SCAN  
OUTPUT” screen is displayed.  
15Press '/ "to select “PCM” or  
“Dolby Digital”, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
11Press \/|to select “PROGRES-  
SIVE SCAN ON” or “PROGRES-  
SIVE SCAN OFF”, then press  
SET/ENTER.  
CONNECTION GUIDE  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  
CONNECTION GUIDE  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
CAN CONNECT TO NORMAL AUDIO  
DEVICE (2CH).  
PCM  
SETS PROGRESSIVE SCAN OUTPUT  
YOU CAN ENJOY CLEAR IMAGES WHEN PROGRESSIVE  
TV IS PLAYED BACK VIA COMPONENT TERMINAL.  
SURROUND EFFECT BY CONNECTING  
TO Dolby Digital COMPATIBLE  
AUDIO DEVICE.  
Dolby Digital  
PROGRESSIVE SCAN ON  
PROGRESSIVE SCAN OFF  
•The display returns to the “IMAGE/  
SOUND SET LIST/ADV SET” screen.  
•The display returns to the “IMAGE/  
SOUND SET LIST/ADV SET” screen.  
16Press '/ "to select “AD-  
VANCED SET COMPLETE”, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
12Press '/ "to select “DD  
OUTPUT LEVEL”, then press  
SET/ENTER.  
CONNECTION GUIDE  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
IMAGE/SOUND SET LIST/ADV SET  
[
]
]
]
]
SET  
SET  
SET  
SET  
TV MODE  
NORMAL (4:3)  
CONNECTION GUIDE  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
[
[
[
PROGRESSIVE OUT  
DD OUTPUT LEVEL  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  
OFF  
NO  
IMAGE/SOUND SET LIST/ADV SET  
[
]
]
]
]
Dolby Digital  
SET  
SET  
SET  
SET  
TV MODE  
NORMAL (4:3)  
[
[
[
PROGRESSIVE OUT  
DD OUTPUT LEVEL  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  
OFF  
NO  
ADVANCED SET COMPLETE  
Dolby Digital  
•The “INITIAL SETTING COMPLETE”  
screen with “OK” button is displayed.  
•For details of Function Setting, see  
p.102 and 103.  
•The “DOLBY DIGITAL OUTPUT  
LEVEL SETTING” screen is displayed.  
13Press \/|to select “NO” or  
“YES”, then press SET/ENTER.  
NOTE  
CONNECTION GUIDE  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
•Press RETURN to go back to the preced-  
ing screen during the setting procedure.  
Dolby Digital OUTPUT LEVEL SETTING  
ADJUST AUDIO RANGE WHEN HARD TO HEAR DIALOG OF  
Dolby Digital AUDIO PLAYBACK?  
Completing the Initial  
Setting  
NO  
YES  
17Press SET/ENTER to end the  
•The display returns to the “IMAGE/  
SOUND SET LIST/ADV SET” screen.  
initial setting procedure.  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
INITIAL SETTING COMPLETE  
OK  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Operate using  
                                                                                                                    
'
                                                                                                                    
/
                                                                                                                        
"
                                                                                                                        
/
                                                                                                                           
\
                                                                                                                           
/
                                                                                                                              
|
                                                                                                                              
and SET/  
About START MENU  
About START MENU  
With this Recorder, you can call up functions  
like Playback, Edit and Other Settings from  
the START MENU.  
For details on operation procedures, see the  
page explaining each option.  
Basic START MENU  
Operation  
1 Press START MENU to display  
the START MENU.  
START MENU REC LIST  
[
]
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
1
2
3
EDIT/  
ERASE  
REC LIST  
DUBBING  
[
]
START MENU REC LIST  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
DISPLAYS LIST OF RECORDED TITLES FOR PLAYBACK  
EDIT/  
REC LIST  
DUBBING  
TIMER  
INITIALIZE/  
PROGRAM/  
FINALIZE  
CHECK  
ERASE  
OTHER  
SETTINGS  
DISPLAYS LIST OF RECORDED TITLES FOR PLAYBACK  
5
6
TIMER  
INITIALIZE/  
PROGRAM/  
FINALIZE  
CHECK  
OTHER  
SETTINGS  
4
7
2 Press '/"/\/|to select an  
option.  
INFORMATION  
Example: When “OTHER SETTINGS” is  
selected  
1 REC LIST  
[
]
START MENU OTHER SETTINGS  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
DUBBING  
Playing back with REC LIST… page 65  
Calling up various functions… page 65  
2 EDIT/ERASE  
EDIT/  
ERASE  
REC LIST  
Editing with the Original Title List/  
Play List… page 81  
TIMER  
PROGRAM/  
CHECK  
INITIALIZE/  
FINALIZE  
OTHER  
SETTINGS  
Erasing all recorded titles… page 87  
Erasing selected titles… page 87  
Protecting titles from erasure… page 86  
3 DUBBING  
High speed dubbing… page 59  
Rate conversion dubbing… page 59  
4 TIMER PROGRAM/CHECK  
Programming with Easy Recording  
Guide… page 43  
Timer recording with VCR Plus+®… page 45  
Timer recording by designating date and  
time… page 47  
Timer recording favorite programs… page 49  
Checking/Changing timer settings… page 54  
5 INITIALIZE/FINALIZE  
DISPLAYS SET ITEMS BEFORE REC/PLAYBACK  
INFORMATION  
3 Press SET/ENTER to enter the  
selected option.  
• The screen for the selected option will  
appear.  
ENTER.  
[
]
OTHER SETTINGS REC. FUNCTION  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
REC. FUNCTION  
VIEW/PLAY SETTING ADJUSTMENT  
AUTO CHAPTER  
EXACT RECORDING  
REC. AUDIO FORMAT  
EXTERNAL AUDIO  
DUAL MONO REC. SET  
MANUAL REC. MODE  
SAP SETTING  
DVD/HDD initialization… page 106  
DVD finalization… page 106  
6 OTHER SETTINGS  
4 Press START MENU or EXIT to  
quit the START MENU.  
Recording function setting… page 98  
Viewing/Play setting… page 100  
Adjustment… page 102  
• The “START MENU” screen will close,  
and the screen will return to normal.  
7 INFORMATION… page 38  
NOTE  
• If you perform no operation, the “START  
MENU” screen will disappear after about 1  
minute.  
• This operation will not work at the  
following times:  
During playback, during Time Shift  
Viewing, during display of the REC LIST,  
and at the erase screen.  
• If you make a mistake in operation and  
want to start over, press RETURN to go  
back to the preceding screen.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• As you press  
                                                                                                              
\
                                                                                                              
/
                                                                                                                 
|
                                                                                                                 
in step 9, the TIME  
Clock Setting  
8
9
Press SET/ENTER to select “TIME  
Auto Clock Setting  
ZONE”.  
(If you know a channel that carries EDS  
signals)  
Press \/|to select the desired  
time zone.  
• If you want the Recorder to use the  
time zone from which broadcasts with  
EDS signals are received, choose  
“AUTO”. If broadcasts with EDS  
signals are received from a different  
time zone than the one in which you  
live, be sure to select your time zone.  
Important!  
When using a cable box:  
• See “CATV or Satellite Receiver Connec-  
tions” on pages 24 and 25.  
• Leave power on the cable box turned on  
and select a channel that carries EDS  
signals.  
OTHER SETTINGS[CLOCK SETTING]  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
AUTO SETTING  
ADJUST CLOCK USING EDS BROADCAST  
MANUAL SETTING  
SIGNAL.  
1 Press START MENU to display  
SELECT THE EDS CH SETTING METHOD  
EDS CH SET  
the START MENU screen.  
AUTO  
[
]
START MENU REC LIST  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
MANUAL  
13  
SET THE TIME ZONE  
TIME ZONE  
EDIT/  
ERASE  
REC LIST  
DUBBING  
ATLANTIC  
DISPLAYS LIST OF RECORDED TITLES FOR PLAYBACK  
TIMER  
INITIALIZE/  
PROGRAM/  
FINALIZE  
CHECK  
OTHER  
SETTINGS  
10 Press SET/ENTER, then EXIT.  
2 Press '/"/\/|to select  
“OTHER SETTINGS”, then press  
SET/ENTER.  
11 Press POWER to turn off the  
Recorder.  
3 Press \/|to select “ADJUST-  
• The Auto Clock Setting function will  
automatically set the clock.  
MENT”.  
[
]
OTHER SETTINGS ADJUSTMENT  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
REC. FUNCTION  
VIEW/PLAY SETTING ADJUSTMENT  
CLOCK SETTING  
VIDEO/AUDIO SETTING  
NOTE  
• If the EDS CH SET mode is set to  
“MANUAL” in step 6 and a channel that  
does not carry EDS signals is selected in  
step 7, the Auto Clock Setting function will  
not operate.  
• In step 7, the number of selectable  
channels depends on the mode setting on  
the “CHANNEL PRESET” screen. See the  
table below.  
CHANNEL PRESET  
OPTION SETTING  
4 Press '/" to select “CLOCK  
SETTING”, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
5 Press '/" to select “AUTO  
SETTING”, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
AIR/CATV  
Selectable channels  
02 03 04 68 69 02  
01 02 03 124 125 01  
OTHER SETTINGS[CLOCK SETTING]  
AUTO SETTING  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
ADJUST CLOCK USING EDS BROADCAST  
AIR  
MANUAL SETTING  
SIGNAL.  
CATV  
SELECT THE EDS CH SETTING METHOD  
EDS CH SET  
AUTO  
ZONE choices change as follows.  
6 Press '/" to set EDS CH SET  
mode to “MANUAL”.  
AUTO  
ATLANTIC  
ALASKA  
EASTERN  
PACIFIC  
CENTRAL  
HAWAII  
MOUNTAIN  
• If you do not know which channel  
carries EDS signals, then select  
“AUTO”.  
• If you press RETURN, START MENU or  
EXIT before pressing SET/ENTER in step  
10, the data will not be stored.  
7 Press \/ | to select a channel  
that carries EDS signals.  
• The number of channels that can be  
selected depends on the mode  
setting on the “CHANNEL PRESET”  
screen. See NOTE.  
When using a cable box:  
• Input the output channel (02, 03, or  
04) of the cable box.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Clock Setting  
Manual Clock Setting  
Automatic Daylight  
Saving-Time (DST)  
Adjustment  
1 Press START MENU to display  
the START MENU screen.  
This Recorder is equipped with an internal  
Automatic Daylight Saving-Time Adjustment  
function. In spring (first Sunday in April) and  
autumn (last Sunday in October), the time is  
adjusted as shown below. This function has  
been preset to “ON” at the factory. Set the  
DST mode in the “CLOCK SETTING” screen.  
2 Press '/"/\/|to select  
“OTHER SETTINGS”, then press  
SET/ENTER.  
3 Press \/|to select “ADJUST-  
MENT”.  
4 Press '/" to select “CLOCK  
SETTING”, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
Spring  
Programmed timer recording set within this  
time frame (2:00 AM to 3:00 AM) will not be  
carried out.  
5 Press '/" to select “MANUAL  
SETTING”, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
First Sunday in April (DST is ON)  
1:00 AM  
2:00 AM  
OTHER SETTINGS[CLOCK SETTING]  
AUTO SETTING  
MANUAL SETTING  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
SET CLOCK MANUALLY  
The clock is automatically  
advanced 1 hour.  
TIME  
10  
DATE  
28 AM 12/ 25 SAT  
YEAR  
2004  
DST  
ON  
[
]
:
3:00 AM  
4:00 AM  
SET  
Autumn  
Because there will be two time frames from  
1:00 AM to 2:00 AM, a timer program set  
between these time frames will be influenced  
by the time change.  
6 Press \/| to select “TIME” and  
press '/" to set time.  
7 Select and set “DATE”, “YEAR”  
and “DST” in the same manner as  
in step 6.  
Last Sunday in October (DST is ON)  
1:00 AM  
2:00 AM  
• See “Automatic Daylight Saving-Time  
(DST) Adjustment”.  
The clock is automatically  
set back 1 hour.  
Example: Dec. 25, 2004, DST: ON  
OTHER SETTINGS[CLOCK SETTING]  
AUTO SETTING  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
SET CLOCK MANUALLY  
1:00 AM  
2:00 AM  
MANUAL SETTING  
TIME  
10  
DATE  
28 AM 12/ 25 SAT  
YEAR  
2004  
DST  
ON  
[
]
:
NOTE  
• If the timer recording program is affected  
by the DST time change, check your TV  
listing and find out when it reflects the time  
change. Some TV listings will indicate the  
time change in the same manner as is  
programmed in this Recorder while others  
do not show the time change until the next  
morning. In that case, when programming  
a timer recording, use the “CLOCK  
SETTING” screen to set the DST mode to  
OFF so the time change will not be carried  
out.  
SET  
8 If the data is correct, press |to  
select “SET”, then press SET/  
ENTER to complete clock setting.  
Press EXIT to return to normal  
screen.  
• The screen returns to normal.  
NOTE  
• If you press RETURN, START MENU or  
EXIT before pressing SET/ENTER in step  
8, the data will not be stored.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                                                                            
\
                                                                                                            
/
                                                                                                               
|
                                                                                                               
Channel Setting  
Channel Setting  
Adding/Erasing Channel  
Memory  
This Recorder can receive a maximum of 181  
channels as shown below by presetting the  
channels into memory.  
(VHF: 2 to 13, UHF: 14 to 69, CATV: 1 to 125)  
Use this function to manually add or erase  
channels to/from the memory.  
1 Select the channel to be added  
with the Number buttons, or the  
channel to be erased with the CH  
'/" or Number buttons.  
1 Press START MENU to display  
the START MENU screen.  
2 Press '/"/\/|to select  
“OTHER SETTINGS”, then press  
SET/ENTER.  
2 Press START MENU to display  
the START MENU screen.  
3 Press \/|to select “ADJUST-  
MENT”.  
3 Press '/"/\/|to select  
“OTHER SETTINGS”, then press  
SET/ENTER.  
[
]
OTHER SETTINGS ADJUSTMENT  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
REC. FUNCTION  
VIEW/PLAY SETTING ADJUSTMENT  
CLOCK SETTING  
VIDEO/AUDIO SETTING  
CHANNEL PRESET  
OPTION SETTING  
4 Press \/|to select “ADJUST-  
MENT”.  
4 Press '/" to select “CHANNEL  
PRESET”, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
5 Press '/" to select “CHANNEL  
PRESET”, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
5 Press \/|to select “AIR” or  
6 Press '/"/ \/|to select  
“MANUAL”, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
“CATV”, then press SET/ENTER.  
Example: AIR  
• To watch CATV after EZ Set Up,  
select “CATV”, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
OTHER SETTINGS[CHANNEL PRESET]  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
SELECT RECEPTION TYPE  
6 Press \/|to select “AUTO”, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
AIR  
CATV  
OTHER SETTINGS[CHANNEL PRESET]  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
SELECT CHANNEL PRESET METHOD  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
SELECT RECEPTION TYPE  
AIR  
CATV  
7 Press \/|to select “ADD” if you  
want to add the channel memory,  
or “ERASE” if you want to erase  
the channel memory.  
SELECT CHANNEL PRESET METHOD  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
7 Auto Channel Preset will start.  
• The channel display will count up,  
and, when finished, the screen  
returns to normal.  
[ADD]  
OTHER SETTINGS[MANUAL CHANNEL SETUP]  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
3
ADD  
NOTE  
• If the power is interrupted for more than  
1 hour, AIR/CATV selection must be set  
again.  
• Auto Channel Preset will be interrupted if  
START MENU is pressed before the screen  
returns to normal.  
[ERASE]  
OTHER SETTINGS [MANUAL CHANNEL SETUP]  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
3
ERASE  
8 Press EXIT to return to normal  
screen.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display Information  
Content of TV Screen  
Display  
Checking Remaining Time  
of HDD and Number of  
Titles  
When the power is turned on or the channel is  
switched.  
When HDD button on the front of the  
Recorder is lit (HDD mode)  
3
STEREO  
L
R
SAP  
SAP ON  
1 2 3 4  
5
1 Press ON SCREEN (under the  
Display automatically  
disappears in 3 seconds.  
cover) or HDD.  
• The HDD information screen is  
displayed.  
2
HDD  
1
OR  
I
G
I
N
AL  
3
4
5
6
7
F I NE  
REMAIN 19h10  
m
1
4
0
/
/
0
3 3  
6
:
1 Channel currently selected  
2 Audio type  
0 0  
:
2 8  
Stereo: STEREO  
TITLE REPEAT  
3 Audio selected by AUDIO button  
4 SAP signal reception  
5 SAP mode display  
1 Original title playback/Play List play-  
back indicator  
2 Mode display  
Monitor Output when  
Receiving a Stereo or SAP  
Broadcast  
When receiving a stereo or SAP broadcast,  
press AUDIO to change the audio output  
mode to select Monitor Output. See the table  
of SAP on page 99 for details.  
• Playback:  
REC  
• Recording:  
• Stop:  
3 Recording mode and remaining  
(recordable) time  
4 Current title number/Total number of  
titles  
5 Current chapter number/Total number of  
chapters  
NOTE  
6 Counter  
7 Repeat Playback indicator  
• When the signal is weak (hard to hear) in a  
stereo broadcast, press AUDIO to turn off  
“L R” display on the TV screen and change  
the audio output mode to MONO.  
2 Press ON SCREEN (under the  
cover) or HDD again.  
• The screen changes to the counter  
display.  
Checking the Channel  
3 Press ON SCREEN (under the  
cover) or HDD once again.  
• Display is turned off.  
1 Press CH DISPLAY while view-  
ing a live program (HDD/DVD  
stopping) or recording (HDD/DVD  
recording).  
HDD  
ORIGINAL  
0
0
:
0
0
:
5
1
• Channel information is displayed.  
NOTE  
3
STEREO  
L
R
SAP  
SAP ON  
• The HDD information screen (step 1) will  
automatically disappear in 1 minute.  
• The counter display (step 2) will not  
disappear automatically. Press ON  
SCREEN (under the cover) or HDD to turn  
it off.  
• Each time you press CH DISPLAY,  
the channel information display is  
turned on/off.  
• The channel information display will  
automatically turn off in 1 minute.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display Information  
Checking Remaining Time Switching Front Panel  
of DVD and Number of Display  
Titles  
When DVD button on the front of the  
Recorder is lit (DVD mode)  
Front panel display  
1 Press ON SCREEN (under the  
cover) or DVD.  
1 Turn the power on.  
• The DVD information screen is  
displayed.  
• Channel display (when watching TV)  
1 Disc type, recording format, original title  
playback/Play List playback indicators  
2
DVD-RW  
1
VR OR  
I
G
I
N
AL  
3
4
5
6
7
F I NE  
REMAIN 0h49m  
• Counter display (during playback/  
recording)  
1
1
0
/
/
0
7
1
:
0 0  
:
1 2  
TITLE REPEAT  
2 Mode display  
• Playback:  
• Recording:  
• Stop:  
3 Recording mode and remaining  
(recordable) time  
• “FINALIZED” indicator when a  
finalized disc is played back.  
4 Current title number/Total number of  
titles  
Hour Minute Second  
REC  
2 Press DISPLAY (under the  
cover).  
• Remaining time display (when  
watching TV)  
• Total number of titles (Stop mode)  
• Title number currently played back  
(Playback mode)  
• Title number currently recorded  
(Recording mode)  
5 Current chapter number/Total number of  
chapters  
Hour  
Minute  
• Current title number and chapter  
number (during playback)  
• Total number of chapters (Stop mode)  
• Chapter number currently played  
back (Playback mode)  
• Chapter number currently recorded  
(Recording mode)  
6 Counter  
Current title Current chapter  
7 Repeat Playback indicator  
• Channel currently recorded (during  
recording)  
2 Press ON SCREEN (under the  
cover) or DVD again.  
• The screen changes to the counter  
display.  
DVD-RW  
VR OR  
I
G
I
N
AL  
0 0  
3 Press DISPLAY (under the  
cover) again.  
0 0  
:
:
2 6  
• The screen returns to the display in  
step 1.  
3 Press ON SCREEN (under the  
cover) or DVD again.  
• Display is turned off.  
NOTE  
• The DVD information screen (step 1) will  
automatically disappear in 1 minute.  
• The counter display (step 2) will not  
disappear automatically. Press ON  
SCREEN (under the cover) or DVD to turn  
it off.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparation to Operate This Recorder  
DVD-RW  
VR MODE  
DVD-RW  
VIDEO MODE  
HDD  
DVD-R  
DVD VIDEO  
VIDEO CD  
AUDIO CD  
CD-R  
MP3  
CD-RW  
MP3  
Buttons used for this operation.  
Buttons with the same name on the Recorder and  
remote control will perform the same operation.  
Buttons on Remote Control  
Buttons on Recorder  
4
Operating HDD  
1
2
3
Turn on the power of TV.  
Press  
.
• The HDD button on the front of the  
Recorder lights up, and HDD  
operation is enabled.  
Operating DVD  
Press  
.
Switch TV input to the AV  
input used to connect to the  
Recorder.  
• The DVD button on the front of the  
Recorder lights up, and DVD  
operation is enabled.  
Recording and Playback  
• Refer to pages 38 to 77 for details  
about recording and playback.  
Press  
to turn the  
Recorder on.  
• TV broadcast will be displayed.  
NOTE  
• After turning on power, both the HDD and DVD buttons  
on the front of the Recorder will blink for a moment while  
the Recorder is getting ready. Perform this operation  
after the HDD button lights up.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Press  
                                                                                       
|
                                                                                       
PLAY during recording or timer recording to watch  
Press  
                           
|
                           
PLAY to watch the rest of the program.  
Press  
                                                                                                              
|
                                                                                                              
PLAY.  
Press  
                                                                 
|
                                                                 
PLAY.  
Time Shift Viewing/Chasing Playback  
With this Recorder, you can enjoy Time Shift Viewing and Chasing Playback—distinctive features of a HDD.  
1 Time Shift Viewing  
2 Chasing Playback  
While you are watching a program, the phone rings.... At  
times like this, you can pause the program by pressing a  
button and watch the rest later.  
You return home earlier than expected while timer recording  
is in progress.... At times like this, you can watch the  
program from the beginning without having to wait for the  
recording to finish.  
NOTE  
Chasing Playback (Pause➔Play)  
• Some programs may not allow you to time shift view due  
to copyright of the programs.  
• Programs recorded for Time Shift Viewing will be erased  
automatically if Time Shift Viewing is canceled.  
the recorded program from the beginning.  
Current  
scene (live)  
Recording  
Recording continues  
Time Shift Viewing (Pause)  
You can pause during sudden phone call or when you want  
to take a note. In such cases press TIME SHIFT to pause.  
Current  
scene (live)  
Pause  
scene  
Playback from beginning  
Time shift recording  
Playback starts from the beginning of the  
program. (Recording continues)  
Press  
TIME SHIFT.  
Press ■ STOP/LIVE to return to the current (live) broadcast.  
(Time shift recording stops at this point. Recorded programs  
will be erased automatically.)  
NOTE  
Fast Reverse/Forward Playback  
If you press G REV or J FWD during Time Shift  
Viewing or Chasing Playback, Fast Reverse/Forward  
Playback starts.  
If you press G REV (or J FWD) again, the speed of  
Fast Reverse/Forward Playback changes as shown below.  
(You cannot listen to audio during Fast Reverse/Forward  
Playback.)  
• When remaining capacity of HDD during Time Shift  
Viewing is gone, Time Shift Viewing will be canceled. The  
current (live) broadcast will be displayed and the  
recorded programs will be erased. You cannot view the  
recorded part of the program.  
• A message will be displayed 5 minutes before timer  
recording (or timer dubbing) starts. If you are time shift  
viewing, it will stop 3 minutes later.  
(Approx. 8g) (Approx. 32g)  
(Approx. 2g)  
NOTE  
• If you perform Fast Forward Playback during Time Shift  
Viewing or Chasing Playback, the Recorder will automati-  
cally switch to the playback screen when Fast Forward  
Playback reaches about 30 seconds before the live  
broadcast. The timing that goes automatically back to  
playback mode will slightly differ depending on the speed  
of Fast Forward and Recording Mode.  
• When the unit automatically goes back to normal  
Playback during  
, you can still view the program in Fast  
Forward Playback up to the point of the live broadcast by  
performing or  
.
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Press  
                                                                                                            
|
                                                                                                            
PLAY to return to the normal  
Time Shift Viewing/Chasing Playback  
Time Shift Viewing  
HDD  
Chasing Playback  
HDD  
1 Press TIME SHIFT while  
1 Press |PLAY during recording.  
• Playback starts from the beginning of  
the program being recorded.  
(Chasing Playback)  
viewing a program.  
• Pause screen will be displayed in a  
few seconds.  
• Press FSTILL/PAUSE to pause  
playback (Still Playback).  
To cancel Still Playback, press  
FSTILL/PAUSE or |PLAY.  
Pause icon  
(This will become a square icon during  
Time Shift Viewing.)  
2 Press G REV or J FWD  
• Press ■ STOP/LIVE to return to  
during Chasing Playback.  
• Each time you press the buttons, the  
Fast Reverse/Forward Playback  
speed changes as shown below.  
current (live) broadcast.  
2 Press |PLAY.  
• Playback starts from the position you  
paused.  
(Approx. 8g) (Approx. 32g)  
(Approx. 2g)  
Play icon  
Example: When J FWD is pressed  
once  
• Press FSTILL/PAUSE to pause  
playback (Still Playback).  
To cancel Still Playback, press  
FSTILL/PAUSE or |PLAY.  
Fast Forward Playback 2✕ icon  
3 Press G REV or J FWD  
during Time Shift Viewing.  
• Each time you press the buttons, the  
Fast Reverse/Forward Playback  
speed changes as shown below.  
playback speed.  
3 Press ■STOP/LIVE to return to  
the live broadcast which is being  
recorded.  
(Approx. 8g) (Approx. 32g)  
(Approx. 2g)  
Example: When J FWD is pressed  
once  
Fast Forward Playback 2✕ icon  
• Press |PLAY to return to the normal  
playback speed.  
4 Press ■STOP/LIVE to return to  
the current (live) broadcast.  
• Time Shift Viewing will be canceled,  
and the automatically recorded  
content will be erased.  
NOTE  
• Time shift viewing will stop in the following  
cases.  
• TIME SHIFT or ■ STOP/LIVE is  
pressed.  
• HDD remaining capacity is gone.  
• The broadcast whose recording is  
prohibited is received.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording to HDD  
Recording Programs to HDD  
for High Speed Dubbing  
from HDD to DVD-R/RW in  
Video Mode (page 52)  
This section explains recording on the  
hard disc (HDD). (For information on  
recording to DVD, see page 40.)  
Confirming Remaining Time  
for Recording  
• High Speed Dubbing Priority  
Normally, recording onto HDD is done  
using own format, but recording can also  
be done using a format for high speed  
dubbing onto DVDs formatted in Video  
mode.  
To perform high speed dubbing onto a  
DVD in Video mode, set “HI SP DUB  
PRIORITY” to “YES” and then record. (See  
page 52.)  
To confirm on TV screen  
• Press ON SCREEN (under the cover).  
To confirm on front display panel  
• Press DISPLAY (under the cover).  
Confirming Remaining Time  
HDD  
OR  
I
G
I
N
AL  
This display means  
that you can record  
20 hours more in  
FINE mode.  
F I NE  
REMAIN 20h0m  
1
1
0
0
0
0
:
0 0  
:
0 0  
Favorite Program Timer  
Recording (page 49)  
• You can set “Overwrite Program Timer” to  
periodically and automatically record a  
news report, etc., or “Serial Program Timer”  
to automatically record an entire series  
(e.g. drama series) you wish to save.  
• During live program viewing or HDD  
playback, remaining time of recording in  
the selected recording mode will be  
displayed.  
• During HDD recording, remaining time of  
recording in the currently selected  
recording mode will be displayed.  
Chasing Playback (page 37)  
• This lets you playback and watch a  
program from the beginning while it is  
being recorded on HDD.  
Guide to Recordable Length  
of Time  
Simultaneous Recording/  
Recording Mode  
Playback (page 77)  
• This lets you playback and watch a  
program recorded on HDD, or a DVD or  
CD, while recording another program on  
HDD.  
Recording mode  
Recording time  
FINE SP  
LP  
EP  
20 hr 33 hr 67 hr 100 hr  
• Remaining time for recording differs  
according to the recording mode.  
• Recordable time might be less than above  
figures depending on the program to be  
recorded.  
• MN (manual) recording mode setting  
allows you to select the picture quality from  
among 32 levels on the “MANUAL REC.  
MODE” screen (page 42).  
Cutting out Commercials  
(pages 81, 92)  
• After recording is finished, you can cut out  
commercials and other unnecessary  
scenes by calling up the Erase Scene  
function.  
(Commercials cannot be cut out automati-  
cally during recording.)  
Monitoring a Program Being  
Recorded while Playing  
Tamper Proof  
Back a Disc (page 77)  
• You can set Tamper Proof to prevent  
operations by mistake during recording or  
timer recording.  
• Picture in picture  
This lets you monitor a program being  
recorded, while playing back a disc, using  
the Simultaneous Recording/Playback  
function. (This will not work during  
progressive scanning playback.)  
1 Press and hold TAMPER PROOF (ON  
SCREEN and DISPLAY together) for  
more than 2 seconds.  
2 Each time you perform this operation,  
the function is activated or deactivated.  
• If you try to operate the Recorder while  
Dubbing (page 57)  
• Titles recorded on HDD can be saved by  
dubbing them to DVD-R/RW. (You can also  
dub from DVD-R/RW to HDD.)  
Tamper Proof is set, “  
” blinks in the front  
display panel and tells you that Tamper  
Proof is set.  
• You can batch dub up to 5 programs.  
• You can timer program dubbing so that the  
recording takes place at a time when you  
don’t use the Recorder.  
Information  
• When there is a report message (e.g. when  
a timer recording was not successfully  
performed), the Recorder displays an on-  
screen message telling that there is a  
report message.  
Check the report message by selecting  
“INFORMATION” on the START MENU.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                     
                                                     
Recording to HDD  
6 Press REC PAUSE to resume  
Direct Recording to HDD  
recording.  
HDD  
7 Press REC STOP to stop record-  
ing.  
Explained below is the standard procedure  
for recording the program being viewed onto  
HDD.  
• A maximum of 12 hours can be recorded  
onto HDD in one direct recording session.  
• A maximum of 199 programs can be  
recorded (saved) onto HDD.  
• “DATA IS BEING RECORDED TO  
DISC” displays on TV screen and  
recording stops.  
NOTE  
NOTE  
• The content being recorded will not be  
recorded if power failure occurs or if power  
cord is accidentally unplugged.  
* Also direct recording to a DVD-R/RW is  
possible (page 40).  
• You cannot record programs whose  
recording is prohibited.  
• Timer recording cannot be performed  
during direct recording. To perform timer  
recording, stop direct recording before the  
preset time for timer recording.  
Preparation for Direct Recording  
• When you record SAP broadcast, set “SAP  
SETTING” to “ON” (see page 98).  
Inserting Chapter Marks  
Manually during Recording  
Press CHAPTER MARK (under the cover).  
• “RECORDED CHAPTER MARK. ” is  
displayed and chapter mark will be  
inserted.  
1 Press HDD to select HDD mode.  
• The HDD button on the front of the  
Recorder lights up.  
• HDD mode is selected automatically  
when the power is turned on.  
• You cannot insert chapter marks during  
Simultaneous Recording/Playback.  
2 Press the Number buttons or  
CH'/"to select the channel to  
be recorded.  
Setting the Record End  
Time during Direct  
Recording (Simple  
Recording Timer)  
HDD  
3 Press REC MODE to select the  
recording mode.  
• The recording mode changes as  
shown below each time the button is  
pressed.  
FINE SP LP EP MNgg  
1 Press  
                                                                                               
Æ
                                                                                               
REC on the remote  
• Recording mode set by selecting  
“MNgg” is the recording mode set  
on the “MANUAL REC. MODE”  
screen (page 42).  
control during recording.  
• The “SET STOP Timer” screen is  
displayed.  
2 Press '/" to set the end time.  
• The end time can be set in units of 15  
minutes.  
4 Press  
Æ
REC during broadcast  
viewing.  
• Recording begins and REC icon  
displays in TV screen.  
• Total recording time cannot exceed  
12 hours so the end time has to be  
set accordingly.  
• Press EXIT to stop setting midway  
through.  
•
REC indicator (for HDD) on the front of  
Recorder is lit red during recording.  
REC icon  
HDD  
REC  
OR  
I
G
I
N
AL  
F I NE  
SET STOP TIME.  
REMAIN 19h8m  
1
1
0
/
/
0
1
1
:
STOP TIME 10 :  
PM  
30  
1 9  
:
3 0  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
5 Press REC PAUSE to pause  
recording.  
3 Press SET/ENTER.  
• The record end time is set, and the  
clock mark lights up on the front  
display panel.  
• Record Pause does not work during  
Chasing Playback.  
• During pause, the REC indicator (for  
HDD) on the front of the Recorder  
blinks.  
REC PAUSE icon  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording to DVD  
This section explains recording on the  
DVD (For information on recording to  
HDD, see page 38.)  
Tamper Proof  
• You can set Tamper Proof to prevent  
operations by mistake during recording or  
timer recording.  
1 Press and hold TAMPER PROOF (ON  
SCREEN and DISPLAY together) for  
more than 2 seconds.  
Checking Remaining Time  
and Other Information  
Press ON SCREEN (under the cover) during  
DVD playback or recording.  
2 Each time you perform this operation,  
the function is activated or deactivated.  
• If you try to operate the Recorder while  
• Disc capacity and the number of recorded  
titles, etc. are displayed. It is recom-  
mended to confirm before recording.  
Tamper Proof is set, “  
” blinks in the front  
display panel and tells you that Tamper  
Proof is set.  
DVD-RW  
VR OR  
I
G
I
N
AL  
Disc capacity  
F I NE  
REMAIN 0h30m  
Loading Disc  
2
1
0
Number of titles  
0
0
Number of  
chapters  
:
0 0  
:
0 0  
1
Press POWER to turn the power  
on.  
• “REMAIN 0hr 0min” or nothing will be  
displayed when an unrecordable disc is  
set.  
2
Press OPEN/CLOSE on the  
Recorder to open the disc tray.  
OPEN/CLOSE  
NOTE  
• Disc remaining time display is approximate  
measure of disc capacity. There may be  
space left in disc capacity after recording.  
(Remaining time during recording and after  
recording might not be the same.)  
3
Load disc on the disc tray.  
Simultaneous Recording/  
Playback (page 77)  
• HDD playback is possible while recording  
or timer recording to DVD.  
Dubbing (page 57)  
• Dubbing titles recorded on DVD to HDD or  
titles recorded on HDD to DVD-R/RW are  
possible.  
• Insert the disc with the label face up.  
• In case of disc recorded on both  
sides, face the side you want to  
record down.  
• Exact Dubbing: Automatically selects the  
appropriate recording mode according to  
the remaining capacity of DVD when  
dubbing titles recorded on HDD to DVD.  
4
Press OPEN/CLOSE to close the  
disc tray.  
Not Enough Disc Capacity  
• Exact Recording (page 98)  
Exact recording functions when the  
selected recording mode is not appropriate  
to fit the program to the disc when you  
timer record. (Will not function during timer  
dubbing.)  
• Alternate Recording (page 104)  
Alternate recording functions when you  
forget to load a DVD for timer recording. It  
automatically timer records the program to  
HDD.  
Direct Recording to DVD  
DVD-RW  
DVD-RW  
DVD-R  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
Explained below is the standard procedure  
for recording the program being viewed onto  
DVD.  
• You can create a maximum of 99 original  
titles.  
• Record in VR mode when you want to edit  
later. Edit functions will be limited when you  
record in Video mode.  
Cutting TV Commercials  
Preparation for Direct Recording  
• When you record SAP broadcast, set “SAP  
SETTING” to “ON” (see page 98).  
(page 81)  
• You can cut unwanted scenes like TV  
commercials by using the ERASE SCENE  
function after the recording. (Cannot cut TV  
commercials automatically.)  
• You cannot cut scenes when you record  
programs by Video mode to DVD-RW or  
DVD-R.  
1
Press DVD to select DVD mode.  
• The DVD button on the front of the  
Recorder lights up.  
• When the power is turned on, HDD  
mode is selected automatically.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording to DVD  
2 Set a DVD-RW or DVD-R disc.  
• When a new DVD-RW disc not  
initialized yet is set, VR mode  
initializing starts automatically. When  
initializing is over, you can start  
recording.  
NOTE  
• Press ON SCREEN (under the cover) to  
confirm remaining time of DVD or check  
the counter display during recording.  
• You cannot record programs which prohibit  
recording.  
• Recording either stops or pauses automati-  
cally in the following cases.  
—Program which prohibits recording is on  
air.  
—Unable to continue recording for some  
reason.  
• When you want to re-initialize in Video  
mode, select “DVD VIDEO MODE  
INIT.” screen (page 106).  
• When you want to initialize in Video  
mode from the beginning, select  
AUTO INITIALIZE screen (page 106).  
• Timer recording cannot be performed  
during direct recording. To perform timer  
recording, stop direct recording before the  
preset time for timer recording.  
3 Press Number buttons or CHAN-  
NEL '/" to select the channel  
to record.  
You may not be able to record on disc  
edited by other recorder.  
4 Press REC MODE to select the  
desired recording mode.  
• The recording mode changes as  
shown below each time the button is  
pressed.  
• If a disc edited by other DVD recorder has  
more than 999 chapter marks, it cannot be  
edited (or recorded) with this Recorder.  
• If a disc edited by other DVD recorder has  
added or erased scenes 51 times or more  
per title or the disc is protected, it cannot  
be edited (or recorded) with this Recorder.  
About Recording to DVD in Video Mode  
• In case you are recording to DVD in Video  
mode and recording stops due to power  
failure etc., recorded contents a few  
minutes before the stop may not be  
recorded.  
FINE SP LP EP MNgg  
• Recording mode set when “MNgg”  
is selected is the recording mode set  
on the “MANUAL REC. MODE”  
screen (page 42).  
5 Press ● REC.  
• Recording begins and REC icon is  
displayed.  
• For details on limitation during recording in  
Video mode, see page 58 too.  
• The REC indicator (for DVD) on the  
front of the Recorder is lit red during  
recording.  
Inserting Chapter Marks  
Manually during Recording  
DVD-RW  
REC  
VR OR  
I
G
I
N
AL  
F I NE  
REMAIN 1h0m  
Press CHAPTER MARK (under the cover).  
• “RECORDED CHAPTER MARK.” displays  
and chapter mark is recorded.  
1
1
0
/
/
0
1
1
:
0 0  
:
0 1  
• You can only record chapter marks  
manually when recording to DVD-RW (VR  
mode).  
• You cannot record chapter marks manually  
when recording to DVD-RW (Video mode)  
or DVD-R, or during Simultaneous Record-  
ing/Playback.  
6 Press REC PAUSE to pause  
recording.  
• Pause will not function during timer  
recording.  
• The REC indicator (for DVD) on the  
front of the Recorder blinks during  
Recording Pause mode.  
Setting Record End Time  
during Direct Recording  
• You can set record end time during direct  
recording to DVD. For details see “Setting  
the Record End Time during Direct  
Recording (Simple Recording Timer)” on  
page 39.  
7 Press REC PAUSE to resume  
recording.  
8 Press REC STOP to stop  
recording.  
• “DATA IS BEING RECORDED TO  
DISC.” displays on TV screen and  
recording stops.  
• Stop recording first when you take out  
the disc.  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Recording Mode (HDD/DVD)  
• HDD recording time is approximate  
HDD Recording Mode and  
Recording Time  
HDD  
measure. DVD recording time is approxi-  
mate measure using 4.7GB disc.  
•
This does not guarantee the length of  
recording time. Actual recording time may be  
shorter than that indicated at left depending  
on image quality and other aspects.  
Recording Recording  
Mode Time (approx.)  
Recording Recording  
Mode Time (approx.)  
NOTE  
MN17  
MN18  
MN19  
44 Hr  
42 Hr  
39 Hr  
36 Hr  
33 Hr  
32 Hr  
30 Hr  
29 Hr  
28 Hr  
26 Hr  
25 Hr  
24 Hr  
23 Hr  
22 Hr  
21 Hr  
20 Hr  
EP MN1  
100 Hr  
96 Hr  
91 Hr  
87 Hr  
83 Hr  
79 Hr  
75 Hr  
71 Hr  
67 Hr  
64 Hr  
61 Hr  
58 Hr  
55 Hr  
53 Hr  
50 Hr  
47 Hr  
• Higher recording mode means higher  
picture quality and lower recording mode  
means longer recording time.  
MN2  
MN3  
MN4  
MN5  
MN6  
LP  
MN20  
• Picture quality of recorded content  
changes distinctively if the recording mode  
changes from the recording modes right  
below the bold lines in left chart and  
recording modes right above the bold  
lines. The positions of the bold lines differ  
among HDD, DVD-RW (VR Mode) and  
DVD-R/RW (Video Mode).  
SP MN21  
MN22  
MN7  
MN8  
MN23  
MN24  
MN25  
MN26  
MN27  
MN28  
MN29  
MN30  
LP MN9  
MN10  
MN11  
MN12  
MN13  
MN14  
MN15  
MN16  
•
With MN22-32, VBR recording has a large effect,  
so the actual recording time will be longer.  
Setting the Manual  
MN31  
MN32  
FINE  
Recording Mode (MN)  
DVD-RW  
VR MODE  
DVD-RW  
VIDEO MODE  
HDD  
DVD-R  
DVD-R/RW Recording Mode  
and Recording Time  
You can set the manual recording mode  
which is used when you select “MN XX” with  
REC MODE.  
DVD-RW  
DVD-RW  
DVD-R  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
1 Press START MENU to display  
the START MENU screen.  
Recording Recording  
Mode Time (approx.)  
Recording Recording  
Mode Time (approx.)  
2 Press '/"/ \/|to select  
“OTHER SETTINGS”, then press  
SET/ENTER.  
MN1  
MN2  
MN3  
MN4  
MN5  
MN6  
MN7  
MN8  
MN9  
360 Min  
345 Min  
330 Min  
315 Min  
300 Min  
285 Min  
270 Min  
255 Min  
240 Min  
MN1  
MN2  
MN3  
MN4  
MN5  
MN6  
MN7  
MN8  
MN9  
360 Min  
345 Min  
330 Min  
315 Min  
300 Min  
285 Min  
270 Min  
255 Min  
240 Min  
EP  
3 Press \/|to select “REC.  
FUNCTION”.  
4 Press '/" to select “MANUAL  
REC. MODE”, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
LP  
OTHER SETTINGS[REC. FUNCTION ]  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
REC. FUNCTION  
VIEW/PLAY SETTING ADJUSTMENT  
MN10 230 Min  
MN11 220 Min  
MN12 210 Min  
MN13 200 Min  
MN14 190 Min  
MN15 180 Min  
MN16 170 Min  
MN17 160 Min  
MN18 150 Min  
MN19 140 Min  
MN20 130 Min  
MN10 230 Min  
MN11 220 Min  
MN12 210 Min  
MN13 200 Min  
MN14 190 Min  
MN15 180 Min  
MN16 170 Min  
MN17 160 Min  
MN18 150 Min  
MN19 140 Min  
MN20 130 Min  
AUTO CHAPTER  
EXACT RECORDING  
REC . AUDIO FORMAT  
EXTERNAL AUDIO  
DUAL MONO REC SETTING  
MANUAL REC. MODE  
SAP SETTING  
5 Press \/|to select the desired  
recording mode, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
• Refer to table on left column.  
OTHER SETTINGS MANUAL REC. MODE  
ABLE TO SELECT 1 OF 32 LEVELS OF PICTURE QUALITY IN  
MANUAL REC. MODE WHEN USING RECORDING MODE SWITCH.  
[
]
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
MN21 120 Min SP MN21 120 Min  
EP  
LP  
SP  
FINE  
MN22 110 Min  
MN23 105 Min  
MN24 100 Min  
MN22 110 Min  
MN23 105 Min  
MN24 100 Min  
MN25  
MN26  
MN27  
MN28  
MN29  
MN30  
MN31  
MN32  
95 Min  
90 Min  
85 Min  
80 Min  
75 Min  
70 Min  
65 Min  
MN25  
MN26  
MN27  
MN28  
MN29  
MN30  
MN31  
95 Min  
90 Min  
85 Min  
80 Min  
75 Min  
70 Min  
65 Min  
60 Min  
NOTE  
When playing back a DVD-R/RW disc  
(Video Mode) recorded with the recorder  
using a DVD player.  
• When you playback a disc recorded with  
the manual mode of the recorder using a  
DVD player, it may not be able to playback  
depending on the model (some particular  
modes cannot be played back).  
60 Min FINE MN32  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Press  
                                                                                                         
\
                                                                                                         
/
                                                                                                            
|
                                                                                                            
to select the date.  
3 Press Yellow (D) (TIME), then press  
to select the time, and press SET/  
ENTER.  
                                                                                                                                    
\
                                                                                                                                    
/
                                                                                                                                        
|
                                                                                                                                        
with  
                                                            
'
                                                            
/
                                                                
"
                                                                
and press SET/ENTER,  
Timer Recording  
To set a timer program for a  
day other than the current  
day (within a week)  
Easy Recording Guide  
DVD-RW  
VR MODE  
DVD-RW  
VIDEO MODE  
HDD  
DVD-R  
The operation method is the same for both  
HDD and DVD.  
1 Press Green (C) (DATE/TIME Select).  
• If you select a date and press SET/  
ENTER, only date will be set, and  
previous screen appears.  
• This lets you set the timer recording  
schedule for the next 7 days simply by  
filling in the pertinent blocks in the on-  
screen time schedule.  
• You can set timer recording for up to a  
maximum of 32 programs. (This includes  
Favorite Program Recording, Timer  
Dubbing, VCR Plus+ and Timer Record-  
ing.)  
• Proceed to step 4.  
ENTER  
ENTER  
DATE  
SELECT DATE  
TODAY 26 SUN 27 MON 28 TUE 29 WED 30 THU 31 FRI 1 SAT  
0 AM  
3
6
9
0 PM  
ENTER  
3
6
9
n
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Preparation to Use Easy Recording Guide  
RETURN  
ENTER  
TIME  
1 Check that the clock is displaying the  
correct time.  
4 Press '/ "to select the channel.  
2 Preset the channels.  
EASY REC. GUIDE  
TODAY 26 SUN 27 MON 28 TUE 29 WED 30 THU 31 FRI  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
3 When you record SAP broadcast, set  
“SAP SETTING” to “ON” (see page 98).  
4 When recording from an external  
equipment such as a CATV box or  
satellite receiver, turn on the power of the  
external equipment.  
1 SAT  
CHANNEL  
10  
10 AM  
11  
12  
20  
30  
33  
45  
40  
50  
60  
• The channel can be selected as  
follows.  
1 Press START MENU to display  
the START MENU screen.  
TV channels LINE IN 1 (EXT.1)  
2 Press '/ "/ \/ |to select  
“TIMER PROGRAM/CHECK”, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
LINE IN 3 (EXT.3) LINE IN 2 (EXT.2)  
5 Press \/ |to select the start  
time, then press SET/ENTER.  
• The start time can be selected in 15  
minute units. If the desired 15 minute  
time frame will start within 3 minutes,  
that time frame cannot be selected.  
Example: If you select 10:30 at 10:28,  
the start time will switch to 10:45.  
[
]
START MENU TIMER PROGRAM/CHECK  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
EDIT/  
ERASE  
REC LIST  
DUBBING  
TIMER  
PROGRAM/  
CHECK  
INITIALIZE/  
FINALIZE  
OTHER  
SETTINGS  
SETS TIMER PROGRAM AND CONFIRMS TIMER PROGRAM CONTENT  
INFORMATION  
EASY REC GUIDE  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
TODAY 26 SUN 27 MON 28 TUE 29 WED 30 THU 30 THU 1 SAT  
3 Press '/ "to select “EASY REC.  
GUIDE”, then press SET/ENTER.  
• The “EASY REC. GUIDE” screen (time  
schedule) is displayed.  
CHANNEL  
10  
10 AM  
11  
12  
20  
30  
33  
45  
40  
50  
TIMR PROG/CHCK[EASY REC. GUIDE]  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
60  
SELECT AN ITEM BELOW FOR TIMER RECORDING OPERATION.  
• You cannot select a time frame which  
is already scheduled.  
EASY REC. GUIDE  
VCR Plus+  
6 Press \/ |to select the stop  
time, then press SET/ENTER.  
• The stop time can be set in 15 minute  
units (up to a maximum of 12 hours in  
the future).  
EASY REC. GUIDE  
TODAY 26 SUN 27 MON 28 TUE 29 WED 30 THU 31 FRI  
CHANNEL  
10  
20  
30  
33  
40  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
1 SAT  
10 AM  
11  
12  
45  
EASY REC GUIDE  
TODAY 26 SUN 27 MON 28 TUE 29 WED 30 THU 31 FRI  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
1 SAT  
CHANNEL  
10  
10 AM  
11  
12  
20  
30  
33  
40  
50  
• If you press Yellow (D) (TIMER LIST),  
you can check and change timer  
settings which have already been  
made. To make a change, choose the  
timer program you want to change  
45  
30  
60  
and then perform step 4 (page 47) to  
step 15 (page 48).  
Continued on Next Page |||  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Press  
want to correct such as the start/stop  
time, then press to correct.  
(For details refer to page 46.)  
• If you complete timer recording  
setting less than 3 minutes before it  
starts, timer recording start time  
column will stay as selected. Reset  
the timer recording start time at least  
3 minutes after the present time.  
                                                              
\
                                                              
/
                                                                
|
                                                                 
to select the item you  
                                                                       
'
                                                                       
/
                                                                           
"
                                                                           
• Select the recording mode with  
                                                                                
\
                                                                                
/
                                                                                    
|, then  
                                                                                    
Timer Recording  
7 Press '/ "to select the record-  
10 Confirm the programs on the list  
and then press SET/ENTER.  
• The “TIMER PROGRAM/CHECK”  
screen is displayed. If you continue  
timer programming using Easy  
ing disc (“HDD” or “DVD”), then  
press SET/ENTER.  
• You cannot select “DVD” to record  
more than 6 hours.  
Recording Guide, repeat from step 3.  
TIMER PROGRAM  
SET THE TIMER RECORDING DATE, TIME, CHANNEL AND MEDIA.  
[SAT] AM – AM  
CH  
33 HDD  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
11 Press START MENU or EXIT to  
complete EASY REC. GUIDE timer  
setting.  
12/25  
:
10 45  
:
11 30  
AIR/CATV  
– – – TIMER PROG INFO – – –  
HDD TIMER RECORDING MODE: FINE  
• Timer recording will function even  
after you turn the power off.  
NOTE  
• When you set DVD as recording media,  
timer recording will not start during disc  
playback. If “ALTERNATE RECORDING”  
(page 104) is set to “YES”, the program will  
be timer recorded to HDD.  
• Timer recording will not start during  
dubbing.  
• When the power is off while recording timer  
is set, front display panel will light up once  
timer recording starts. If you want to turn off  
the light, set “LCD BACKLIGHT REC.”  
(page 104) to “YES”.  
8 1 Press \/ |to select “REC.  
MODE”, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
You can also turn off the light by pressing  
BACK LIGHT on the remote control (under  
the cover) for more than 2 seconds.  
Convenient Functions When Recording to  
DVD  
2 Press '/ "to select the  
recording mode, then press  
SET/ENTER.  
• If there is not enough empty space  
(time), a message is displayed.  
Select the recording mode again.  
Exact Recording (page 98)  
• If you set EXACT RECORDING to “YES”,  
the Recorder will automatically adjust the  
recording mode of timer recording so the  
recorded programs will fit into one disc.  
Alternate Recording (page 104)  
• You can record timer programs to HDD  
automatically when Exact Recording  
cannot fit the programs into one disc.  
• Alternate Recording will also function when  
you forgot to insert the disc for recording.  
When “MANUAL SETTING (MN)” is  
selected:  
press SET/ENTER. (The recording mode  
can be selected from 32 levels.)  
9 Confirm the setting of timer  
program, press \to select  
“COMPLETE”, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
To check, change or cancel  
COMPLETE  
REC. MODE  
ADVANCED  
RETURN  
timer settings  
n
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
• See page 54.  
DAILY  
WEEKLY  
ONCE  
• “TIMER PROGRAM LIST” screen is  
displayed.  
• The TIMER indicator on the front of  
the Recorder lights up and timer  
programming is completed.  
To stop recording while  
timer recording is in  
progress  
• If you press REC STOP, “TIMER RE-  
CORDING IS IN PROGRESS, IF YOU  
PRESS THE REC. STOP BUTTON ONCE  
MORE, TIMER RECORDING CANCELS  
AND RECORDING STOPS.” will appear  
on the screen. Even that message goes  
out of the screen, pressing REC STOP  
one more time will stop the recording.  
• Select “ADVANCED” to input (or  
change) the title name of program,  
etc. (For details refer to page 51.)  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Press  
want to correct such as the start/stop  
time, then press to correct.  
(For details refer to page 46.)  
• If you complete timer recording  
setting less than 3 minutes before it  
starts, timer recording start time  
column will stay as selected. Reset  
the timer recording start time at least  
3 minutes after the present time.  
                                                                                                            
\
                                                                                                            
/
                                                                                                               
|
                                                                                                               
to select the item you  
                                                                                                                      
'
                                                                                                                      
/
                                                                                                                         
"
                                                                                                                         
• Select the recording mode with  
                                                                                                                               
\
                                                                                                                               
/
                                                                                                                                  
|
                                                                                                                                  
, then  
                                                                                         
\
                                                                                         
/
                                                        
|
                                                        
Timer Recording  
Timer Recording with  
VCR Plus+® System  
4 1 Press \/ |to select the  
recording disc selection  
column.  
DVD-RW  
DVD-RW  
HDD  
DVD-R  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
2 Press '/ "to select the  
recording disc (“HDD” or  
“DVD”), then press SET/  
ENTER.  
The operation method is the same for both  
HDD and DVD.  
• The VCR Plus+® System allows you to  
program your Recorder for timer recording  
simply by inputting the PlusCode number.  
• The PlusCode numbers are listed in most  
newspapers, television guides, and local  
CATV listings. Simply by inputting this  
PlusCode number, you can program your  
Recorder for timer recording, eliminating  
the need to input program start time, stop  
time, channel, date and other information  
usually necessary for timer recording.  
• Up to 32 timer programs can be stored.  
(This includes Easy Recording Guide,  
Favorite Program, Timer Dubbing, and  
• You cannot select “DVD” to record  
more than 6 hours.  
• When recording a program on a  
channel for the first time, be sure to  
enter the correct channel number in  
step 4, otherwise the PlusCode  
number will not be successfully  
decoded.  
TIMER PROGRAM  
SET THE TIMER RECORDING DATE, TIME, CHANNEL AND MEDIA.  
[SAT] AM – AM  
CH  
33 HDD  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
12/25  
:
10 45  
:
11 30  
AIR/CATV  
– – – TIMER PROG INFO – – –  
Timer Program.)  
Preparation to Use VCR Plus+ System  
1 Check that the clock is displaying the  
correct time.  
2 Preset the channels.  
3 When you record SAP broadcast, set  
“SAP SETTING” to “ON” (see page 98).  
4 When recording from an external  
equipment such as a CATV box or  
satellite receiver, turn on the power of the  
external equipment.  
5 1 Press \/ |to select “REC.  
MODE”, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
1 Press VCR PLUS+ (button) to  
display the VCR Plus+ Setting  
screen.  
2 Press '/ "to select the  
recording mode, then press  
SET/ENTER.  
• If there is not enough empty space  
(time), a message is displayed.  
Select the recording mode again.  
• If you press VCR PLUS+ (button)  
when the clock has not been set, the  
“CLOCK SETTING” screen will  
appear.  
2 Press Number buttons to enter  
When “MANUAL SETTING (MN)” is  
selected:  
the PlusCode number.  
VCR Plus+ system  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
press SET/ENTER. (The recording mode  
PRESS NUM KEYS TO ENTER PlusCode No.  
can be selected from 32 levels.)  
1
2
3
4
5
–
–
–
–
6 Confirm the setting of timer  
program, press \to select  
“COMPLETE”, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
SET  
ERASE  
• Press ERASE if you make a mistake  
in the Plus Code number. Or Press  
to select “ERASE”, then press SET/  
ENTER. Each time you press the  
button, one digit will be erased.  
• Press VCR PLUS+ (button) to cancel  
the entire number.  
• “TIMER PROGRAM LIST” screen is  
displayed.  
• The TIMER indicator on the front of  
3 Press \/ |to select “SET”, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
the Recorder lights up and timer  
programming is completed.  
• Select “ADVANCED” to input (or  
change) the title name of program,  
etc. (For details refer to page 51.)  
• The timer recording details such as  
date, start time, end time, channel  
and the recording disc will be  
displayed.  
Continued on Next Page |||  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Press  
then press  
press  
to select the input used for external  
                                                         
\
                                                         
/
                                                            
|
                                                            
in step 4 to select “AIR/CATV”,  
to select “EXT.”. Next,  
to select “CH”, then press  
                                                             
'
                                                             
/
                                                                 
"
                                                                 
                                                         
\
                                                         
/
                                                            
|
                                                            
                                                                                       
'
                                                                                       
/
                                                   
"
                                                   
                                                         
\
                                                         
/
                                                            
|
                                                            
                                                   
'
                                                   
/
                                                       
"
                                                       
• Press  
press  
                                                         
\
                                                         
/
/
                                                            
|
                                                            
to select hour or minute, then  
to correct.  
                                                         
'
                                                         
                                                            
"
                                                            
press  
                                                         
|
                                                         
to select “ADVANCED” then press  
Timer Recording  
Convenient Functions When Recording to  
DVD  
7 Confirm the programs on the list  
and then press SET/ENTER.  
• Timer Setting will be completed and  
“TIMER PROGRAM/CHECK” screen  
will appear. To continue timer  
Exact Recording (page 98)  
• If you set EXACT RECORDING to “YES”,  
the Recorder will automatically adjust the  
recording mode of timer recording so the  
recorded programs will fit on one disc.  
Alternate Recording (page 104)  
• You can record timer programs to HDD  
automatically when Exact Recording  
cannot fit the programs on one disc.  
• Alternate Recording will also function when  
you forgot to insert the disc for recording.  
recording with VCR Plus+, select VCR  
Plus+, press SET/ENTER and follow  
the same procedure from step 2.  
NOTE  
Timer Recording from an External Equipment  
(e.g. CATV box) using VCR Plus+ System  
To check, change or cancel  
timer settings  
equipment connection (L1/L2/L3), and then  
• See page 54.  
press SET/ENTER.  
To stop recording while  
timer recording is in  
Blue (A)  
(DAILY):  
DAILY  
MO-SAT  
MO-FRI  
SATs  
progress  
Red (B)  
(WEEKLY):  
SUNs  
MONs  
FRIs  
• If you press REC STOP, “TIMER RE-  
CORDING IS IN PROGRESS, IF YOU  
PRESS THE REC. STOP BUTTON ONCE  
MORE, TIMER RECORDING CANCELS  
AND RECORDING STOPS.” will appear  
on the screen. Even that message goes  
out of the screen, pressing REC STOP  
one more time will stop the recording.  
To Correct Date in Step 4  
• Press to select the date, then press  
to correct.  
To Correct Time in Step 4  
To Set Daily and Weekly Timer Program  
• Press Blue (A) or Red (B) in step 4. Each  
time you press the button, setting changes  
as shown below:  
To Change Title Name, etc.  
• If you want to change the title name, etc.,  
SET/ENTER. For details refer to page 51.  
• A message will be displayed when two or  
more timer programs overlap.  
• If an error message is displayed, confirm  
the PlusCode number and input the correct  
number.  
• When you set DVD as recording media,  
timer recording will not start during disc  
playback. If “ALTERNATE RECORDING” is  
set to “YES”, the program will be timer  
recorded to HDD.  
• Timer recording will not start during  
dubbing.  
• When the power is off while recording timer  
is set, front display panel will light up once  
timer recording starts. If you want to turn off  
the light, set “LCD BACKLIGHT REC.”  
(page 104) to “YES”.  
You can also turn off the light, by pressing  
BACK LIGHT on the remote control (under  
the cover) for more than 2 seconds.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Timer Recording  
5 Press '/ "to set the recording  
Timer Recording by  
Specifying Date, Time  
and Channel  
start time (hour), then press |.  
TIMER PROGRAM  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
SET THE TIMER RECORDING DATE, TIME, CHANNEL AND MEDIA.  
[SUN] AM – AM  
HDD  
12/26  
9
:
31  
9
:
33  
AIR/CATV  
CH  
1
DVD-RW  
DVD-RW  
HDD  
DVD-R  
– – – TIMER PROG INFO – – –  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
HDD TIMER RECORDING  
HDD REMAIN: 19h47m  
MODE:  
FINE  
REC. TIME: 0h02m  
The operation method is the same for both  
HDD and DVD.  
• You can timer record up to 32 programs  
scheduled within a year, including Favorite  
Programs and programs set by Timer  
Dubbing, VCR Plus+ System, and Easy  
Recording Guide.  
• You can consecutively record up to 12  
hours to HDD.  
6 Press '/ "to set the recording  
start time (minute), then press  
SET/ENTER.  
TIMER PROGRAM  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
SET THE TIMER RECORDING DATE, TIME, CHANNEL AND MEDIA.  
[SUN] AM – AM  
HDD  
12/26  
9
:
05  
9
:
07  
AIR/CATV  
CH  
1
Preparation for Timer Recording  
– – – TIMER PROG INFO – – –  
HDD TIMER RECORDING  
HDD REMAIN: 19h47m  
MODE:  
FINE  
1 Check that the clock is displaying the  
correct time.  
2 Preset the channels.  
REC. TIME: 0h02m  
3 When you record SAP broadcast, set  
“SAP SETTING” to “ON” (see page 98).  
4 When recording from an external  
equipment such as a CATV box or  
satellite receiver, turn on the power of the  
external equipment.  
7 Set the recording stop time (hour  
and minute) in the same manner  
as steps 5 and 6, then press |.  
TIMER PROGRAM  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
SET THE TIMER RECORDING DATE, TIME, CHANNEL AND MEDIA.  
[SUN] AM – AM  
HDD  
12/26  
9
:
05  
:
10 35  
AIR/CATV  
CH  
1
Example: Recording a TV program in the  
FINE mode: the TV program is on channel 123  
starting at 9:05 AM and stopping at 10:35 AM  
on December 26.  
– – – TIMER PROG INFO – – –  
HDD TIMER RECORDING  
HDD REMAIN: 19h47m  
MODE:  
FINE  
REC. TIME: 1h30m  
1 Press START MENU to display  
8 Press '/" to select the desired  
input source (AIR/CATV or EXT.),  
then press |.  
the START MENU screen.  
2 Press '/ "/\/ |to select  
“TIMER PROGRAM/CHECK”, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
TIMER PROGRAM  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
SET THE TIMER RECORDING DATE, TIME, CHANNEL AND MEDIA.  
[SUN] AM – AM  
HDD  
3 Press '/ "to select “TIMER  
PROGRAM”, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
12/26  
9
:
05  
:
10 35  
AIR/CATV  
CH  
1
– – – TIMER PROG INFO – – –  
HDD TIMER RECORDING  
HDD REMAIN: 19h47m  
MODE:  
FINE  
REC. TIME: 1h30m  
TIMR PROG/CHCK[TIMER PROGRAM]  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
SELECT AN ITEM BELOW FOR TIMER RECORDING OPERATION.  
9 Press '/" to select the desired  
channel (input) number, then  
press |.  
EASY REC. GUIDE  
+
VCR Plus  
TIMER PROGRAM  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
TIMER PROGRAM  
SET THE TIMER RECORDING DATE, TIME, CHANNEL AND MEDIA.  
[SUN] AM AM  
4 Press '/ "to select the desired  
12/26  
9
:
05  
–
:
10 35  
AIR/CATV 123 HDD  
CH  
month/day (DATE), then press |.  
– – – TIMER PROG INFO – – –  
HDD TIMER RECORDING  
HDD REMAIN: 19h47m  
MODE:  
FINE  
Example: December 26  
REC. TIME: 1h30m  
TIMER PROGRAM  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
10Press '/" to select the record-  
ing disc (“HDD” or “DVD”), then  
press SET/ENTER.  
SET THE TIMER RECORDING DATE, TIME, CHANNEL AND MEDIA.  
[SUN] AM – AM  
HDD  
12/26  
:
10 31  
:
10 33  
AIR/CATV  
CH  
1
• You cannot select “DVD” to record  
more than 6 hours.  
To Set Daily or Weekly Timer Program  
• Press Blue (A) or Red (B). Each time you  
press the button, setting changes as shown  
below:  
TIMER PROGRAM  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
SET THE TIMER RECORDING DATE, TIME, CHANNEL AND MEDIA.  
[SUN] AM – AM  
12/26  
9
:
05  
:
10 35  
AIR/CATV 123 HDD  
CH  
Blue (A)  
(DAILY):  
DAILY  
MO-SAT  
MO-FRI  
– – – TIMER PROG INFO – – –  
HDD TIMER RECORDING  
HDD REMAIN: 19h47m  
MODE:  
FINE  
REC. TIME: 1h30m  
Red (B)  
(WEEKLY):  
SUNs  
MONs  
FRIs  
SATs  
Continued on Next Page |||  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
press  
                                                                                                       
|
                                                                                                       
to select “ADVANCED” then press  
• Select the recording mode with  
                                                                                
\
                                                                                
/
                                                                                    
|, then  
                                                                                    
• Press  
                                                         
\
                                                         
/
                                                            
|
                                                            
to select the date, then press  
to correct.  
To Correct Time in Step 5, 6, 7  
                                                   
'
                                                   
/
                                                       
"
                                                       
• Press  
press  
                                                         
\
                                                         
/
/
                                                            
|
                                                            
to select hour or minute, then  
to correct.  
                                                         
'
                                                         
                                                            
"
                                                            
Timer Recording  
11Press \/|to select “REC.  
MODE”, then press SET/ENTER.  
To Change Title Name, etc.  
• If you want to change the title name, etc.,  
COMPLETE  
REC. MODE  
ADVANCED  
SET/ENTER. For details refer to page 51.  
n
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
• A message will be displayed when two or  
more timer programs overlap.  
• A message will be displayed if previously  
set timer programs total 32. Select “NO”  
and press SET/ENTER. Then, cancel  
unnecessary timer programs.  
• When you set DVD as recording media,  
timer recording will not start during disc  
playback. If “ALTERNATE RECORDING” is  
set to “YES”, the program will be timer  
recorded to HDD.  
DAILY  
WEEKLY  
ONCE  
• When you select “ADVANCED” see  
page 51.  
12Press '/" to select the  
recording mode, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
• If there is not enough empty space  
(time), a message is displayed.  
Select the recording mode again.  
• Timer recording will not start during  
dubbing.  
• When the power is off while recording timer  
is set, front display panel will light up once  
timer recording starts. If you want to turn off  
the light, set “LCD BACKLIGHT REC.”  
(page 104) to “YES”.  
You can also turn off the light by pressing  
BACK LIGHT on the remote control (under  
the cover) for more than 2 seconds.  
When “MANUAL SETTING (MN)” is  
selected:  
press SET/ENTER. (The recording mode  
can be selected from 32 levels.)  
13Confirm the setting of timer  
program, press \ to select  
“COMPLETE”, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
Convenient Functions When Recording to  
DVD  
Exact Recording (page 98)  
COMPLETE  
REC. MODE  
ADVANCED  
RETURN  
n
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
• If you set EXACT RECORDING to “YES”,  
the Recorder will automatically adjust the  
recording mode of timer recording so the  
recorded programs will fit on one disc.  
Alternate Recording (page 104)  
• You can record timer programs to HDD  
automatically when Exact Recording  
cannot fit the programs on one disc.  
• Alternate Recording will also function when  
you forgot to insert the disc for recording.  
DAILY  
WEEKLY  
ONCE  
•
“TIMER PROGRAM LIST” screen is  
displayed.  
• The TIMER indicator on the front of  
the Recorder lights up and timer  
programming is completed.  
To check, change or cancel  
14Confirm the programs on the list  
and then press SET/ENTER.  
• Program that has just been set is  
selected.  
timer settings  
• See page 54.  
To stop recording while  
timer recording is in  
progress  
• The screen in step 3 is displayed.  
• If you want to timer record more  
programs, repeat from step 3.  
• If you press REC STOP, “TIMER RE-  
CORDING IS IN PROGRESS, IF YOU  
PRESS THE REC. STOP BUTTON ONCE  
MORE, TIMER RECORDING CANCELS  
AND RECORDING STOPS.” will appear  
on the screen. Even that message goes  
out of the screen, pressing REC STOP  
one more time will stop the recording.  
15Press EXIT to complete timer  
setting.  
• Timer recording will function even  
after you turn the power off.  
NOTE  
To Correct Date in Step 4  
To Set Daily and Weekly Timer Program  
• Press Blue (A) or Red (B) in step 4. Each  
time you press the button, setting changes  
as shown below:  
Blue (A)  
(DAILY):  
DAILY  
MO-SAT  
MO-FRI  
Red (B)  
(WEEKLY):  
SUNs  
MONs  
FRIs  
SATs  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Press  
                                                                                                       
'
                                                                                                       
/
                                                                                                          
"
                                                                                                          
to set as following:  
Timer Recording  
6 Press '/" to select “PROGR.  
Favorite Program Timer  
Recording  
HDD  
1”, “PROGR. 2” or “PROGR. 3”,  
then press SET/ENTER.  
• Select a column displayed as “NOT  
REGISTERED”.  
FAVORITE PROGRAM TIMER REC  
RESERVED OVERWRITE PROGRAM  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
If you register weekly drama and serial  
programs to the Recorder, you can automati-  
cally record to HDD. (Favorite Program Timer  
Recording)  
SELECT AN ITEM BELOW TO REGISTER, CANCEL OR CHANGE PROG.  
NOT REGISTERED  
PROGR. 1  
• There are two ways to register the favorite  
programs.  
NOT REGISTERED  
PROGR. 2  
Overwrite Program Timer  
•
This function allows you to additionally  
record a program every time it is on the air.  
It is convenient when you want to store a  
serial drama, feature program, etc.  
7 Press '/" to select setting,  
then press SET/ENTER to move  
to next setting item.  
FAVORITE PROGRAM TIMER REC  
SET THE TIMER RECORDING PERIOD, TIME AND CHANNEL.  
AM AM AIR/CATV  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
Serial Program Timer  
• This function adds and records the most  
recent favorite programs every time.  
Convenient to record serial drama and  
programs as a series.  
• You can register up to 3 programs each to  
Overwrite Program and Serial Program by  
setting Favorite Program.  
DAILY FRI 10  
:
31  
–
10  
:
34  
CH  
1
– – – TIMER PROG INFO – – –  
HDD TIMER RECORDING  
HDD REMAIN: 19h47m  
MODE:  
REC TIME: 0h02m  
FAVORITE PROGRAM: OVRWRITE  
REC. MODE ADVANCED  
FINE  
HI SP DUBBING:  
COMPLETE  
OFF  
• Refer to page 66 on how to view.  
• Recorded programs can be recorded  
(dubbed) to DVD. Refer to page 61 on how  
to dub.  
Recording Date  
DAILY  
MO-SAT  
MO-FRI  
SUNs  
SATs  
1 Press HDD to select HDD mode.  
Recording Start/Stop Time:  
• HDD button on the front of the  
Recorder lights up.  
Set the hour of start/stop  
time.  
Set the minute of start/stop time.  
7
PM  
2 Press START MENU to display  
00  
START MENU screen.  
[
]
START MENU REC LIST  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
Input Source  
AIR/CATV  
EDIT/  
REC LIST  
DUBBING  
ERASE  
EXT.  
DISPLAYS LIST OF RECORDED TITLES FOR PLAYBACK  
TIMER  
INITIALIZE/  
PROGRAM/  
OTHER  
Channel  
3 Press '/"/ \/|to select  
“TIMER PROGRAM/CHECK”, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
Select the channel.  
Colored Buttons  
Press Blue (A) to set “DAILY”. Each time you  
press the button, the setting toggles as  
shown below:  
4 Press '/" to select “FAVORITE  
PROGRAM”, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
DAILY  
MO-SAT  
MO-FRI  
TIMER PROG/CHCK[FAVORITE PROGRAM]  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
SELECT AN ITEM BELOW FOR TIMER RECORDING OPERATION.  
Press Red (B) to set “WEEKLY”. Each time  
you press the button, the setting toggles as  
shown below:  
EASY REC GUIDE  
VCR Plus+  
TIMER PROGRAM  
FAVORITE PROGRAM  
TIMER PROGRAM LIST  
SUNs  
MONs  
FRIs  
SATs  
• After setting the channel, press SET/  
ENTER to move to step 8.  
5 Press '/" to select  
“OVERWRITE PROGRAM TIMER”  
or “SERIAL PROGRAM TIMER”,  
then press SET/ENTER.  
FAVORITE PROGRAM TIMER REC  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
SETS DATE, TIME, CHANNEL FOR TIMER PROGRAM  
REPEATEDLY OVERWRITES TO HDD  
OVERWRITE PROGRAM TIMER  
SERIAL PROGRAM TIMER  
REC. TO HDD EACH TIME AS DIF  
PROG AND GROUP TOGETHER.  
Continued on Next Page |||  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Select the recording mode with  
                                                                                
\
                                                                                
/
                                                                                    
|, then  
                                                                                    
Timer Recording  
8
                                                                                           
1
                                                                                           
Press \/|to select “REC.  
MODE”, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
Changing the Content of  
Register  
• You can change date, channel, registered  
name and recording mode.  
2Press '/" to select recording  
mode, then press SET/ENTER.  
TIMER PROGRAM  
DAILY 9:30 PM ~ 10:00 PM CH 1  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
1 Press FAVORITE PROG. LIST  
(under the cover).  
SELECT THE RECORDING MODE  
FINE  
SP  
HIGH( QUALMITbYps)  
* *  
2 Press Green (C) to select  
“OVERWRITTEN PROGRAM” or  
“SERIAL PROGRAM”.  
(
Mbps)  
STANDARD  
* *  
(
Mbps)  
LP  
2X  
* *  
* *  
(
Mbps)  
EP  
3X  
ABLE TO MANUALLY SELECT  
OF 32 LEVELS.  
MANUAL SETTING (MN)  
1
REMAIN TIME: FINE 19h47m  
3 Select the program for which you  
wish to change its content.  
• If there is not enough empty space  
(time), a message is displayed.  
Select the recording mode again.  
4 Press Blue (A) (CHNG REG).  
5 Change the content of register in  
When “MANUAL SETTING (MN)” is  
selected:  
next screen.  
FAVORITE PROGRAM TIMER REC  
SET THE TIMER RECORDING PERIOD, TIME AND CHANNEL.  
AM AM AIR/CATV  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
press SET/ENTER. (The recording mode  
DAILY FRI 10  
:
31  
–
10  
:
00  
CH  
1
can be selected from 32 levels.)  
– – – TIMER PROG INFO – – –  
HDD TIMER RECORDING  
HDD REMAIN: 19h47m  
MODE:  
REC TIME: 1h00m  
FAVORITE PROGRAM: OVRWRITE  
REC. MODE ADVANCED  
FINE  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
TIMER PROGRAM  
DAILY 9:30 PM ~ 10:00 PM CH 1  
HI SP DUBBING:  
COMPLETE  
OFF  
ABLE TO SELECT 1 OF 32 LEVELS OF PICTURE QUALITY  
IN MANUAL REC. MODE BASED ON REMAINING.  
EP  
LP  
SP  
FINE  
• Change of date and channel can be  
done in page 49, step 7.  
CURRENT MODE:MN 16  
REMAINING TIME:HDD 48h57m  
• Change of registered name can be  
done in pages 51 and 52, steps 1-6.  
• Change of recording mode can be  
done in page 50, step 8.  
9 Press \/|to select “COM-  
PLETE”, then press SET/ENTER.  
Canceling the Register  
COMPLETE  
REC. MODE  
ADVANCED  
RETURN  
1 Press FAVORITE PROG. LIST  
n
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
DAILY  
WEEKLY  
(under the cover).  
2 Press Green (C) to select  
“OVERWRITTEN PROGRAM” or  
“SERIAL PROGRAM”.  
• Refer to page 51 when you select  
“ADVANCED”.  
10Press SET/ENTER.  
• One favorite program is registered  
and the screen in step 4 will be  
displayed.  
3 Select the program you wish to  
cancel.  
4 Press Red (B) (CNCL REG).  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Press  
                                                                                                     
'
                                                                                                     
/
                                                                                                        
"
                                                                                                        
/
                                                                                                            
\
                                                                                                            
/
                                                                                                               
|
                                                                                                               
to  
Timer Recording  
Changing and Registering  
Program Name (Input Char-  
acters)  
Timer Program Detail  
Setting  
DVD-RW  
DVD-RW  
HDD  
DVD-R  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
1 When you set a timer program,  
select “ADVANCED” in screen  
below, then press SET/ENTER.  
• Select “ADVANCED” during timer program-  
ming to set the following:  
Register and Change Program Name  
(page 51)  
• You can input capital letters, small  
letters, numerals, symbols and space up  
to 64 characters.  
TIMER PROGRAM  
SET THE TIMER RECORDING DATE, TIME, CHANNEL AND MEDIA.  
[SUN] AM – AM  
CH  
HDD  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
12/26  
:
10 31  
:
10 33  
AIR/CATV  
1
– – – TIMER PROG INFO – – –  
High Speed Dubbing Priority (page 52)  
• You can high speed dub programs timer  
recorded on HDD to DVD in Video mode  
if you set “HI SP DUB PRIORITY”.  
Favorite Program Registration (page 53)  
• You can register favorite programs timer  
recorded by Easy Recording Guide,  
VCR Plus+ and Timer Program.  
HDD TIMER RECORDING  
HDD REMAIN: 19h47m  
MODE:  
REC. TIME: 0h02m  
FAVORITE PROGRAM: OVRWRITE  
REC. MODE ADVANCED  
FINE  
HI SP DUBBING:  
COMPLETE  
OFF  
2 Press '/" to select “REG/CHNG  
PROG NAME”, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
TIMER PROGRAM ADVANCED SETTINGS  
12/26 SAT 10:31 AM – 10:33 AM CH 1  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
• You can call up Timer Program Detail  
Setting screen in next step.  
“EASY REC. GUIDE”  
• Select “ADVANCED” in step 9 on page  
44.  
“VCR Plus+”  
PROGRAM NAME:  
REG/CHNG PROG NAME  
HI SP DUB PRIORITY  
FAVORITE PROGRAMS  
SETTING COMPLETE  
REGISTERS/CHANGES PROGRAM NAME  
• Select “ADVANCED” in step 6 on page  
45.  
“TIMER PROGRAM”  
• Select “ADVANCED” in step 13 page 48.  
Input Character Screen  
Input field  
(Displays title name. Can  
change and input title name.)  
Cursor  
(Displays the position to input characters.)  
Displays input characters.  
Select when you switch  
between capital letters  
and small letters.  
TIMER PROGRAM ADVANCED SETTINGS  
12/26 SUN 10:31 AM – 10:33 AM CH 1  
PROGRAM NAME:  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
World Railway Trains |  
.
(
Í
,
A
N
À
B
O
Á
Ñ
1
'
C
P
Â
Ò
2
*
D
Q
Ã
Ó
3
/
E
R
Ä
Ô
4
[
F
S
Å
Õ
5
\
G
T
H
U
Ç
I
J
W
É
K
X
Ê
Û
-
L
Y
Ë
M
Z
Ì
?
:
!
;
)
small  
END  
V
È
Ù
8
Æ
Ö
6
Î
Ï
$
"
#
%
_
Ø
7
^
Ú
9
Ü
+
ß
>
<
|
=
}
0
]
&
{
˜
i
n
ENTER  
ERASE  
SELECT  
BACK SPACE  
ENTER  
BACK  
ERASE ALL  
FOWARD  
RETURN  
SPACE  
select the character to  
be input.  
Select when you  
complete inputting  
character.  
Continued on Next Page |||  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Timer Recording  
3 Change title name  
Recording to Prepare for  
Dubbing to DVD in Video  
Mode  
1 Press Red (B) or Green (C) to  
select the character to change.  
• When you want to insert characters,  
move the cursor to the position you  
want to insert by pressing Red (B) or  
Green (C).  
1 When you set a timer program,  
select “ADVANCED”, then press  
SET/ENTER.  
2 Press Blue (A) to erase the  
TIMER PROGRAM  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
character to change.  
SET THE TIMER RECORDING DATE, TIME, CHANNEL AND MEDIA.  
12/26 [SUN] 10 31 AM – 10 33 AM AIR/CATV CH HDD  
:
:
1
World Rail  
– – – TIMER PROG INFO – – –  
HDD TIMER RECORDING  
HDD REMAIN: 19h47m  
MODE:  
REC. TIME: 0h02m  
FAVORITE PROGRAM: OVRWRITE  
REC. MODE ADVANCED  
FINE  
4 Press '/"/ \/|to select the  
HI SP DUBBING:  
COMPLETE  
OFF  
character to input, then press  
SET/ENTER.  
2 Press '/" to select “HI SP DUB  
PRIORITY”, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
M |  
.
(
Í
,
A
N
À
B
O
Á
Ñ
1
'
C
P
Â
Ò
2
*
D
Q
Ã
Ó
3
/
E
R
Ä
Ô
4
[
F
S
Å
Õ
5
\
G
T
H
U
Ç
I
J
W
É
K
X
Ê
Û
-
L
Y
Ë
M
Z
Ì
?
:
!
;
)
small  
END  
V
È
Ù
8
Æ
Ö
6
Î
Ï
$
"
#
%
_
TIMER PROGRAM ADVANCED SETTINGS  
12/26 SUN 10:31 AM – 10:33 AM CH 1  
PROGRAM NAME:  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
Ø
7
^
Ú
9
Ü
+
ß
>
<
|
=
}
0
]
&
{
˜
i
REG/CHNG PROG NAME  
SELECT [HI SP DUB PRIORITY] FOR  
HIGH SPEED DUBBING?  
HIGH SPEED DUBBING HAS CERTAIN  
RESTRICTIONS.  
HI SP DUB PRIORITY  
FAVORITE PROGRAMS  
SETTING COMPLETE  
• Inputs character in input field.  
• To switch between capital and small  
letters, select “CAPS” or “small”, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
SEE MANUAL FOR DETAILS.  
YES  
NO  
5 Input title letters by repeating step  
3 Press \/|to select “YES”, then  
4.  
press SET/ENTER.  
• Press Blue (A) (BACK SPACE) to  
erase text to the left of the cursor, a  
character at a time.  
TIMER PROGRAM ADVANCED SETTINGS  
12/26 SUN 10:31 AM – 10:33 AM CH 1  
PROGRAM NAME:  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
• Press Red (B) (BACK) to move the  
cursor back one space.  
• Press Green (C) (FORWARD) to move  
the cursor forward one space.  
• Press Yellow (D) (SPACE) to input a  
space.  
REG/CHNG PROG NAME  
SELECT [HI SP DUB PRIORITY] FOR  
HIGH SPEED DUBBING?  
HIGH SPEED DUBBING HAS CERTAIN  
RESTRICTIONS.  
HI SP DUB PRIORITY  
FAVORITE PROGRAMS  
SETTING COMPLETE  
SEE MANUAL FOR DETAILS.  
YES  
NO  
RETURN  
n
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
• The maximum number of characters  
you can input is 64.  
4 Press '/" to select “SETTING  
COMPLETE”, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
6 Press '/"/ \/|to select “End”,  
then press SET/ENTER.  
TIMER PROGRAM ADVANCED SETTINGS  
12/26 SUN 10:31 AM – 10:33 AM CH 1  
PROGRAM NAME:  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
• Confirmation screen with “OK” button  
is displayed. Press SET/ENTER.  
• The screen in step 1 is displayed.  
My Favorite Series 1 |  
.
(
Í
,
A
N
À
B
O
Á
Ñ
1
'
C
P
Â
Ò
2
*
D
Q
Ã
Ó
3
/
E
R
Ä
Ô
4
[
F
S
Å
Õ
5
\
G
T
H
U
Ç
I
J
W
É
K
X
Ê
Û
-
L
Y
Ë
M
Z
Ì
?
:
!
;
NOTE  
)
small  
END  
V
È
Ù
8
Æ
Ö
6
Î
Ï
$
"
#
%
_
• You cannot edit frame by frame the  
program recorded using High Speed  
Dubbing Priority.  
Ø
7
^
Ú
9
Ü
+
ß
>
<
|
=
}
0
]
&
{
˜
i
n
ENTER  
ERASE  
SELECT  
BACK SPACE  
ENTER  
BACK  
ERASE ALL  
FOWARD  
RETURN  
SPACE  
• To edit frame by frame after recording,  
display REC LIST, press Yellow (D) (FUNC  
MENU), and cancel High Speed Dubbing  
Priority using the Function Menu. You  
cannot set “HI SP DUB PRIORITY” to the  
program again once you cancel.  
• The screen in step 2 on page 51 is  
displayed.  
NOTE  
• You can change the title name using the  
Edit feature (page 83) by the same  
sequence of operations.  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Press  
                                                              
'
                                                              
/
                                                                 
"
                                                                 
/
                                                                     
\
                                                                     
/
                                                                        
|
                                                                        
to select from  
Timer Recording  
Registering as Favorite  
Program  
1 When you set a timer program,  
select “ADVANCED”, then press  
SET/ENTER.  
TIMER PROGRAM  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
SET THE TIMER RECORDING DATE, TIME, CHANNEL AND MEDIA.  
12/26 [SUN] 10 31 AM – 10 33 AM AIR/CATV CH HDD  
:
:
1
– – – TIMER PROG INFO – – –  
HDD TIMER RECORDING  
HDD REMAIN: 19h47m  
MODE:  
REC. TIME: 0h02m  
FAVORITE PROGRAM: OVRWRITE  
REC. MODE ADVANCED  
FINE  
HI SP DUBBING:  
COMPLETE  
OFF  
2 Press '/" to select “FAVORITE  
PROGRAMS”, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
TIMER PROGRAM ADVANCED SETTINGS  
12/25 SAT 10:31 AM – 10:33 AM CH 1  
PROGRAM NAME:  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
REG/CHNG PROG NAME  
REGISTER THIS TIMER PROGRAM  
IN FAVORITE PROGRAM?  
HI SP DUB PRIORITY  
FAVORITE PROGRAMS  
SETTING COMPLETE  
REGISTER OVERWRITE PROGRAM  
REGISTER AS SERIAL REC  
DON'T REGISTER  
3 Press '/" to select favorite  
program register, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
• REGISTER OVERWRITE PROGRAM  
• REGISTER AS SERIAL REC  
• DON’T REGISTER  
If you select “DON’T REGISTER”, the  
screen in step 2 is displayed without  
registration.  
4 Set the interval of registered timer  
recording.  
either “WEEKLY”, “DAILY”, “MO-FRI”  
or “MO-SAT”, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
TIMER PROGRAM ADVANCED SETTINGS  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
12/25 SAT 10:31 AM – 10:33 AM CH 1  
PROGRAM NAME:  
REG/CHNG PROG NAME  
SELECT REPEAT PERIOD OF TIMER REC.  
HI SP DUB PRIORITY  
FAVORITE PROGRAMS  
SETTING COMPLETE  
WEEKLY  
MO – FRI  
DAILY  
MO – SAT  
5 Press '/" to select “SETTING  
COMPLETE”, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
• Confirmation screen with “OK” button  
is displayed. Press SET/ENTER.  
• The screen in step 1 is displayed.  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Timer Recording  
Confirming the Content of a  
Timer Program in Detail or  
Change Its Content  
Confirm, Change and  
Cancel a Timer Program  
DVD-RW  
VR MODE  
DVD-RW  
VIDEO MODE  
HDD  
DVD-R  
4 Press '/" to select the program  
to change, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
The operation method is the same for both  
HDD and DVD.  
TIMER PROGRAM LIST  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
CAN CHECK, CHANGE OR CANCEL TIMER PROGRAM.  
• You can confirm, change and cancel the  
content of timer programs set by “EASY  
REC. GUIDE”, “VCR Plus+”, “TIMER  
PROGRAM” and “TIMER DUBBING”.  
• The Timer Program List shows all timer  
programs set.  
MEDIA  
HDD  
PROGRAM DATE&TIME  
12/25 SAT 7:00 PM  
CH  
REC. MODE  
SP  
–
–
–
7:30 PM CH 8  
HDD  
12/25 SAT 9:05 PM  
12/25 SAT 10:30 PM  
9:50 PM CH 8  
11:00 PM CH 8  
FINE  
FINE  
HDD  
5 Press \/|to select “CHANGE”,  
then press SET/ENTER.  
Confirming  
TIMER PROGRAM LIST  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
1 Press START MENU to display  
12/25 SAT 9:05 PM  
REC. MEDIA: HDD  
HI SP DUB PRIOR.: ON  
–
9:50 PM  
REC. MODE: FINE  
FAVORITE PROGRAMS: NO  
CH8  
START MENU.  
2 Press '/"/ \/|to select  
“TIMER PROGRAM/CHECK”, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
DO YOU WANT TO CANCEL, CHANGE OR EXIT WITHOUT CHANGING?  
CANCEL CHANGE EXIT  
3 Press '/" to select “TIMER  
PROGRAM LIST”, then press  
SET/ENTER.  
• CANCEL: The confirmation screen  
appears.  
• CHANGE: The Timer Program screen  
appears.  
• EXIT: The screen in step 4 appears  
• The Timer Program List screen  
appears.  
TIMER PROG/CHCK[TIMER PROGRAM LIST]  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
6 Change the content of timer  
program by following the steps on  
pages 47 and 48.  
SELECT AN ITEM BELOW FOR TIMER RECORDING OPERATION.  
EASY REC GUIDE  
VCR Plus+  
TIMER PROGRAM  
FAVORITE PROGRAM  
TIMER PROGRAM LIST  
Canceling a Timer Program  
1 Press '/" to select timer  
program to cancel on the Timer  
Program List screen, then press  
SET/ENTER.  
TIMER PROGRAM LIST  
CAN CHECK, CHANGE OR CANCEL TIMER PROGRAM.  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
TIMER PROGRAM LIST  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
CAN CHECK, CHANGE OR CANCEL TIMER PROGRAM.  
MEDIA  
HDD  
PROGRAM DATE&TIME  
12/25 SAT 7:00 PM  
CH  
REC. MODE  
SP  
–
–
–
7:30 PM CH 8  
MEDIA  
HDD  
PROGRAM DATE&TIME  
12/25 SAT 7:00 PM  
CH  
REC. MODE  
SP  
HDD  
12/25 SAT 9:05 PM  
12/25 SAT 10:30 PM  
9:50 PM CH 8  
11:00 PM CH 8  
FINE  
FINE  
–
–
–
7:30 PM CH 8  
HDD  
HDD  
12/25 SAT 9:05 PM  
12/25 SAT 10:30 PM  
9:50 PM CH 8  
11:00 PM CH 8  
FINE  
FINE  
HDD  
■ Press STRAT MENU or EXIT  
to complete only the confirmation.  
■ Press K/ Lto switch to  
next (or previous) page.  
■ Proceed to step 4 if you want to  
confirm the content of a timer  
program in detail or change its  
content.  
■ Press one of the Colored  
buttons to select timer program-  
ming screen to add a timer  
program.  
TIMER PROGRAM LIST  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
12/25 SAT 9:05 PM  
–
9:50 PM  
CH8  
REC. MEDIA: HDD  
HI SP DUB PRIOR.: ON  
REC. MODE: FINE  
FAVORITE PROGRAMS: NO  
DO YOU WANT TO CANCEL, CHANGE OR EXIT WITHOUT CHANGING?  
CANCEL CHANGE EXIT  
2 Press \/|to select “CANCEL”,  
then press SET/ENTER.  
• EASY REC. GUIDE.... Blue (A)  
• VCR Plus+.... Red (B)  
• TIMER PROGRAMMING.... Green (C)  
• The confirmation screen appears.  
3 Press \/|to select “YES”, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
• Selected timer program is canceled,  
and the screen returns to Timer  
Program List (step 1).  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Automatic Recording of Satellite Broadcast (AV AUTO REC)  
HDD  
Recording with  
AV AUTO REC  
When connected to a satellite receiver, etc.  
with a timer recording function, this Recorder  
can be used to automatically record the timer  
1 Set up the satellite receiver, etc.  
program. (Refer to the operation manual of  
• Set the recording timer on the satellite  
the satellite receiver, etc. for instructions on  
receiver, etc. for the program you  
how to set the timer program.)  
wish to record. (Refer to the operation  
manual of the satellite receiver, etc.  
for instructions on how to set the  
program timer.)  
Example: Use of AV AUTO REC Function  
Satellite  
2:00 AM  
Timer  
Program  
3:00 AM  
4:00 AM  
Timer  
Program  
5:00 AM  
receiver, etc.  
2 Turn off the satellite receiver, etc.  
Set timer  
program  
3 1 Press HDD to select HDD  
This Recorder  
mode.  
2:00 AM  
3:00 AM  
4:00 AM  
5:00 AM  
Records  
Records  
• HDD button on the front of the  
Set AV AUTO  
REC function  
timer program  
timer program  
Recorder lights up.  
Recording Recording Recording Recording  
begins ends begins ends  
2 Press INPUT to select “L1”  
(LINE IN 1 [AV AUTO REC]).  
Power  
OFF  
Power OFF  
Power ON  
Power ON  
4 Select external audio.  
• Set “EXTERNAL AUDIO” of “REC.  
FUNCTION” to “STEREO” or “DUAL  
MONO” (page 98).  
Important!  
• The AV AUTO REC function only operates  
when used with a satellite receiver, etc.  
with timer recording functions.  
• The AV AUTO REC function will only  
operate when the satellite receiver, etc. is  
connected to the LINE IN 1 (AUTO REC)  
jacks on the rear of the Recorder.  
• AV AUTO REC function is a function to  
record to HDD. You cannot use this  
function to record to DVD.  
• Recording mode is set to FINE when  
recorded using AV AUTO REC. You  
cannot choose any other recording mode.  
• Set “DUAL MONO REC. SET” of  
“REC. FUNCTION” to either “L CH” or  
“R CH” when you set “HI SP DUB  
PRIORITY” to “YES” (page 98).  
5 Press POWER to turn off the  
Recorder.  
6 Press and hold AV AUTO REC  
(under the cover) for more than  
two seconds.  
• External automatic recording function  
switches on or off every time you  
operate this function.  
• “AUTO REC” is displayed on the front  
display panel (page 18).  
• Recording automatically starts and  
stops when the Recorder receives a  
signal from satellite receiver, etc. at  
start time and stop time.  
Connecting to a Satellite  
Receiver, etc.  
To use the AV AUTO REC function, connect  
the satellite receiver, etc. to the LINE IN 1 (AV  
AUTO REC) jacks on the rear of the Re-  
corder.  
NOTE  
• When recording PPV (pay-per-view)  
programs of satellite broadcasts, always  
make sure to set the satellite receiver, etc.  
to “Record”. Certain programs may not be  
recorded or require additional charges for  
recording.  
The Recorder  
• Use AV AUTO REC in combination with a  
satellite receiver, etc. equipped with a timer  
recording function.  
To LINE IN 1  
(AV AUTO REC) jacks  
• Since the power of this Recorder is  
switched on after the video signal from a  
satellite receiver, etc. has been received,  
the start of a program may not be  
recorded.  
Video/audio cable  
(supplied)  
To video/audio  
output jacks  
• When using AV AUTO REC function, it is  
recommended that you set the timer  
recording start time a little earlier than  
usual.  
Satellite receiver, etc.  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Automatic Recording of Satellite Broadcast (AV AUTO REC)  
To Cancel the AV AUTO  
REC Function  
Before Recording  
Press POWER.  
• The Recorder is turned on and the AV  
AUTO REC function will be canceled with  
the “AUTO REC” indicator on the front  
display panel turned off.  
During Recording  
Press REC STOP.  
• The “AUTO REC” indicator will be turned  
off.  
• Timer recording is given priority when  
timer recording and AV AUTO REC  
times overlap.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dubbing (HDD/DVD)  
Dubbing Method and Dubbing  
Types  
You can dub from HDD to DVD and DVD to HDD. It is  
recommended to dub important programs recorded on HDD  
to DVD for safe keeping.  
Limitation during Dubbing  
Stopping the Dubbing in the Middle  
• When dubbing “Copy Once” enabled program from HDD  
to DVD-RW (CPRM compatible) is stopped in the middle,  
the part that was dubbed will be erased from HDD. If you  
restart the dubbing, you can dub the remaining part as a  
different title but overlap between title dubbed before and  
after the stop might be off.  
• Can dub up to five titles (programs) in one session.  
• Cannot dub programs that are not recorded properly.  
Dubbing Titles Including “Copy Once” En-  
Dubbing Method  
abled Program  
• When dubbing titles including “Copy Once”, enabled  
program on HDD to DVD-RW, use DVD-RW (VR mode)  
Ver. 1.1 CPRM compatible disc.  
• “Copy Once” enabled program recorded to HDD will  
move (recorded program will be erased after the move) to  
DVD-RW. (You cannot dub in Video mode even if you use  
DVD-RW Ver. 1.1 CPRM compatible disc.)  
TIMER DUBBING  
Can set to dub during times the Recorder is not used like  
at midnight.  
DUB NOW  
Start dubbing immediately.  
Dubbing Types  
NOTE  
High Speed Dubbing  
• Even if you select “HIGH SPEED DUBBING”, you may not  
be able to increase the speed of dubbing from 1✕  
depending on titles you want to dub and type of disc.  
• When title on HDD that includes “Copy Once” enabled  
title is divided into several chapters, you can add all the  
chapters to dubbing list by adding one of the chapters to  
dubbing list.  
• Copy titles recorded to HDD without any change of image  
quality and recording length. This Recorder can perform  
high speed dubbing with no loss of image quality of data  
so there is no degradation.  
• Time to dub varies according to the recording mode of  
title (program) to dub or type of disc you use.  
• When a blank 2X speed compatible disc is initialized with  
other DVD recorder, dubbing may be done at 1X speed  
even if high speed dubbing is selected.  
Dubbing Direction and Dubbing  
Speed  
Example: Approximate time it takes to dub when you dub  
program 1 hour long  
Dubbing Constant Speed  
High Speed  
Recording Mode of Source Title  
Dubbing  
Direction  
Speed (Rate Conversion (High Speed  
Dubbing)  
Dubbing)  
Required time  
FINE  
SP  
LP  
EP  
*1  
*2  
*1  
HDD→DVD-RW  
Using a 2✕-speed  
Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx.  
✕
✕
(VR mode)  
compatible disc  
30 min 15 min 7.5 min 5 min  
HDD→DVD-R/RW  
(VIDEO mode)  
Using a 1✕-speed  
compatible disc  
Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx.  
60 min 30 min 15 min 10 min  
✕
✕
√
DVD-R/RW→HDD  
—
• Even if DVD-R is compatible to 4✕ speed dubbing the  
Recorder will handle as disc compatible to 2✕ speed  
dubbing.  
• If you perform high-speed dubbing of a “Copy Once”  
program, dubbing will not be done at 2✕-speed, even if  
you use a 2✕-speed compatible disc.  
✕
Can dub.  
— Cannot dub.  
√ Can High Speed Dub the recorded title if it is recorded  
using “HI SP DUB PRIORITY”.  
*1 Can just move the original title if that title is “Copy Once”  
enabled.  
*2 Cannot dub “Copy Once” enabled title.  
Rate Conversion Dubbing (Constant Speed)  
• Plays back titles of HDD and dubs to DVD-R/RW or plays  
back titles of DVD-R/RW and dubs to HDD.  
• Selects picture quality (recording mode) for dubbing. You  
can select among 32 levels of recording modes so it is  
convenient when you want to fit the programs into one  
disc.  
• You can select among 32 levels of recording mode by  
using Manual setting but picture quality will not exceed  
the quality of original.  
• Time to dub is about the same as time required to record  
the title in the beginning.  
NOTE  
• You cannot operate other functions while dubbing.  
—Timer programming will not start while dubbing.  
—You cannot record to HDD or playback titles on HDD  
while dubbing.  
• Exact recording will not operate along with TIMER  
DUBBING.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dubbing (HDD/DVD)  
• The Recorder continues to dub the title in same screen  
size when it started dubbing even in case the screen size  
of title changed in the middle.  
• When you record a program with SAP broadcast with “HI  
SP DUB PRIORITY” set to “YES”, either “MAIN” or “SAP”  
audio is recorded according to the selected SAP mode.  
See page 99 for details.  
• When recording 16:9 size image in LP, EP, or MN1-17  
recording modes, the image will be recorded as 4:3  
(squeezed).  
Title Name and Chapter Mark Copied  
during Dubbing  
• Title name and chapter mark are as follows:  
Chapter  
Mark  
Rate Conversion Dubbing  
Title Name  
HDD↔DVD (VR mode)  
✕
✕
✕
*1  
—
HDD→DVD (Video mode)  
*2  
✕
DVD (VIDEO mode)→HDD  
—
Rate Conversion Dubbing  
Limitation of Rate Conversion Dubbing  
• “DOLBY VIRTUAL SURROUND” (page 76) will be set to  
“OFF” when rate conversion dubbing is used.  
• “DD OUTPUT LEVEL” (page 103) is set to “NO” when rate  
conversion dubbing is used.  
• The image might look longer vertically when you dub 16:9  
image from HDD to DVD-R/RW (Video mode) using rate  
conversion dubbing. In such case, adjust TV setting to  
correct the playback image.  
Chapter  
Mark  
High Speed Dubbing  
Title Name  
HDD→DVD (VR mode)  
✕
✕
✕
*3  
HDD→DVD (VIDEO mode)  
✕
✕
Can dub.  
— Cannot dub.  
*1 Chapter mark of the dubbed title will not be copied  
when you dub from HDD to DVD-R/RW (Video mode)  
using rate conversion dubbing function. The chapters  
will be inserted according to the setting of auto chapter  
(either “10 min”, “15 min”, or “30 min”).  
• Chapter marks might shift slightly when dubbed using  
rate conversion dubbing.  
Dubbing from HDD to DVD  
*2 You cannot dub from a finalized DVD-R/RW (Video  
mode) to HDD.  
Limitation when Dubbing from HDD to DVD-  
R/RW (Video Mode)  
*3 During dubbing from HDD to DVD-R/RW (Video mode)  
maximum chapter marks that could be dubbed using  
high speed dubbing is 99 per title.  
You cannot dub from HDD to DVD-R/RW in following cases:  
• Total number of titles in DVD-R/RW reached 99 or total  
number of chapters reached 999.  
• Thumbnail will not be dubbed.  
• HDD or DVD-R/RW is either recording or playing back.  
High Speed Dubbing  
Dubbing from DVD to HDD  
Limitations on High Speed Dubbing when  
You cannot dub from DVD-R/RW to HDD in  
Dubbing from HDD to DVD (Video Mode)  
• Dubbing timer needs at least same amount of time it took  
to record original title even in case of high speed  
dubbing. You cannot timer record at same time you set  
dubbing timer. (Example: If you set 2 hours of high speed  
dubbing from 2 AM, you cannot set other timer recording  
during 2-4 AM.)  
following cases:  
• Not enough HDD capacity. (When there is not enough  
capacity in HDD, the Recorder will continue the dubbing  
until there is no more capacity.)  
• Total number of titles in HDD reached 199 or total number  
of chapters reached 999.  
• HDD or DVD-R/RW is either recording or playing back.  
• When you try to do this, dubbing will be suspended.  
When you dub a title that has both “Copy Once” and  
“Copy Freely” enabled programs, only the “Copy Freely”  
enabled program will be dubbed.  
• During high speed dubbing, you cannot monitor the  
program being dubbed on the TV screen.  
• If you stop high speed dubbing in the middle of process  
the recorded title might be erased.  
• You cannot high speed dub from a play list.  
• You cannot dub a “Copy Once” enabled program  
recorded on a DVD-RW to the HDD.  
“HIGH SPEED DUBBING PRIORITY” (pages  
52, 103)  
Dubbing from DVD to HDD  
• This function enables high-speed dubbing in both Video  
mode and VR mode.  
• You can only dub programs of DVD-R/RW (VR mode) to  
HDD. You cannot dub a disc that used another recorder.  
• You cannot dub a DVD-R/RW (Video mode) disc recorded  
with this Recorder after it has been finalized.  
If you cancel the finalization in DVD-RW (Video mode)  
disc, you can dub programs.  
• If a title is recorded with “HI SP DB PRIORITY” set to  
“NO”, you cannot perform high-speed dubbing in Video  
mode. Use “RATE CONVERSION DUBBING” (page 59).  
(This setting is unnecessary when performing high speed  
dubbing into VR mode.)  
• Cancel “HIGH SPEED DUBBING PRIORITY” when you  
want to edit frames of programs recorded to HDD using  
“HIGH SPEED DUBBING PRIORITY”. You can edit the  
frames after the cancellation.  
• You cannot set “HIGH SPEED DUBBING PRIORITY” again  
to the program that canceled “HIGH SPEED DUBBING  
PRIORITY” once.  
• You cannot record 16:9 and 4:3 screen size images in one  
title.  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Set picture quality with  
                                                                                                                       
\
                                                                                                                       
/
                                                                                                                          
|, then press  
                                                                                                                          
Dubbing (HDD/DVD)  
When “MANUAL SETTING (MN)” is  
selected:  
Timer Dubbing/Dubbing  
Immediately  
(HDD↔DVD)  
SET/ENTER. (Picture quality can be  
selected from 32 levels.)  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
TIMER PROGRAM  
DAILY 9:30 PM ~ 10:00 PM CH 1  
High Speed Dubbing  
(HDD→DVD)  
ABLE TO SELECT 1 OF 32 LEVELS OF PICTURE QUALITY  
IN MANUAL REC. MODE BASED ON REMAINING.  
LP SP  
EP  
FINE  
DVD-RW  
VR MODE  
DVD-RW  
VIDEO MODE  
HDD  
DVD-R  
Selecting Exact Dubbing  
• You can choose titles and chapters as the  
unit to dub.  
• Select Exact Dubbing when there are  
multiple titles (up to 5) you want to dub and  
you know you cannot fit all into one disc.  
The Recorder will select the appropriate  
recording mode and fit all titles into one  
disc (maximum 6 hours).  
1 When dubbing from HDD to  
DVD  
Load a recordable disc onto the  
disc tray, then press HDD.  
• Load the disc formatted in either VR  
mode or Video mode.  
• You cannot set recording mode to each  
titles when you select exact dubbing.  
• You cannot dub titles in higher quality than  
the original.  
• The HDD button on the front of the  
Recorder lights up.  
• The Recorder will lower the recording  
mode when there is not enough capacity in  
the disc to dub compared to the length of  
all the titles (programs). Be aware that  
original “Copy Once” enabled program will  
be erased after dubbing.  
When dubbing from DVD to  
HDD  
Load a disc that recorded the title  
you want to dub, then press DVD.  
• The DVD button on the front of the  
Recorder lights up.  
5 Press '/"/ \/|to select the  
title to dub, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
2 Press DUBBING.  
• You can select “DUBBING” in Start  
Menu to dub.  
• Setting toggles between “dubbing”  
and “dubbing canceled” each time  
you press SET/ENTER.  
• Screen of step 4 will display when  
you dub from DVD to HDD.  
• Select more titles when you want to  
dub multiple titles. (You can dub up to  
5 titles at once.)  
3 Press '/" to select “HIGH  
SPEED DUBBING” or “RATE  
CONVERSION DUBBING”, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
s
DUBBING  
SELECTED TIME: 0h 10m  
TITLE: CH33 FINE  
HDD ORIGINAL DVD  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
DVD REMAN: 2h10m  
TITLE INFO: 10/  
1
5
TUE 10:00 PM  
2
–
11:00 PM  
3
• Screen of step 5 will display when  
you select “HIGH SPEED DUBBING”.  
Dubbing from HDD to DVD  
4
5
6
• When the DVD-R/RW is in Video  
mode, if a title has been recorded  
with HI SP DUB PRIORITY setting set  
to “NO”, then select “RATE CONVER-  
SION DUBBING”.  
ENTER  
SELECT  
TITLE LIST  
SET TITLE TO DUB  
CHAPTER  
NEXT STEP  
Dubbing mark displays to selected titles.  
Numbers will be assigned in order of  
selection and dubbing will start accord-  
ing to the numbers assigned.  
4 Press '/" to select the record-  
ing mode (picture quality), then  
press SET/ENTER.  
6 Press Yellow (D) (NEXT STEP).  
s
DUBBING  
HDD ORIGINAL DVD  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
SELECT THE RECORDING MODE  
7 Press \/|to select “DUB NOW”  
or “TIMER DUBBING”, then press  
SET/ENTER.  
FINE (HIGH QUALITY)  
SP (STANDARD)  
LP (2X)  
EP (3X)  
s
DUBBING  
HDD ORIGINAL DVD  
SELECTED TIME: 0h 10m  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
DVD REMAN: 2h10m  
ABLE TO MANUALLY SELECT  
OF 32 LEVELS.  
MANUAL SETTING (MN)  
EXACT DUBBING  
1
SELECT QUALITY BASED ON  
REMAING DVD CAPACITY.  
IF YOU SET TIMER DUBBING, YOU CAN START  
DUBBING AT A SPECFIED TIME AUTOMATICALLY.  
• You cannot select “EXACT DUBBING”  
when you dub from DVD to HDD.  
DUB NOW  
TIMER DUBBING  
• If you have selected “DUB NOW”, go  
to step 10-2.  
Continued on Next Page |||  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dubbing (HDD/DVD)  
NOTE  
8 1 Press '/" to input start time  
Limitation of Timer Dubbing  
(hour), then press SET/ENTER.  
2 Press '/" to input start time  
(minute), then press SET/ENTER.  
• You can only set one timer dubbing at a  
time. You cannot set multiple dubbing at  
same time.  
s
DUBBING  
HDD ORIGINAL DVD  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
• You cannot set timer dubbing when you set  
32 timer recordings in total (including Easy  
Rec Guide, VCR Plus+, Timer Program). In  
such case cancel timer recording by  
selecting “TIMER PROGRAM/CHECK”  
(page 54).  
SELECTED TIME: 0h 10m  
IF YOU SET TIMER DUBBING, YOU CAN START  
DUBBING AT A SPECIFIED TIME AUTOMATICALLY.  
DVD REMAN: 2h10m  
SET STARTING TIME, THEN SET AUTOMATIC FINALIZE (YES/NO)  
(ONLY IN CASE OF DVD DUBBING).  
DUB START TIME  
AM  
AUTOMATIC FINALIZE NO  
CANCEL  
0
:
00  
• “EXACT RECORDING” (page 98) will not  
work for timer dubbing.  
OK  
• After setting timer dubbing (dubbing on  
standby or in the middle of timer dubbing),  
you cannot perform operations such as  
erasing, initialization and editing.  
• When timer dubbing has been set, you  
cannot dub a “Copy Once” enabled  
program until the timer dubbing is  
completed.  
9 Press '/" to set “AUTOMATIC  
FINALIZE” to “YES” or “NO” in  
case you are dubbing to DVD.  
Then press SET/ENTER.  
• If you select “YES”, the Recorder will  
automatically finalize the disc. The  
finalized disc can be played back in  
other DVD players.  
• If any overwrite program is recorded while  
timer dubbing for an overwrite program is  
on standby, it may not be dubbed properly.  
• For details of finalizing, refer to page  
106.  
Dubbing Titles Recorded to HDD to  
Multiple DVDs  
101 Press \/| to select “OK” or  
“CANCEL”, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
• Operate Edit (page 88) to create Play List  
and dub Play List as a unit. (Example:  
Dubbing programs more than 6 hours long  
like a Christmas special in recording mode  
you set.) If the original is dubbed as is  
using a recording mode other than “EXACT  
DUBBING”, the title will be dubbed  
(moved) until the disc is full. (For a “Copy  
Once” enabled program, the dubbed part  
will be erased automatically from the HDD.)  
Take out the dubbed disc and load a new  
one to continue dubbing.  
2 Press SET/ENTER at the  
confirmation screen.  
• Timer Dubbing is set. If you select  
“DUB NOW” in step 7, dubbing starts  
immediately.  
To Stop Dubbing  
Press DUBBING  
• You can also stop dubbing by  
pressing ■STOP/LIVE or REC STOP.  
• In case you want to divide and dub a  
“Copy Once” enabled program to several  
discs, stop dubbing manually and reload  
the disc.  
NOTE  
• Message will display if timer recording and  
timer dubbing overlap. Cancel overlapping  
timer recording and set it again.  
• If you set “AUTOMATIC FINALIZE” to “YES”  
for timer dubbing from HDD to DVD,  
finalization may take anywhere from a few  
minutes to one hour extra after dubbing.  
• A title which is recorded as an overwrite  
program will always be shown at the end of  
the list.  
Front Panel Display during  
Dubbing  
• PLAY indicator of media of original source  
and REC indicator of media to dub light up  
during dubbing.  
• Front display panel shows dubbing  
movement in orange during dubbing.  
If there are more than one overwrite  
program, they will be shown in the order of  
timer recording. Note that even if you  
select “SORT” in the title name list, the  
display order will not change.  
Example: Dubbing a program from HDD to  
DVD.  
• When timer dubbing from DVD to HDD is  
set, taking out the disc will cancel the timer  
dubbing.  
Canceling Timer Dubbing  
• You can cancel timer dubbing by selecting  
“TIMER PROGRAM/CHECK” in START  
MENU (page 54).  
Dubbing indicator  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dubbing (HDD/DVD)  
10Press '/" to set “AUTOMATIC  
FINALIZE” to “YES” or “NO” in  
case you are dubbing to DVD.  
Then press SET/ENTER.  
Dubbing Titles Recorded  
as Favorite Program  
DVD-RW  
DVD-RW  
HDD  
DVD-R  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
11Press \/|to select “OK”, then  
press SET/ENTER, and then  
press SET/ENTER one more in  
confirmation screen.  
You can dub HDD recorded favorite pro-  
grams to DVD and keep in a safe place.  
Dubbing SERIAL Program  
1 Press FAVORITE PROG. LIST  
(under the cover).  
2 Press Green (C) (SERIAL PRO-  
GRAM).  
3 Press '/" to select program  
name to dub, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
FAVORITE PROGRAM  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
SERIAL PROGRAM  
SATs  
CH 8  
8:00 PM  
FINE  
–
9:00 PM  
PROGR. 1  
PROGR. 2  
MO – SA 10:00 PM  
CH 10  
FINE  
–
11:00 PM  
4 1 Press Green (C) (DUBBING).  
2 Press '/" to select title to  
dub, then press SET/ENTER.  
FAVORITE PROGRAM  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
NAME:PROGR.1  
SETTING:SATs 8:00 PM - 9:00 PM  
CH33 FINE  
BACK  
TITLE  
REC DATE  
TIME  
1
CH33 2004/10/ 2 PM 08:00 Sa  
CH33 2004/10/ 9 PM 08:00 Sa  
CH33 2004/10/16 PM 08:00 Sa  
CH33 2004/10/23 PM 08:00 Sa  
10/  
10/  
10/16 SAT  
10/23 SAT  
2
9
SAT  
SAT  
60MIN  
60MIN  
60MIN  
60MIN  
2
3
4
• You can select titles continuously.  
• The Recorder will dub in order of  
selection.  
5 Press Yellow (D) (NEXT STEP).  
6 Press '/" to select “HIGH  
SPEED DUBBING” or “RATE  
CONVERSION DUBBING”, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
• Refer to steps 4 and 7-10 on pages  
59 and 60 for details about operations  
in steps 7-10 below.  
7 Press '/" to select the record-  
ing mode (picture quality), then  
press SET/ENTER.  
• When you select High Speed  
Dubbing, you cannot select recording  
mode. Go to step 8.  
8 Press \/|to select “DUB NOW”  
or “TIMER DUBBING”, then press  
SET/ENTER.  
• If you have selected “DUB NOW”, go  
to step 11.  
9 1 Press '/" to input start time  
(hour), then press SET/ENTER  
.
2 Press '/" to input start time  
(minute), then press SET/  
ENTER.  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Eliminating problems (Recording, Timer Recording, Dubbing)  
When You Cannot Record  
Problem  
Suggested Solution  
• Load recordable DVD.  
• No disc in the Recorder.  
• Unrecordable disc is loaded.  
• Not enough disc capacity.  
• Recorder cannot identify the disc.  
• Load recordable DVD with enough capacity.  
• Disc is protected.  
• Cancel disc protection or change to new recordable DVD for  
recording.  
• Not enough HDD capacity.  
• In the middle of dubbing.  
• Erase recorded programs you don’t want from HDD to create  
necessary capacity to record.  
• You cannot record during dubbing. Stop dubbing before  
recording.  
When You Cannot Dub  
Problem  
Suggested Solution  
• Title protection is set to copy once  
enabled title (program).  
• You cannot dub Copy Once enabled title (program) that is  
title protected.  
• No disc in the Recorder.  
• Unrecordable disc is loaded.  
• Load recordable DVD.  
• Not enough disc capacity.  
• Load recordable DVD with enough capacity.  
• Cancel disc protection or change to new recordable DVD.  
• Recorder cannot identify the disc.  
• Disc is protected.  
• Not enough HDD capacity.  
• Erase recorded programs you don’t want from HDD to create  
necessary capacity to record.  
• In the middle of recording/playback.  
• You cannot dub during recording/playback.  
• Recorded “Copy Once” enabled title  
(program) to DVD.  
• “Copy Once” enabled title (program) or title with signal that  
prohibits copying recorded to DVD cannot be dubbed to  
HDD.  
When You Cannot High Speed Dub  
Problem  
Suggested Solution  
• No disc in the Recorder.  
• Unrecordable disc is loaded.  
• Load recordable DVD.  
• Not enough disc capacity.  
• Recorder cannot identify the disc.  
• Load recordable DVD with enough capacity.  
• Disc is protected.  
• Cancel disc protection or change to new recordable DVD.  
• Trying to high speed dub from HDD to  
DVD in Video mode.  
• You cannot high speed dub from HDD to DVD in Video mode  
if “HI SP DUB PRIORITY” was not set to “YES” when the  
original title was recorded to HDD.  
• Cannot High Speed Dub although  
“HIGH SPEED DUBBING” is selected.  
• Use 2X-speed compatible disc.  
• High speed dubbing of “Copy Once” enabled title will take  
longer than normal high speed dubbing.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Eliminating problems (Recording, Timer Recording, Dubbing)  
When You Cannot Timer Record  
Problem  
Suggested Solution  
• Load recordable DVD.  
• No disc in the Recorder.  
• Unrecordable disc is loaded.  
• Not enough disc capacity.  
• Recorder cannot identify the disc.  
• Load recordable DVD with enough capacity.  
• Disc is protected.  
• Cancel disc protection or change to new recordable DVD for  
recording.  
• Not enough HDD capacity.  
• Erase recorded programs you don’t want from HDD to create  
necessary capacity to record.  
• Number of timer programs set has  
reached the limit.  
• Erase unnecessary timer programs.  
• Dubbing recorded title.  
• Timer recording does not work during dubbing. Stop dub-  
bing before timer recording.  
• Playing back the DVD.  
• Stop playing back the DVD more than 3 minutes before timer  
recording starts. If you don’t stop playback until timer  
recording start time, timer recording will not start.  
• In the middle of direct recording.  
• Timer recording does not function during direct recording.  
Stop direct recording before the preset start time for timer  
recording.  
When You Cannot Timer Dub  
Problem  
Suggested Solution  
• In the middle of recording, timer  
recording, HDD playback, or disc  
playback.  
• Timer dubbing does not work during recording, timer record-  
ing, HDD playback, and disc playback. Stop recording, timer  
recording, HDD playback, and DVD playback before timer  
dubbing.  
• Title protection is set to “Copy Once”  
enabled title (program).  
• You cannot timer dub title protected “Copy Once” enabled  
title (program).  
• Recorded “Copy Once” enabled title  
(program) to DVD.  
• “Copy Once” enabled title (program) or title with signal that  
prohibits copying recorded to DVD cannot be timer dubbed  
to HDD.  
• No DVD in the Recorder.  
• Unrecordable disc is loaded.  
• Load recordable DVD.  
• Not enough disc capacity.  
• Load recordable DVD with enough capacity.  
• Cancel disc protection or change to new recordable DVD.  
• Recorder cannot identify the disc.  
• Disc is protected.  
• Playing back the DVD.  
• Stop playing back the disc more than 3 minutes before timer  
dubbing starts. If you don’t stop playback until timer dubbing  
start time, timer dubbing will not start.  
• In the middle of dubbing.  
• Timer dubbing does not work during dubbing.  
NOTE  
• If you set multiple timers, and the programmed times overlap, or the end time of the previous timer is the same as the start  
time of the next timer, timer recording will begin after the preceding timer recording finishes. There will be a delay of up to 1  
minute before the next timer recording begins.  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• If you press  
                                                                                                             
|
                                                                                                             
PLAY again, playback will  
                                                                                                 
|PLAY.  
                                                                                                 
Press  
                                                              
|
                                                              
PLAY to return to normal  
HDD Playback  
REC LIST: If you select the program you want  
NOTE  
to watch from the list of recorded programs  
(REC LIST) and press SET/ENTER, playback  
will begin.  
• The final few seconds may not be played  
back, depending on how the recording was  
stopped.  
• The end position of the program played  
back may be shifted slightly from the  
position where recording was stopped  
during recording.  
NOTE  
• To display the counter during playback,  
press ON SCREEN (page 33).  
To playback edited video:  
• When playing back video which has been  
edited (for example, by making a play list),  
use Seamless Playback for smoother  
connection between scenes.  
• For details on “SEAMLESS PLAYBACK”  
settings, see page 103.  
Resume playback function  
resume from the point where it was  
previously stopped.  
• To playback from the beginning, press  
■STOP/LIVE again and then press  
Inserting Chapter Marks  
during Playback  
Playback  
HDD  
• You can insert chapter marks by pressing  
CHAPTER MARK (under the cover).  
Chapter marks are inserted after the  
message “RECORDED CHAPTER MARK.”  
appears.  
• You cannot insert chapter marks during  
Simultaneous Recording/Playback.  
1 Press HDD to select HDD mode.  
• The HDD button on the front of the  
Recorder lights up.  
• HDD mode is selected automatically  
when the power is turned on.  
SWITCHED TO HDD MODE.  
NOTE  
• To playback a play list created by editing,  
press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST.  
Each time this button is pressed, the  
setting will toggle between “ORIGINAL”  
(original titles) and “PLAY LIST”.  
2 Press |PLAY.  
• PLAY indicator (for HDD) on the front  
of Recorder is lit green during  
playback.  
• To fast forward or fast reverse: Press  
JFWD or GREV during playback.  
HDD  
OR  
I
G
I
N
AL  
F I NE  
REMAIN18h59  
m
1
4
0
/
/
0
3 8  
6
:
2 0  
:
0 0  
Each time these buttons are pressed,  
the speed cycles through the  
following settings:  
playback.  
(Approx. 8g) (Approx. 32g)  
(Approx. 2g)  
3 Press ■STOP/LIVE to stop  
playback.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Press  
                                                                                                          
\
                                                                                                          
/
                                                                                                             
|
                                                                                                             
to select “FROM NEW”,  
                                                     
"
                                                     
TITLE LIST  
REC LIST(HDD ORIGINAL)  
Thumbnail screen: Press  
                                                                               
'
                                                                               
/
                                                                                  
"
'
                                                                                  
to  
Title Name List screen: Press  
                                                                                   
                                                                                   
/
                                                                                       
"
                                                                                       
to  
HDD Playback  
About REC LIST  
Playback from REC LIST  
When the REC LIST is displayed, you can use  
the following functions by pressing Blue (A)  
or Red (B) on the remote control.  
HDD  
1 Press HDD to select HDD mode.  
• The HDD button on the front of the  
Recorder lights up.  
• Switch between Thumbnail screen and Title  
Name List screen by pressing Blue (A).  
• When Thumbnail screen is selected, switch  
between Title List and Chapter List by  
pressing Red (B).  
Chapters in selected title will be displayed  
in Chapter List.  
• Sort the Title List in the “From New”, “From  
Old” or “Title Name (alphabetical)” order.  
1 Press Red (B).  
• HDD mode is selected automatically  
when the power is turned on.  
2 Press REC LIST to display REC  
LIST (THUMBNAIL).  
• The REC LIST can also be displayed  
from the START MENU (see page 29).  
• To switch between Original Title List  
and Play List, press ORIGINAL/PLAY  
LIST. Each time the button is  
“FROM OLD” or “TITLE NAME”, then  
pressed, “ORIGINAL” (original titles)  
or “PLAY LIST” is selected in turn.  
press SET/ENTER.  
ORIGINAL PLAY LIST  
Icons Displayed in Title Info  
Field of REC LIST  
REC LIST(HDD: ORIGINAL)  
TITLE: CH 33 FINE  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
NEW TITLE  
TITLE INFO: 10/ 2 SAT 8:00 PM – 9:00 PM  
Displays HDD only.  
(Will not display in case you playback,  
edit, or set Title Protection.)  
1
2
3
TITLE PROTECTION  
(HDD, DVD-RW [VR mode] only)  
4
5
6
OVERWRITTEN PROGRAM  
(HDD only)  
• If you press Blue (A) (TITLE LIST),  
SERIAL PROGRAM  
(HDD only)  
you can switch to title list.  
“Copy Once” enabled Program  
(Copy Restricted) (HDD only)  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
TITLE: CH33 FINE  
HI SP DUB PRIORITY SETTING  
(HDD only)  
TITLE INFO: 10/ 2 SAT 8:00 PM – 9:00 PM  
BACK  
TITLE  
REC. DATE STR. TIME TIME  
1
CH33 FINE 2004/10/ 2 SAT  
CH33 FINE 2004/10/ 9 SAT  
CH33 FINE 2004/10/16 SAT  
CH33 FINE 2004/10/23 SAT  
CH33 FINE 2004/10/30 SAT  
CH33 FINE 2004/11/ 6 SAT  
FROM NEW  
P
P
P
P
P
P
10/  
10/  
2
9
SAT 8:00 PM 60MIN  
SAT 8:00 PM 60MIN  
2
3
4
5
6
10/16 SAT 8:00 PM 60MIN  
10/23 SAT 8:00 PM 60MIN  
10/30 SAT 8:00 PM 60MIN  
11/  
6
SAT 8:00 PM 60MIN  
7/ 15  
NEXT  
n
ENTER  
SELECT  
THUMBNAIL  
ENTER  
RETURN  
B
SORT  
FUNC. MENU  
• Press Blue (A) (THUMBNAIL) to  
switch from title list to thumbnail.  
3 Press '/ "/ \/ |to select the  
program you want to watch.  
switch pages.  
select a title name.  
4 Press SET/ENTER or |PLAY.  
• Playback begins.  
To Stop Playback  
Press ■STOP/LIVE.  
NOTE  
• A title which is recorded as an overwrite  
program will always be shown at the end of  
the list.  
If there are more than one overwrite  
program, they will be shown in the order of  
timer recording. Note that even if you select  
“SORT” in the title name list, the display  
order will not change.  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HDD Playback  
Playback by Selecting  
Viewing Favorite  
Title Number (Direct Playback)  
Programs  
HDD  
HDD  
You can start playback from the title you want  
to see.  
When you play back “Favorite Programs”  
recorded on HDD, follow the operations  
below.  
1 Press HDD to select HDD mode.  
• The HDD button on the front of the  
Recorder lights up.  
1 Press HDD to select HDD mode.  
• The HDD button on the front of the  
Recorder lights up.  
2 Press DIRECT while playback  
2 Press FAVORITE PROG. LIST  
stops or during playback.  
(under the cover).  
3 Press '/ "to select the title  
number you want to see, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
3 Press Green (C) to select  
“OVERWRITTEN PROGRAM” or  
“SERIAL PROGRAM”.  
Title number currently  
selected  
4 Press '/ "to select program  
you want to watch, then press  
SET/ENTER.  
1
/
38  
FAVORITE PROGRAM  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
OVERWRITTEN PROGRAM  
• Playback starts from the beginning of  
the selected title.  
SAT  
2:03 AM  
FINE  
6:20 AM  
FINE  
–
–
2:05 AM  
6:22 AM  
PROGR. 1  
PROGR. 2  
CH 1  
DAY  
CH 1  
NOTE  
PROGR.  
3
NOT REGISTERED  
• You can select the title number to play  
back by using Function Control screen  
(page 75).  
• When you select “OVERWRITTEN  
PROGRAM”, playback of selected  
program starts.  
5 Press '/ "/\/|to select the  
title you want to watch, then press  
SET/ENTER.  
• Playback of “SERIAL PROGRAM”  
selected in Thumbnail starts.  
NOTE  
• Refer to pages 49 and 53 about the details  
of register and recording of Favorite  
Programs.  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HDD Playback  
Still Picture Playback/  
Frame Advance Playback  
Other Types of Playback  
HDD  
This feature enables still playback and frame  
advance playback.  
• This section explains other types of HDD  
playback operations.  
F
1 Press STILL/PAUSE during  
Fast Forward/Reverse  
(Search)  
Use to fast forward/reverse programs being  
played.  
playback.  
• Playback pauses.  
• PLAY indicator (for HDD) on the front  
of Recorder blinks during Still Picture  
Playback.  
1 Press JFWD or GREV during  
playback.  
2 Press Lor Kto advance or  
reverse playback image frame by  
frame.  
Example: When JFWD is pressed  
• The search speed will cycle as  
follows each time you press the  
button.  
• Press Lto advance one frame.  
Press Kto reverse one frame.  
3 Press |PLAY to return to normal  
playback.  
(Approx. 8g) (Approx. 32g)  
(Approx. 2g)  
Skip Search  
This lets you skip about 30 seconds ahead.  
This is convenient when you want to skip  
commercials while viewing.  
2 Press |PLAY to cancel the  
search.  
• Search will be canceled and play-  
back screen is displayed.  
Press SKIP SEARCH during play-  
back.  
• You cannot fast forward or fast  
reverse from one title and continue to  
another title.  
• When you fast forward or fast reverse  
to the end or beginning of the title,  
normal playback screen is displayed  
automatically.  
• You can skip approximately 30 seconds  
forward each time you press the button.  
• The maximum interval you can skip at one  
time is 120 seconds (4 button presses).  
• Skip Search will not work during Time Shift  
Viewing.  
Replay  
Skipping to Next Chapter  
This lets you skip about 10 seconds back.  
This is convenient for replaying a short scene  
you missed.  
You can skip the chapter using this function.  
Press Kor Lduring playback.  
• Press Lto go to the start of the next  
chapter.  
• Press Konce to return to the start of  
current chapter (track). If you press it again  
(within about 5 seconds), it will skip to the  
beginning of the previous chapter (track).  
• This function does not work during Time  
Shift Viewing.  
Press REPLAY during playback.  
• Playback reverses approximately 10  
seconds, then starts again.  
• Replay will not work during Time Shift  
Viewing.  
Slow Playback  
This lets you play back video at slow speed.  
1 Press SLOW during playback.  
• The slow playback speed will cycle  
as follows each time you press the  
button.  
1
/
8g) (Approx. 1/16g)  
1
(Approx.  
2g)  
(Approx.  
/
2 Press |PLAY to return to normal  
playback.  
• You cannot perform slow playback  
over a boundary between titles. At  
the end of the title, slow playback will  
be canceled and normal playback  
will be selected automatically.  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• You can move the enlarged part with  
                                                                                     
'
                                                                                      
/
                                                   
"
                                                   
/
                                                      
\
                                                      
/
                                                         
|.  
                                                         
HDD Playback  
4 Press SET/ENTER.  
Example: Repeat playback of a title  
(TITLE)  
Switching Audio  
You can change the audio output channel  
during HDD playback.  
Each time AUDIO is pressed, the  
audio channels change.  
TITLE REPEAT  
• The way audio channels change differs  
depending on the sound recorded on HDD.  
See the table of SAP on page 99 for details.  
5 Press  
(INPUT) to return to  
normal playback.  
NOTE  
• When you play a program recorded in dual  
mono, and if you are listening to the Dolby  
Digital sound via the digital output jack,  
you cannot select the audio channel. Set  
“DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT” to “PCM” (see  
page 102, or if you want to change the  
audio channel, listen via the analog output  
jacks.  
A-B Repeat Playback  
(Repeat Playback of a  
Specified Part)  
1 Press  
(INPUT) during  
playback.  
2 Press \/|to select “A-B”, then  
Zoom  
press SET/ENTER.  
You can magnify your favorite section.  
3 Press SET/ENTER when you  
reach the scene you want to start  
Repeat Playback.  
Press  
ZOOM during playback.  
ZOOM: 1  
• The start point of the part (A) will be  
memorized.  
• Each time you press this button, the zoom  
setting cycles in the following sequence:  
ZOOM: 1 (approx. 1.2✕) → ZOOM: 2  
(approx. 1.5✕) → ZOOM: 3 (approx. 2.0✕)  
→ OFF: (No display).  
SELECT TYPE OF REPEAT PLAYBACK.  
TITLE  
CHAPTER  
A-B  
SET START PT  
ENTER  
SET REPEAT START POINT  
4 Press SET/ENTER when you  
reach the scene you want to end  
Repeat Playback.  
• Zoom will not work during Time Shift  
Viewing.  
To return to the normal screen, press  
ZOOM a few times and cancel Zoom mode.  
• The end point of the part (B) will be  
memorized and the Repeat Playback  
for the specified part (A-B) starts.  
Repeat Playback of a Title  
or Chapter (Repeat Play-  
back)  
5 Press  
(INPUT) to return to  
normal playback.  
NOTE  
1 Play back the title or chapter you  
• For A-B Repeat Playback, set the start and  
end points within the same title.  
want to repeat.  
2 Press  
(INPUT).  
3 Press \/|to select the type of  
Repeat Playback.  
• TITLE: Repeats the title currently  
playing back.  
• CHAPTER: Repeats the chapter  
currently playing back.  
• A-B: Repeats the specified scene of  
title or chapter.  
SELECT TYPE OF REPEAT PLAYBACK.  
TITLE  
CHAPTER  
A-B  
ENTER  
\| SELECT  
ENTER  
• Press RETURN to cancel without  
setting the type of Repeat Playback.  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVD/CD Playback  
This section explains playback of DVD-R/RW  
discs recorded with this Recorder, commer-  
cially available DVD Video discs (like movies)  
and CDs.  
4 Press '/"/ \/|to select the  
title (or chapter) you wish to view.  
REC LIST(DVD ORIGINAL)  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
TITLE: CH33 FINE  
• To playback a DVD-R/RW recorded with  
this Recorder, select the title to be played  
back, and then start playback.  
TITLE INFO: 10/11 MON 4:00 PM – 4:10 PM  
1
2
3
• Display the list of initial images (thumb-  
nails) for each title, and select a title. (REC  
LIST)  
4
5
6
5 Press SET/ENTER.  
Loading Disc  
• Playback will begin from the selected  
title (chapter).  
1 Press POWER to turn the power  
• PLAY indicator (for DVD) on the front  
of Recorder is lit green during  
playback.  
on.  
2 Press OPEN/CLOSE to open the  
disc tray.  
6 To stop playback, press ■STOP/  
OPEN/CLOSE  
LIVE.  
To Record a Chapter Mark  
during Playback  
DVD  
Press CHAPTER MARK (under the  
cover).  
3 Load a disc on the disc tray.  
• The message “RECORDED CHAPTER  
MARK.” is displayed, and the chapter mark  
is recorded.  
• Chapter marks can be set during playback  
only with DVD-RW (VR mode).  
• Chapter marks cannot be set manually for  
DVD-RW (Video mode), DVD-R or during  
Simultaneous Recording/Playback.  
• Insert the disc with the label face up.  
• In case of disc recorded on both  
sides, face the side you want to view  
down.  
NOTE  
• If a title was set with another DVD recorder,  
and it contains characters which cannot be  
4 Press OPEN/CLOSE to close the  
....  
displayed with this Recorder, then “  
”
****  
disc tray.  
is displayed (up to 64 characters max.).  
• If you play back a play list on a disc  
recorded with another DVD recorder and 1  
title is 12 hours or more in length, only 12  
hours of that title will be played back.  
DVD-R/RW Playback  
DVD-RW  
DVD-RW  
DVD-R  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
Playback by Selecting Title  
1 Press DVD to select DVD mode.  
• The DVD button on the front of the  
Recorder lights up.  
• To play back a disc recorded and finalized  
in Video mode, press DVD TITLE, display  
the “TITLE MENU” screen, and select a title  
to play back.  
• HDD mode is selected automatically  
when the power is turned on.  
DVD-RW  
VIDEO MODE  
DVD-R  
1 Press DVD to select DVD mode.  
• The DVD button on the front of the  
Recorder lights up.  
SWITCHED TO DVD/CD MODE.  
• HDD mode is selected automatically  
when the power is turned on.  
2 Load the disc you want to play  
2 Load a disc recorded in Video  
back.  
mode.  
3 Press REC LIST to display the  
REC LIST (thumbnail) screen.  
• See page 65 for details on how to use  
the REC LIST.  
3 Press DVD TITLE.  
• The “TITLE MENU” screen is  
displayed.  
• If the loaded disc has a play list and  
you press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST, the  
screen will switch to the play list  
(page 80).  
Continued on Next Page |||  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• If you press  
                                                              
|
                                                              
PLAY next, playback will  
pressing  
                                                                                                               
'
                                                                                                               
/
                                                                                                                  
"
                                                                                                                  
.
pressing ■STOP/LIVE then press  
                                                                                   
|
                                                                                   
PLAY.  
If you press  
                                                                                                          
|PLAY after you load a disc, the  
                                                                                                           
■STOP/LIVE twice and then press  
to display the menu.  
                                                                                                                                  
|PLAY  
                                                                                                                                  
DVD/CD Playback  
4 Press '/" to select the title.  
Audio CD/Video CD Playback  
5 Press SET/ENTER.  
• Playback of the selected title will  
begin.  
VIDEO CD  
AUDIO CD  
Preparation  
Press DVD and load a disc.  
• The DVD button on the front of the  
Recorder lights up.  
6 To stop playback, press ■STOP/  
LIVE.  
NOTE  
• If a disc recorded in Video mode has been  
finalized (pages 15, 106), a menu screen  
will be created automatically to enable  
playback with other DVD players. For that  
reason, the menu screen is different before  
and after finalization.  
Playback from the beginning  
1 Press |PLAY.  
• Playback begins from the first track.  
2 To stop playback, press ■STOP/  
• If a title was set with another DVD recorder,  
and it contains characters which cannot be  
LIVE.  
....  
displayed with this Recorder, then “  
”
****  
Playback by selecting the  
track  
is displayed (up to 64 characters max.).  
If there is a timer program which is set to  
record on DVD:  
1 1 Press DIRECT.  
2 Select the track number to be  
played back using the Number  
buttons, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
• A message to that effect will be displayed 5  
minutes prior to the start of the timer  
recording. If that happens, stop DVD  
playback and load the disc for recording.  
• The timer recording will be canceled at the  
start time of the timer recording if DVD  
playback is still in progress.  
• Playback starts from the selected  
track.  
Example: To select the 12th song  
(track), press 1, then 2.  
Resume playback function  
• You can also select the track by  
resume from the point where it stopped the  
previous time. To playback from the  
beginning, cancel resume mode by  
• DIRECT does not work when playing  
back a video CD with PBC on.  
2 To stop playback, press ■STOP/  
LIVE.  
(Resume playback will be canceled when  
you open the disc tray, turn the power off,  
or switch to HDD.)  
Video CD (with PBC)  
Playback  
• Some video CD discs have Playback  
Control (PBC) function which guides the  
playback by the menu displayed.  
• Resume playback function does not work  
during video CD playback.  
DVD Video Playback  
DVD VIDEO  
Video CD (with PBC)  
1 Press DVD and load a disc.  
• The DVD button on the front of the  
Recorder lights up.  
menu displays. The functions of button  
changes in the following manner during the  
playback operation using the menu.  
• Lbecomes the “NEXT” button.  
• Kbecomes the “PREVIOUS” button.  
Select the track number to be played back  
from the menu using the Number buttons and  
play back the track.  
• Playback may begin automatically,  
depending on the disc.  
2 Press |PLAY.  
• Playback begins from the first title.  
• The menu may be displayed first,  
depending on the disc. Perform  
playback operation by following the  
directions on the screen.  
Example: To select the 5th track, press 0,  
then 5.  
(Operation method may differ depending on  
the disc. Refer to the manual of the video  
CD.)  
Turning off PBC function when playing  
back a PBC compatible video CD  
Playback begins from track 1 when JFWD  
is pressed before the menu is displayed after  
you load a disc. Playback will follow the track  
order like an audio CD.  
• To stop playback, press ■STOP/  
LIVE.  
* If you want to turn the PBC to “ON” when  
playing back the CD with PBC off, press  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVD/CD Playback  
Playback by Selecting a  
Title (Track) Number (Direct  
Playback)  
Press DIRECT, then select title (track) number  
to play back. See page 66 for details.  
Other Types of Playback  
DVD-RW  
DVD-RW  
DVD-R  
DVD VIDEO  
VIDEO CD  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
AUDIO CD  
• This section explains other types of DVD  
playback operations.  
Repeat Playback of a Title  
or Chapter (Repeat Play-  
back)  
Fast Forward/Reverse  
(Search)  
Fast Forward/Reverse functions when  
JFWD or GREV is pressed during  
playback.  
1 Play back the title or chapter you  
want to repeat.  
Example: When JFWD is pressed  
• The search speed will cycle as follows  
each time you press the button.  
When playing back a DVD  
2 Press  
(INPUT).  
3 Press \/|to select the type of  
Repeat Playback.  
• TITLE: Repeats the title currently  
playing back.  
(Approx. 8g) (Approx. 32g)  
(Approx. 2g)  
• CHAPTER: Repeats the chapter  
currently playing back.  
• A-B: Repeats the specified scene of  
title or chapter.  
When playing back a video CD or audio  
CD  
(Approx. 8g)  
SELECT TYPE OF REPEAT PLAYBACK.  
(Approx. 2g)  
TITLE  
CHAPTER  
A-B  
ENTER  
\| SELECT  
ENTER  
Skipping to the Beginning  
of a Chapter (Track)  
Skipping (to the beginning of a chapter or  
track) functions when Lor Kis  
pressed during playback.  
• Press RETURN to cancel without  
setting the type of Repeat Playback.  
4 Press SET/ENTER.  
Example: Repeat playback of a title  
(TITLE)  
Slow Playback  
Slow Playback functions when SLOW is  
pressed during playback.  
TITLE REPEAT  
1
(Approx.  
/2g)  
/
8g) (Approx. 1/16g)  
1
(Approx.  
5 Press  
(INPUT) to return to  
normal playback.  
Still Picture Playback/  
Frame Advance Playback  
A-B Repeat Playback  
(Repeat Playback of a  
Specified Part)  
• Still Picture Playback functions when  
FSTILL/PAUSE is pressed during  
playback. (If you are playing back an audio  
CD, the CD will pause.)  
• Frame Advance/Reverse Playback  
functions when Lor Kis pressed  
during Still Picture Playback.  
• Frame Reverse Playback will not work  
with DVD-RW (Video mode), DVD-R,  
DVD Video and Video CD discs.  
• PLAY indicator (for DVD) on the front of  
Recorder blinks during Still Picture  
Playback.  
1 Press  
(INPUT) during  
playback.  
2 Press \/|to select “A-B”, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
3 Press SET/ENTER when you  
reach the scene you want to start  
Repeat Playback.  
• The start point of the part (A) will be  
memorized.  
Skip Search  
Playback skips 30 seconds ahead when  
SKIP SEARCH is pressed during playback.  
SELECT TYPE OF REPEAT PLAYBACK.  
TITLE  
CHAPTER  
A-B  
SET START PT  
ENTER  
SET REPEAT START POINT  
Replay  
Playback reverses 10 seconds when  
REPLAY is pressed during playback.  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• To hide the subtitles, press  
                                                                                                                                
\
                                                                                                                                
/
                                                                                                                                   
|
                                                                                                                                   
a
pressing SUBTITLE or  
                                                                                                                            
'
                                                                                                                            
/
                                                                                                                                
"
                                                                                                                                
.
• You can move the enlarged part with  
                                                                                                                                    
'
                                                                                                                                    
/
                                                                                                 
"
                                                                                                 
/
                                                                                                     
\
                                                                                                     
/
                                                                                                       
|
                                                                                                        
.
pressing  
                                                                                                          
'
                                                                                                          
/
                                                                                                             
"
                                                                                                             
.
DVD/CD Playback  
4 Press SET/ENTER when you  
2 Press '/" to select the subtitles  
you want to see.  
reach the scene you want to end  
Repeat Playback.  
• You can select by pressing SUB-  
TITLE.  
• The end point of the part (B) will be  
memorized and the Repeat Playback  
for the specified part (A-B) starts.  
• The display indicates the subtitle  
number currently being played back,  
and the subtitles appear.  
5 Press  
(INPUT) to return to  
normal playback.  
few times and select “OFF”.  
You can also select “OFF” by  
Function Control  
Zoom  
You can do things like specify a title or  
chapter, and adjust settings for video and  
audio if you press FUNCTION (under the  
cover) during playback. (For details see page  
You can magnify your favorite section by  
pressing ZOOM during playback.  
• Each time you press this button, the zoom  
setting cycles in the following sequence:  
ZOOM: 1 (approx. 1.2✕)→ZOOM: 2  
(approx. 1.5✕)→ZOOM: 3 (approx.  
2.0✕)→OFF (No display)  
75.)  
Switching Audio  
You can change the audio output channel  
using the AUDIO button (under the cover).  
Each time AUDIO is pressed, the  
audio channels change as follows:  
ZOOM: 1  
VIDEO CD  
AUDIO CD  
L+R  
L
R
Switching Angle  
DVD VIDEO  
DVD VIDEO  
The sound number which is currently played  
back will be displayed.  
If multiple angles are recorded, you can  
switch between them.  
DVD-RW  
DVD-RW  
VIDEO MODE  
DVD-R  
VR MODE  
Press ANGLE (under the cover)  
during playback.  
The sound you can select varies depending  
on the sound recorded on the disc. (page 99)  
• When recording SAP broadcast or stereo,  
the way audio channel changes may differ  
depending on the recorded sound. See the  
table of SAP on page 99 for details.  
• The display indicates the angle number  
currently being played back. Each time you  
press this button, the angle switches.  
• The angle can also be switched by  
• “✕✕” is displayed if a disc is recorded with  
NOTE  
only one angle.  
•
When you play a program recorded in dual  
mono, and if you are listening to the Dolby  
Digital sound via the digital output jack, you  
cannot select the audio channel. Set  
“DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT” to “PCM” (see  
page 102), or if you want to change the  
audio channel, listen via the analog output  
jacks.  
1
To return to the previous angle, press ANGLE  
(under the cover) a few times to select the  
original angle.  
Switching Subtitles  
DVD VIDEO  
NOTE  
• The following operations will not work when  
playing back an audio CD:  
Replay, Slow Playback, Frame Advance/  
Reverse  
Display of functions  
If subtitles are provided in multiple lan-  
guages, you can switch between them.  
• The display for subtitle, angle or audio  
automatically disappears after 10 seconds.  
The display can also be hidden by  
pressing SET/ENTER.  
Switching between functions  
• You can switch subtitle, angle and audio at  
the Function Control screen (page 75).  
• Operation for each function varies depend-  
ing on the disc. See the manual for the  
disc.  
1 Press SUBTITLE (under the  
cover) during playback.  
• The display indicates the subtitle  
number currently being played back,  
and the subtitles appear.  
• “✕✕” is displayed if a disc has no  
subtitles.  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVD Playback  
Fast Forward/Reverse  
2 Press '/"/ \/|to select the  
title, then press SET/ENTER.  
• The selected title is played back.  
• You cannot perform Fast Forward/Fast  
Reverse over a boundary between titles.  
At the end or beginning of the title, Fast  
Forward/Fast Reverse will be canceled and  
normal playback will be selected  
automatically.  
• Audio is not played back during Fast  
Forward and Fast Reverse.  
• Subtitles are not played back with DVD  
video discs and video CDs during Fast  
Forward and Fast Reverse.  
• Depending on the disc and the scene  
being played back, the Recorder may not  
operate at the speed listed in this manual  
when performing Fast Forward.  
Slow Playback  
• You cannot perform Slow Playback over a  
boundary between titles. At the end of the  
title, Slow Playback will be canceled and  
normal playback will be selected  
automatically.  
NOTE  
• The procedure explained on this page is  
the basic operation procedure. Procedures  
vary depending on the DVD video disc, so  
operate by following the instructions in the  
DVD video disc manual, or the instructions  
displayed on the screen.  
• A title menu is not displayed for a DVD-R/  
RW (Video mode) if it has not been  
finalized.  
Title menu  
• With some DVD discs, the title menu may  
be explained using the name “Top Menu”.  
For the button explained as the top menu  
key, use DVD TITLE on the remote control.  
• If no title menu is available, the title menu  
will not display even if DVD TITLE is  
pressed.  
Still Picture Playback/Frame Advance  
Playback  
• The image may shift when using Frame  
Reverse operation with a disc (like a DVD  
video disc) other than a DVD-RW (VR  
mode).  
Using the Disc Menu  
Example: Select “SUBTITLE LANGUAGE”.  
1 Press DVD MENU.  
• The disc menu screen is displayed.  
Repeat Playback  
• Repeat Playback will not work during PBC  
playback of a video CD with PBC (Play-  
back Control).  
2 Press '/" to select “SUBTITLE  
LANGUAGE”.  
• Repeat Playback may be forbidden  
depending on the disc.  
MENU  
• A-B Repeat Playback may not work in  
multi-angle scenes.  
• For A-B Repeat Playback, set the start and  
end points within the same title.  
1
2
3
AUDIO LANGUAGE  
SUBTITLE LANGUAGE  
AUDIO  
Playback by Selecting  
with the Menu in the DVD  
3 Press SET/ENTER.  
• Screen to select subtitle language is  
displayed.  
DVD-RW  
DVD-R  
DVD VIDEO  
VIDEO MODE  
• This section explains how to play back a  
DVD video disc with a top menu or disc  
menu.  
4 Press '/" to select the subtitle  
language.  
• Titles listed in the title menu, and a disc  
guide (for options like subtitles and audio  
languages) are given in the disc menu.  
SUBTITLE LANGUAGE  
1
2
3
English  
Español  
Français  
Playback by Selecting a  
Title from the Title Menu  
1 Press DVD TITLE.  
• The title menu screen is displayed.  
5 Press SET/ENTER.  
T I T L E M E N U  
1
3
2
4
Jazz  
Latin  
Rock  
Classic  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MP3 File Playback  
CD-R  
MP3  
CD-RW  
MP3  
To Play Another File  
(music title) during  
Playback  
NOTE  
• When the DV input is selected, discs  
cannot be played back if “DV LINK” is set  
to “ON”. You can enjoy other sounds by  
switching to other channels.  
• See page 12 for details about the MP3 file  
format.  
1 Press ■STOP/LIVE to stop  
playback.  
2 Press '/"/ \/|to select the file  
1 Press DVD to select DVD mode.  
(music title) you want to play, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
2 Load an MP3 recorded CD-R or  
the CD-RW, then press DVD  
MENU.  
• The chosen file (music title) will be  
played.  
CD MP3  
To Skip the File during  
Playback  
1
4
1
3
WOLF  
2
4
SHARK  
TRISH  
1
1
ANGEL  
1
Press SKIP  
or  
SKIP.  
• Press SKIP  
to skip forward.  
• Press  
SKIP to skip backward.  
While the MP3 disc is playing  
3 Press '/"/\/|to select the  
folder you want to play, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
• Time Search is disabled.  
• Programmed Playback is disabled.  
• It is possible to repeat one track by  
• The file (music title) in the folder is  
displayed on the file selection screen.  
pressing  
(INPUT).  
• Dolby Virtual Surround does not operate.  
CD MP3  
1:15  
--:--:--  
WOLF  
1
3
5
7
9
YOUNG  
MAIN  
2
4
6
8
ANDREW  
BAY  
BARDEN  
BEACHES  
YORK  
QUEEN  
VICTORIA  
10 KING  
• Press RETURN to return to the folder  
selection screen.  
• If you press |PLAY after selecting  
the folder, the playback screen is  
displayed, and the files in that folder  
will be played from the beginning  
repeatedly.  
4 Press '/"/\/|to select the file  
(music title) you want to play and  
then press SET/ENTER.  
• Playback will start from the selected  
file (music title).  
CD MP3  
1: 15  
00:00 :11  
WOLF  
1
3
5
7
9
YOUNG  
MAIN  
2
4
6
8
ANDREW  
BAY  
BARDEN  
BEACHES  
YORK  
QUEEN  
VICTORIA  
10 KING  
5 Press ■STOP/LIVE to stop  
playback.  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Settings During Playback  
Function Control Operation  
Procedure  
Function Control  
DVD-RW  
DVD-RW  
HDD  
DVD-R  
DVD VIDEO  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
This lets you make various settings at once,  
like subtitle and angle setting, and title  
selection for Direct Playback.  
Depending on your preferences, you can  
adjust video and enjoy audio with a greater  
sense of presence. Operation is the same for  
HDD and DVD.  
1 Press FUNCTION (under the  
cover) during playback.  
• The Function Control screen is  
displayed on the TV.  
DVD VIDEO  
VIDEO  
1
5
0
/
/
0
3
2
:
5
0
0
.
:
0
c
0
h
Function Control screen  
2 ENGLISH  
1
1
DVD VIDEO  
VIDEO  
5
1
1
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
1
5
0
/
/
0
3
2
:
5
0
0
.
:
0
c
0
h
2 ENGLISH  
1
1
BIT RATE  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
0
5
10  
n
RETURN  
2
Mbps  
5
1
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
2 Press '/" to select setting  
items, then press SET/ENTER.  
• For a description of each setting item,  
see “Functions which can be set”  
(page 76).  
BIT RATE  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
0
5
10  
n
RETURN  
Mbps  
3
4
DVD VIDEO  
VIDEO  
1 Playback status display  
Shows the operation status and the drive or  
disc type.  
1
5
0
/
/
0
3
2
:
5
0
0
.
:
0
c
0
h
2 ENGLISH  
1
1
5
1
2 Setting items  
Selects a title or chapter for playback, or  
performs video/audio settings.  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
BIT RATE  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
0
5
10  
n
RETURN  
Mbps  
3 Operation guide display  
Provides help on how to operate with the  
remote control buttons.  
3 Press '/"/\/|to set, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
• Operation may vary depending on  
the setting item. Operate by following  
the operation guide instructions on  
the screen.  
4 Bit rate display  
Displays the data rate of the video appearing  
on the TV screen.  
4 Press RETURN or FUNCTION  
(under the cover) to close the  
Function Control screen.  
NOTE  
• If “✕✕” is displayed for an option like title  
number or subtitles, the disc has no titles  
or subtitles which can be selected.  
• When you press DIRECT or SUBTITLE, the  
Function Control screen is closed.  
• If you set to the Function Control screen  
during playback of a DVD video, it may be  
impossible to operate according to the  
instructions from the DVD video. In cases  
like this, operate again after canceling the  
Function Control screen.  
Continued on Next Page |||  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Press  
                                                                                            
'
                                                                                            
/
                                                                                               
"
                                                                                               
to select “ON” or “OFF”, then press  
                                                                                                                                   
\
                                                                                                                                   
/
                                                                                                                                      
|
                                                                                                                                      
• Press  
                               
\
                               
/
                                  
|
                                  
to move to the field of Hour, Minute,  
to set the time. Press SET/  
Second, then press  
                                            
'
                                            
/
                                                
"
                                                
• Press  
                               
'
                               
/
                                   
"
                                   
to select “ON” or “OFF”, then press  
                                                                      
\
                                                                       
/
                                                                         
|
                                                                         
detailed pictures), press  
                                                 
|
                                                 
while “ON” is displayed for  
picture by pressing  
                                            
\
                                            
while “ON” is displayed for  
Settings During Playback  
Functions which can be set  
Title Number (Direct Title Skip)  
Digital Gamma  
• Shows the title number being played back. You can  
skip to the start of the title.  
• If a video is dark and hard to see, you can brighten the  
dark parts for easier viewing by setting Digital Gamma.  
Set this when watching discs with many dark scenes  
(i.e. movie and concert discs), and when viewing a  
disc in a bright room. This lets you see dark parts  
better and enjoy video with a greater sense of depth.  
Chapter Number (Direct Chapter Skip)  
• Shows the chapter number being played back. You  
can skip to the start of the chapter.  
to set the level. Then press SET/ENTER.  
• Digital Gamma can be set to three different levels.  
Playback Elapsed Time (Direct Time  
Skip)  
• Shows the elapsed time from the beginning of the disc  
to the present.  
This lets you skip based on time.  
Dolby Virtual Surround  
• Lets you enjoy surround audio via analog connection  
with a stereo type (2ch) TV or audio equipment.  
• Even if you use a digital connection, Dolby Virtual  
Surround will work in the following cases.  
– When playing back linear PCM audio from a DVD.  
– When playing back Dolby Digital audio while  
“DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT” (page 102) is set to  
“PCM”.  
ENTER to start playback from that set time.  
• This Recorder uses a Spatializer System* for Dolby  
Digital Surround.  
Subtitle Language  
* Certain audio features of this product manufactured  
under a license from Desper Products, Inc.  
Spatializer® N-2-2™ and the circle-in-square device  
are trademarks owned by Desper Products, Inc.  
• If audio recorded monaurally is played back with  
Dolby Virtual Surround ON, the audio level may  
decrease, making it hard to hear. If this happens, turn  
Dolby Virtual Surround OFF.  
• Shows the currently selected subtitle language.  
If subtitles are provided in other languages, you can  
switch to your preferred language.  
Angle Number  
• Shows the currently selected angle number.  
If the video is recorded with multiple angles, you can  
switch the angle.  
• Dolby Virtual Surround will not work in the following  
cases:  
– While watching a TV broadcast or external input.  
– Multi-karaoke audio from a karaoke disc, 96 kHz 24-  
bit linear PCM audio, or DTS audio.  
• If you set Dolby Virtual Surround to “ON” and audio  
sounds abnormal during playback, set it to “OFF”.  
• There are no level settings.  
Audio  
• Shows the currently selected type of audio.  
You can select the desired type of audio.  
NOTE  
Digital Super Picture  
• These functions cannot be used with all discs.  
• Emphasizes and enhances definition of details and  
contours in the video. This reduces noise and makes  
video easier to see.  
to set the level. Then press SET/ENTER.  
• There is one setting level on the “soft” side and 3  
setting levels on the “sharp” side.  
• If you want to enjoy a more defined picture (with  
Digital Super Picture. For old movies or videos with a  
lot of noise, you can reduce noise for an easier to see  
Digital Super Picture.  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Press  
                                                              
|
                                                              
PLAY to return to the normal  
Simultaneous Recording/Playback Function  
DVD-RW  
VR MODE  
DVD-RW  
VIDEO MODE  
HDD  
DVD-R  
DVD VIDEO  
Playing Back a Title on  
the HDD during DVD  
Recording (Simultaneous  
Recording/Playback)  
VIDEO CD  
AUDIO CD  
Plays back from HDD, DVD or CD while  
recording a program onto HDD.  
Viewing the Program  
Being Recorded from the  
Beginning while  
1 Press HDD during DVD recording.  
• The HDD button on the front of the  
Recorder lights up.  
2 Play back the title in the HDD.  
Recording to HDD  
(Chasing Playback)  
Viewing Another Program  
Recorded on HDD while  
Recording to HDD  
1 Press |PLAY during recording.  
• The program being recorded will play  
back from the beginning.  
(Simultaneous Recording/  
Playback)  
2 Press G REV or J FWD  
during Chasing Playback.  
• Each time you press the buttons, the  
Fast Reverse/Forward Playback  
speed changes as shown below.  
1 Press REC LIST during record-  
ing.  
• The “REC LIST” (list of recorded  
programs) is displayed.  
(Approx. 8g) (Approx. 32g)  
(Approx. 2g)  
2 Press '/"/\/|to select  
program you want to watch, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
Example: When J FWD is pressed  
once  
Fast Forward Playback 2✕ icon  
• For details on program list operation,  
see page 65.  
NOTE  
• Recording to HDD continues even while  
playing back another program on the HDD  
or a DVD/CD.  
• ■STOP/LIVE is the button for stopping  
playback. Recording will not stop. To stop  
recording, press REC STOP.  
• You cannot play back a DVD-R/RW while  
recording to that same DVD-R/RW.  
• You cannot start recording during playback  
from HDD, DVD or CD.  
playback speed.  
3 Press ■STOP/LIVE to return to  
the live broadcast which is being  
recorded.  
• Press REC STOP to watch normal  
playback.  
• For details on Chasing Playback, see  
pages 36 and 37.  
• During Simultaneous Record/Playback, the  
recording conditions may have an effect  
on playback, but recording will still be done  
correctly.  
DVD/CD Playback during  
HDD Recording  
(Simultaneous Recording/  
Playback)  
Checking the Program  
Being Recorded during  
Playback Using the Simul-  
taneous Recording/Play-  
back Function (Picture in  
1 Press DVD during HDD recording.  
• The DVD button on the front of the  
Recorder lights up.  
Picture)  
2 Load a DVD or CD, then press  
• Press P IN P on the remote control.  
A small picture is displayed on the  
playback screen, so you can check the  
program being recorded (or the program  
which is stopped).  
|PLAY.  
• You can watch/listen to a DVD/CD  
while continuing recording to HDD.  
• Picture in Picture will not work during  
Progressive Scanning Playback or audio  
CD playback.  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Menu  
How to Use the  
FUNCTION MENU  
HDD  
Allows you to call up “HI SP DUB PRIORITY”  
from REC LIST and cancel High Speed  
Dubbing Priority setting.  
• The FUNCTION MENU can be called up  
during HDD playback.  
1 Press REC LIST or select REC  
LIST in START MENU screen.  
• The REC LIST screen is displayed.  
2 Press '/"/ \/|to select the  
title you wish to cancel High  
Speed Dubbing Priority setting  
for.  
3 Press YELLOW (D).  
• The FUNCTION MENU is displayed  
with the cursor at “HI SP DUB  
PRIORITY”.  
4 Press SET/ENTER.  
5 Press \/|to select “YES”, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
• Select “NO” if you do not wish to  
cancel High Speed Dubbing Priority  
setting.  
REC LIST  
12/25 SAT 9:54 AM  
TITLE:CH33 FINE  
TITLE INFO:10/ MON 4:00 PM  
4
–
4:10 PM  
HI SP DUB PRIORITY  
CANCEL PRIORITY HIGH SPEED DUBBING  
FOR THIS TITLE? CANNOT SET AGAIN  
AFTER CANCELED.  
YES  
NO  
n
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
6 Press EXIT to quit FUNCTION  
MENU.  
NOTE  
• This feature cancels High Speed Dubbing  
Priority setting for the title recorded with “HI  
SP DUB PRIORITY” set to “YES”. When this  
is canceled, limitations during editing are  
relaxed, but the original state cannot be  
restored.  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing (HDD/DVD)  
About Editing  
Content that can be edited and editing operations vary  
according to the recording mode.  
Editing Procedure  
Basic procedure for editing an original title  
recorded in VR mode  
Load a disc.  
Recordings on HDD, or on DVD-RW in  
VR mode  
Select the title to be edited, and edit.  
You can do various types of editing with this Recorder alone.  
For example it is possible to create a compilation of your  
favorite videos by gathering your favorite scenes from  
recorded titles, moving scenes within a specified range, or  
erasing unnecessary scenes. You can edit original videos  
you have recorded into a Play List without changing the  
content of the original videos.  
• Erasing Unnecessary Scenes from an Original Title  
(ERASE SCENE) (page 81).  
• Inputting/Changing Title Name (CHANGE TITLE  
NAME) (page 83).  
• Changing Thumbnail (CHANGE THUMBNAIL) (page  
84).  
• Making Sections in a Title (DIVIDE CHAPTER) (page  
85).  
• Combining Chapters Together (COMBINE CHAPTERS)  
(page 86).  
• Disabling Title Edit and Erase (TITLE PROTECT) (page  
86).  
NOTE  
• If disc protection is set for a DVD-RW, it cannot be edited.  
ORIGINAL  
• A recorded video (title) in as is form is called an  
ORIGINAL. A single recording (from record start to stop)  
forms a single title.  
• Erasing All Titles (page 87).  
• Erasing by Selecting a Title (or Chapter) (page 87).  
PLAY LIST  
• A title created by editing based on originals is called a  
PLAY LIST. A play list can be remade any number of  
times.  
Basic procedure for editing titles recorded in VR  
mode after making a Play List  
Original  
Original  
Original  
Load a disc.  
Create a Play List.  
Play List  
1
• Creating from Original Titles (page 88).  
• Creating from Part of an Original (page 88).  
NOTE  
Select and edit the created Play List.  
• A Play List is a list which describes the playback se-  
quence of originals, and it does not actually copy the  
originals. This makes it possible to perform editing while  
using only a little disc space.  
• Erasing All Titles (page 87).  
• Erasing by Selecting a Title (or Chapter) (page 87).  
• Adding a Scene from an Original to a Play List (ADD  
SCENE) (page 89).  
Recordings on DVD-R/RW in Video  
mode  
• Changing the Title Sequence (MOVE TITLE) (page 91).  
• Erasing Unnecessary Scenes (ERASE SCENE) (page  
92).  
• Inputting/Changing Title Name (CHANGE TITLE  
NAME) (page 92).  
• Changing Thumbnail (CHANGE THUMBNAIL) (page  
92).  
The following content can be edited.  
• Input (change) title name (page 83)  
• Erase title (page 87)  
NOTE  
• Making Sections in a Title (DIVIDE CHAPTER) (page  
92).  
• Combining Chapters Together (COMBINE CHAPTERS)  
(page 92).  
• ERASE TITLE for a recording in Video mode will change  
settings so that the “erased” title cannot be seen in the  
“REC LIST”, but this does not mean that the video is  
actually erased. (Free time on the disc will not increase.  
With a DVD-RW recorded in Video mode, free time on the  
disc will increase when the title recorded last is erased.)  
• Editing is not possible if the disc has been finalized (page  
106). With a DVD-RW, editing is possible again if finaliza-  
tion is canceled.  
NOTE  
Editing cannot be done in the following cases.  
• Play Lists cannot be created for discs recorded in Video  
mode.  
• Play Lists cannot be created for recordings on DVD-R.  
• Finalized DVD-RWs (Video mode) cannot be edited.  
(Editing can be enabled by canceling finalization.)  
• A Play List cannot be created from original titles/chapters  
containing a “Copy Once” enabled program which is  
recorded on HDD.  
• Additional recording and editing can be done using only  
this Recorder until the disc is finalized.  
•
After setting timer dubbing (i.e. timer dubbing is on standby),  
you cannot erase or edit the program being dubbed.  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing (HDD/DVD)  
Edit Screen  
Switching between  
Original and Play List  
(Play Lists can be created only  
for HDD or VR mode)  
Title being  
edited  
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)  
TITLE: CH33 FINE  
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 8:09 PM – 8:14 PM  
ERASE SCENE  
CHANGE TITLE NAME  
CHANGE THUMBNAIL  
DIVIDE CHAPTER  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
Chapter  
being edited  
2
01  
00:00:02  
00  
Switching when the Re-  
SPECIFY ERASE  
RANGE  
Time being  
edited  
corder power is on  
ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST  
n
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST in the  
stopped state. Each time this button is  
pressed, the setting will toggle  
between ORIGINAL and PLAY LIST.  
Frame being  
edited  
• There is no frame display for titles recorded  
(dubbed) with high speed dubbing priority,  
or for titles recorded (dubbed) in Video  
mode.  
REMAIN 20h0m  
HDD  
OR  
REMAIN 20h0m  
DVD-RW  
VR OR  
F I NE REMAIN 1h0m  
I
G
I
N
AL  
I
G
I
N
AL  
F I NE  
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
/
/
0
1
1
:
Seamless Playback  
:
0
0
:
0
0
0
0
:
0
0
This enables smooth playback at the  
transitions between edited video scenes.  
(However, a shift of about one second may  
arise at the transitions, and part of the scene  
may not appear.) (Page 103)  
NOTE  
• If recording is done while switched to play  
list, the system will automatically switch  
back to original.  
Switching at the REC LIST  
• Set this function by selecting: “START  
MENU”→“OTHER SETTINGS” → “ADJUST-  
MENT” → “OPTION” → “SEAMLESS  
PLAYBACK”.  
ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST  
Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST at the REC  
LIST. Each time this button is pressed,  
the setting will toggle between ORIGINAL  
and PLAY LIST.  
High Speed Dubbing Priority  
If a title is recorded onto HDD using high  
speed dubbing priority, editing cannot be  
done at the frame level. To perform editing at  
the frame level, set “HI SP DUB PRIORITY” to  
“NO” (pages 52, 58,103).  
REC LIST (DVD ORIGINAL)  
TITLE: CH33 FINE  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 4:00 PM – 4:10 PM  
1
2
3
• Set this function by displaying “REC LIST”  
and then selecting in order of: “FUNCTION  
MENU” → “HI SP DUB PRIORITY”.  
4
5
6
NOTE  
• If you have recorded a title with HI SP DUB  
PRIORITY set to “YES”, and you want to  
edit that title in frame units, cancel HI SP  
DUB PRIORITY (page 78).  
• A title which is recorded as an overwrite  
program will always be shown at the end of  
the list.  
If there are more than one overwrite  
program, they will be shown in the order of  
timer recording. Note that even if you  
select “SORT” in the title name list, the  
display order will not change.  
You cannot set “HI SP DUB PRIORITY” to  
the title again once you cancel.  
NOTE  
• When you perform editing like adding a  
chapter mark or erasing a scene, a slight  
discrepancy may arise between the edit  
screen and actually edited video.  
• If you play back a disc edited at the frame  
level with another DVD recorder, there may  
be a shift in the start or end point, or the  
screen may show a different thumbnail.  
Switching at Edit screen  
ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST  
Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST at the EDIT  
screen. Each time this button is  
pressed, the setting will toggle between  
ORIGINAL and PLAY LIST.  
EDIT(DVD ORIGINAL)  
TITLE: CH33 FINE  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 4:00 PM – 4:10 PM  
1
2
3
4
5
6
NOTE  
• If a Play List has not been created, the  
CREATE NEW screen appears.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing an Original Title (HDD/DVD)  
5 Press '/" to select “ERASE  
Erasing Unnecessary  
Scenes from an Original  
SCENE”, then press SET/ENTER.  
• The selected title is paused.  
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)  
TITLE: CH 33 FINE  
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 8:09 PM – 8:14 PM  
ERASE SCENE  
CHANGE TITLE NAME  
CHANGE THUMBNAIL  
DIVIDE CHAPTER  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
Title (ERASE SCENE)  
DVD-RW  
VR MODE  
HDD  
2
01  
00: 00: 00  
00  
Selects a scene from an original video and  
erase it.  
SPECIFY ERASE  
RANGE  
• To erase all titles, see page 87.  
• To erase by title (or chapter), see page 87.  
PLAY  
ENTER  
SET START POINT  
PLAY BACK  
NOTE  
• Scenes cannot be erased on DVD-R/RW  
6 Press |PLAY to start playback.  
(Video mode) discs.  
• Find the scene to be erased using  
JFWD, GREV, FSTILL/PAUSE,  
K, L, or SLOW.  
Before Starting Editing  
• Switch to the drive (HDD or DVD) to  
be edited.  
7 Press SET/ENTER when you  
reach the scene to be erased.  
• The erase start point is set. (Title  
playback continues.)  
1 Press START MENU to display  
START MENU screen.  
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)  
TITLE: CH33 FINE  
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 8:09 PM – 8:14 PM  
ERASE SCENE  
CHANGE TITLE NAME  
CHANGE THUMBNAIL  
DIVIDE CHAPTER  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
2 Press '/"/ \/|to select “EDIT/  
2
01  
00:00:12  
00  
ERASE”, then press SET/ENTER.  
[
]
START MENU EDIT/ERASE  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
SPECIFY ERASE  
RANGE  
EDIT/  
ERASE  
REC LIST  
DUBBING  
EDITS/ERASES RECORDED TITLES  
TIMER  
PROGRAM/  
CHECK  
INITIALIZE/  
FINALIZE  
OTHER  
SETTINGS  
ENTER  
SET END POINT  
INFORMATION  
SELECT  
• If you fast reverse to a scene before  
the start point, the start point will be  
canceled.  
n
ENTER  
ENTER  
RETURN  
• When the start point is set to near the  
beginning of a chapter, the beginning  
of the chapter will be selected as the  
start point. To make the original  
designated start point effective, set it  
again after combining up with the  
chapter just before. (page 86)  
3 Press '/" to select “EDIT”, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
EDIT/ERASE  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
DELETES SCENE,  
CREATES / EDITS PLAYLIST.  
EDIT  
ERASES ALL TITLES ON DISC  
(EXCEPT PROTECTED TITLES).  
ERASE ALL TITLES  
ERASE TITLES  
8 Press SET/ENTER when you  
ERASES SELECTED TITLES.  
reach the end of scene to be  
erased.  
DISABLES EDIT/ERASE TITLES.  
TITLE PROTECT / OFF  
SELECT  
• The erase end point is set. (The title  
will pause.)  
n
ENTER  
ENTER  
RETURN  
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)  
TITLE: CH33 FINE  
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 8:09 PM – 8:14 PM  
ERASE SCENE  
CHANGE TITLE NAME  
CHANGE THUMBNAIL  
DIVIDE CHAPTER  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
• The Original Edit Title List screen  
appears.  
2
01  
00:00:32  
00  
4 Press '/"/ \/|to select the  
title to edit, then press Yellow  
(D) (EDIT MENU).  
CONFIRM CONTENT  
AFTER ERASING?  
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)  
TITLE: CH33 FINE  
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 8:09 PM – 8:14 PM  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
n
RETURN  
CONFIRMING  
ERASE  
1
2
3
• When the end point is set to near the  
end of a chapter, the end of the  
chapter will be selected as the end  
point. To make the original  
designated end point effective, set it  
again after combining up with the  
chapter just after. (page 86)  
4
5
6
n
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
CHAPTER  
RETURN  
TITLE LIST  
EDIT MENU  
• Edit Menu Screen appears.  
Continued on Next Page |||  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• If you press  
                                                                                                             
|
                                                                                                             
PLAY, the currently paused  
Editing an Original Title (HDD/DVD)  
Searching for the Start  
9 Press Red (B) (CONFIRMING) to  
confirm the contents.  
• The title is played back without the  
scene to be erased.  
Point and End Point Scenes  
The following playback operations are  
available when searching for the start point  
and end point scenes.  
Press Yellow (D) (ERASE) to  
erase.  
• Go to step 10.  
Playback  
• Press RETURN to cancel scene  
erase.  
title will be played back.  
Skipping to the start of a chapter  
• If the scene to be selected is in another title  
or chapter, first search for the title or  
chapter using Kor L.  
10Press \ to select “YES”, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
TITLE: CH33 FINE  
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 8:09 PM – 8:14 PM  
ERASE SCENE  
Searching for scenes in a chapter  
• GREV and JFWD are convenient for  
searching for a scene in a chapter.  
CHANGE TITLE NAME  
CHANGE THUMBNAIL  
DIVIDE CHAPTER  
ERASE THIS SCENE?  
Pause  
YES  
NO  
• When you reach a scene near the start  
point or end point, press FSTILL/PAUSE  
to pause. This will make it easier to find the  
scene. The start and end points may shift  
slightly.  
n
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
• Erase begins.  
When erase completes, the screen in  
step 5 appears.  
• If “C (UNDO)” is displayed, you can  
undo edit by pressing Green (C).  
• To quit scene erase, press RETURN.  
Then the edit screen appears.  
Frame Advance/Reverse  
• If you press Lafter pause, the video  
will start Frame Advance Playback. If you  
press K, it will start Frame Reverse  
Playback.  
Final selection of scene  
11Press EXIT to exit from Edit  
• To select a scene more accurately, use  
slow playback starting a little before the  
scene to be selected. This will keep you  
from going beyond the scene.  
mode.  
NOTE  
Selecting start and end points for scene  
If you press SLOW after pausing, you  
can select a scene at your leisure during  
slow playback of the video.  
erase  
• You cannot set a range shorter than 3  
seconds.  
• Once you erase a section of an original, it  
is completely erased. It cannot be restored,  
so be very careful and confirm before  
erasing.  
• Scenes can only be added and erased a  
maximum of 50 times per title.  
• If scenes have been added 51 or more  
times to a disc using another DVD recorder.  
Editing (Recording) may not function.  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing an Original Title (HDD/DVD)  
4 Press '/"/ \/|to select the  
Inputting/Changing Title  
title to edit, then press Yellow  
(D) (EDIT MENU).  
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)  
TITLE: CH33 FINE  
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 4:00 PM – 4:10 PM  
Name (CHANGE TITLE  
NAME)  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
DVD-RW  
VR MODE  
DVD-RW  
VIDEO MODE  
HDD  
DVD-R  
1
2
3
• When you record, a title name including the  
date, time and channel number is auto-  
matically created.  
4
5
6
You can freely change this title name.  
• You can input up to a maximum of 64  
characters.  
n
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
CHAPTER  
RETURN  
TITLE LIST  
EDIT MENU  
To input, perform the following steps in  
order: “Select characters to be changed”  
→ “Delete unnecessary characters  
(characters to be changed)” → “Input new  
characters”.  
• Edit Menu screen appears.  
5 1 Press '/" to select  
“CHANGE TITLE NAME”.  
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)  
TITLE: CH 33 FINE  
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 4:00 PM – 4:10 PM  
ERASE SCENE  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
NOTE  
• Title names cannot be changed in finalized  
Video mode discs.  
CHANGE TITLE NAME  
CHANGE THUMBNAIL  
DIVIDE CHAPTER  
CHANGE TITLE NAME.  
Before Starting Editing  
• Switch to the drive (HDD or DVD) to  
be edited.  
2 Press SET/ENTER.  
• Title Name Change screen appears.  
1 Press START MENU.  
6 Change Title Name.  
2 Press '/"/ \/|to select “EDIT/  
ERASE”, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)  
TITLE: CH 33 FINE  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 4:00 PM – 4:10 PM  
CH 33 FINE 2004/10/4 4:00 PM  
|
[
]
START MENU EDIT/ERASE  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
.
(
Í
,
A
N
À
B
O
Á
Ñ
1
'
C
P
Â
Ò
2
*
D
Q
Ã
Ó
3
/
E
R
Ä
Ô
4
[
F
S
Å
Õ
5
\
G
T
H
U
Ç
I
J
W
É
K
L
Y
Ë
M
Z
Ì
?
:
!
;
EDIT/  
REC LIST  
DUBBING  
)
small  
END  
V
È
Ù
8
X
Ê
Û
-
ERASE  
Æ
Ö
6
Î
Ï
$
"
#
%
_
EDITS/ERASES RECORDED TITLES  
Ø
7
^
Ú
9
Ü
+
ß
>
TIMER  
PROGRAM/  
CHECK  
<
|
=
}
0
INITIALIZE/  
FINALIZE  
OTHER  
SETTINGS  
]
&
{
˜
i
n
ENTER  
ERASE  
SELECT  
BACK SPACE  
ENTER  
BACK  
ERASE ALL  
FORWARD  
RETURN  
SPACE  
INFORMATION  
SELECT  
• For information on how to input  
characters, see pages 51 and 52.  
n
ENTER  
ENTER  
RETURN  
3 Press '/" to select “EDIT”,  
7 Press '/"/ \/|to select “END”  
and then press SET/ENTER  
After input is finished.  
then press SET/ENTER.  
EDIT/ERASE  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
• The new title is set, and the screen in  
step 5 displays.  
DELETES SCENE,  
CREATES / EDITS PLAYLIST.  
EDIT  
ERASES ALL TITLES ON DISC  
(EXCEPT PROTECTED TITLES).  
Press Green (C) (UNDO) to  
return to the previously set title.  
• The title returns to original name.  
• Operate according to the instructions  
of the screen.  
ERASE ALL TITLES  
ERASE TITLES  
ERASES SELECTED TITLES.  
DISABLES EDIT/ERASE TITLES.  
TITLE PROTECT / OFF  
SELECT  
n
ENTER  
ENTER  
RETURN  
8 Press EXIT to quit editing.  
• Edit mode will terminate.  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing an Original Title (HDD/DVD)  
5 1 Press '/" to select  
Changing Thumbnail  
“CHANGE THUMBNAIL”.  
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)  
TITLE: CH33 FINE  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
(CHANGE THUMBNAIL)  
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 8:09 PM – 8:14 PM  
ERASE SCENE  
CHANGE TITLE NAME  
CHANGE THUMBNAIL  
DIVIDE CHAPTER  
DVD-RW  
VR MODE  
HDD  
1
00  
00:00: 00  
00  
Changes the still frame picture displayed at  
the Thumbnail screen of the REC LIST to your  
favorite scene within the title.  
SELECT SCENE FOR  
THUMBNAIL  
Before Starting Editing  
• Switch to the drive (HDD or DVD) to  
be edited.  
2 Press SET/ENTER.  
6 Press |PLAY to start playback.  
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
1 Press START MENU.  
TITLE: CH33 FINE  
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 8:09 PM – 8:14 PM  
SCENE ERASE  
CHANGE TITLE NAME  
CHANGE THUMBNAIL  
DIVIDE CHAPTERS  
2 Press '/"/ \/|to select “EDIT/  
ERASE”, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
1
01  
00:00 : 12  
14  
SELECT SCENE FOR  
THUMBNAIL  
[
]
START MENU EDIT/ERASE  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
EDIT/  
REC LIST  
DUBBING  
• Find the scene you want to use as a  
thumbnail using JFWD, GREV,  
FSTILL/PAUSE, K, L, or  
SLOW.  
ERASE  
EDITS/ERASES RECORDED TITLES  
TIMER  
PROGRAM/  
CHECK  
INITIALIZE/  
FINALIZE  
OTHER  
SETTINGS  
7 Press SET/ENTER when you  
reach the scene you want to use  
as a thumbnail.  
INFORMATION  
SELECT  
n
ENTER  
ENTER  
RETURN  
• Playback is paused.  
3 Press '/" to select “EDIT”,  
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
then press SET/ENTER.  
TITLE: CH33 FINE  
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 8:09 PM – 8:14 PM  
ERASE SCENE  
CHANGE TITLE NAME  
CHANGE THUMBNAIL  
DIVIDE CHAPTER  
EDIT/ERASE  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
1
01  
00 :00:41  
12  
DELETES SCENE,  
EDIT  
CREATES / EDITS PLAYLIST.  
PUT THIS  
SCENE IN THE  
THUMBNAIL?  
ERASES ALL TITLES ON DISC  
(EXCEPT PROTECTED TITLES).  
ERASE ALL TITLES  
ERASE TITLES  
ERASES SELECTED TITLES.  
8 1 If this is the screen you want,  
select “YES” by pressing \/|.  
• If you select “NO”, you can return to  
step 5 and select the scene again.  
2 Press SET/ENTER.  
DISABLES EDIT/ERASE TITLES.  
TITLE PROTECT / OFF  
n
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
• The Original Edit Title List Screen  
appears.  
• The new Thumbnail screen is set, and  
the system returns to the screen in  
step 5.  
4 Press '/"/ \/|to select the  
title to edit, then press Yellow  
(D) (EDIT MENU).  
Press Green (C) (UNDO) to  
return to the previously set  
thumbnail.  
• Operate according to the instructions  
of the screen.  
EDIT (HDD ORIGINAL)  
TITLE: CH33 FINE  
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 8:09 PM – 8:14 PM  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
1
2
3
9 Press EXIT to quit Thumbnail  
edit.  
4
5
6
• Edit mode will terminate.  
n
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
CHAPTER  
RETURN  
TITLE LIST  
EDIT MENU  
• Edit Menu screen appears.  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing an Original Title (HDD/DVD)  
6 Press |PLAY to start playback.  
Making Sections in a Title  
(DIVIDE CHAPTER)  
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
TITLE: CH33 FINE  
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 8:09 PM – 8:14 PM  
ERASE SCENE  
CHANGE TITLE NAME  
CHANGE THUMBNAIL  
DIVIDE CHAPTER  
2
01  
00:00:00  
04  
DVD-RW  
HDD  
VR MODE  
Divides a title into multiple chapters and  
make editing and dubbing of chapter as unit  
easier.  
SELECT POSITION  
TO DIVIDE  
THIS CHAPTER.  
• You can set chapter divisions by pressing  
CHAPTER MARK (under the cover)  
during recording or playback.  
• Find the scene to erase using  
JFWD, GREV, FSTILL/PAUSE,  
K, L, or SLOW on the  
remote comtrol.  
Before Starting Editing  
• Switch to the drive (HDD or DVD) to  
be edited.  
7 Press SET/ENTER at the point  
where you want to divide.  
1 Press START MENU.  
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)  
TITLE: CH33 FINE  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
2 Press '/"/ \/|to select “EDIT/  
ERASE”, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 8:09 PM – 8:14 PM  
ERASE SCENE  
CHANGE TITLE NAME  
CHANGE THUMBNAIL  
DIVIDE CHAPTER  
1
01  
00:00:12  
04  
[
]
START MENU EDIT/ERASE  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
DIVIDED CHAPTER?  
EDIT/  
ERASE  
REC LIST  
DUBBING  
YES  
NO  
EDITS/ERASES RECORDED TITLES  
TIMER  
PROGRAM/  
CHECK  
INITIALIZE/  
FINALIZE  
OTHER  
SETTINGS  
8 Press \/|to select “YES”, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
INFORMATION  
• To continue dividing, repeat steps 5  
to 7.  
3 Press '/" to select “EDIT”,  
To cancel a chapter division,  
press Green (C) (UNDO).  
• Operate according to the instructions  
on the screen.  
then press SET/ENTER.  
EDIT/ERASE  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
DELETES SCENE,  
CREATES / EDITS PLAYLIST.  
EDIT  
9 Press EXIT to quit editing.  
ERASES ALL TITLES ON DISC  
(EXCEPT PROTECTED TITLES).  
ERASE ALL TITLES  
ERASE TITLES  
• Edit mode will terminate.  
ERASES SELECTED TITLES.  
NOTE  
DISABLES EDIT/ERASE TITLES.  
TITLE PROTECT / OFF  
• Divide a chapter to make it 3 or more  
seconds. You cannot divide a chapter into a  
section which is less than 3 seconds.  
4 Press '/"/ \/|to select the  
title to edit, then press Yellow  
(D) (EDIT MENU).  
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)  
TITLE: CH33 FINE  
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 8:09 PM – 8:14 PM  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
1
2
3
4
5
6
5 Press '/" to select “DIVIDE  
CHAPTER”, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
TITLE: CH33 FINE  
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 8:09 PM – 8:14 PM  
ERASE SCENE  
CHANGE TITLE NAME  
CHANGE THUMBNAIL  
DIVIDE CHAPTER  
2
01  
00:00: 00  
04  
SELECT POSITION  
TO DIVIDE  
THIS CHAPTER.  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing an Original Title (HDD/DVD)  
Combining Chapters  
Together  
Disabling Title Edit and  
Erase (TITLE PROTECT)  
DVD-RW  
HDD  
(COMBINE CHAPTERS)  
VR MODE  
DVD-RW  
VR MODE  
HDD  
Disables edit and erase so you cannot  
mistakenly change or erase the content of a  
title.  
Lets you safely save a disc for which editing  
is in progress.  
• This operation will not work with Video  
mode discs.  
• Titles created with Play List (page 88)  
cannot be protected.  
Combines two adjacent chapters into a single  
chapter.  
NOTE  
• You cannot combine chapters automati-  
cally recorded when a scene was erased.  
Before Starting Editing  
• Switch to the drive (HDD or DVD) to  
be edited.  
Before Starting Editing  
• Switch to the drive (HDD or DVD) to  
be edited.  
1 Select “EDIT/ERASE” in START  
MENU screen, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
1 Select “EDIT/ERASE” in START  
MENU screen, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
2 Press '/" to select “EDIT”,  
2 Press '/" to select “TITLE  
PROTECT/OFF”, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
then press SET/ENTER.  
3 Press '/"/ \/|to select the  
title you wish to edit.  
3 Press '/"/ \/|to select the  
title to protect, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
4 Press Red (B) (CHAPTER) to  
select Chapter Thumbnail screen.  
• Each time the button is pressed, the  
setting toggles between “PROTECT”  
and “UNPROTECT”.  
5 Press '/"/ \/|to select the  
chapter to combine, then press  
Yellow (D) (EDIT MENU).  
TITLE PROTECT OR NOT(HDD ORIGINAL)  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
TITLE: CH33 FINE  
1
2
3
TITLE INFO: 10/13 WED 4:00 PM – 4:10 PM  
1
2
3
4
5
6
4
5
6
n
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
EDIT MENU  
TITLE  
6 Press SET/ENTER.  
• The protect mark  
protected titles.  
(The protect mark can be confirmed  
at either the “REC LIST” screen or  
“EDIT” screen.)  
is attached to  
7 Press '/" to select combine  
procedure you prefer, then press  
SET/ENTER.  
• Select from: “COMBINE W/PREV”,  
“COMBINE W/NEXT” or “DON’T  
COMBINE”.  
• If you select “COMBINE W/PREV” or  
“COMBINE W/NEXT”, the two  
chapters will join, and Chapter  
Thumbnail screen is displayed.  
• If you select “DON’T COMBINE”, the  
previous screen displays.  
4 Press EXIT to exit from Edit  
mode.  
To Cancel Title Protect  
1 Select the title protected in step 3  
above, and press SET/ENTER.  
• Title protect is canceled, and the  
protect mark disappears.  
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)  
TITLE: CH33 FINE  
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 4:00 PM – 4:10 PM  
COMBINE CHAPTERS  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
NOTE  
COMBINE W/PREV  
• If “DVD DISC PROTECTION” is set for a  
DVD-RW (VR mode) disc, protection cannot  
be canceled for individual titles. Cancel  
“DVD DISC PROTECTION” (page 104).  
COMBINE W/PREV CHAP  
COMBINE W/NEXT  
COMBINE W/NEXT CHAP  
DON'T COMBINE  
CANNOT COMBINE CHAPS  
2 Press EXIT to exit from Edit  
8 Press EXIT to exit from Edit  
mode.  
mode.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
wish to erase, select with  
and press SET/ENTER.  
                                                                                                                              
'
                                                                                                                              
/
                                                                                                                                  
"
                                                                                                                                  
/
                                                                                                                                     
\
                                                                                                                                     
/
                                                                                                                                        
|
                                                                                                                                        
Editing an Original Title (HDD/DVD)  
Erasing All Titles  
Erasing by Selecting a  
Title (or Chapter)  
DVD-RW  
DVD-RW  
HDD  
DVD-R  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
DVD-RW  
DVD-RW  
HDD  
DVD-R  
This erases the entire contents of a HDD or  
DVD-RW. (Except titles for which title protect  
has been set.)  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
Allows you to select titles to erase, and erase  
them in a batch.  
You can erase the following:  
• HDD (ORIGINAL):  
• When erasing original titles:  
If original titles are erased, those titles will  
also be erased from play lists.  
• When erasing play lists:  
Even if play lists are erased, the original  
titles will not be erased.  
Erases all titles recorded on the HDD.  
When originals are erased, play lists are  
also erased.  
• HDD (PLAY LIST):  
Erases all play lists created on the HDD.  
Even if play lists are erased, the original  
titles are not erased.  
NOTE  
• Up to a maximum of 20 titles (chapters)  
can be selected at one time.  
• DVD (ORIGINAL):  
• When a Video mode disc is finalized, you  
can no longer select and erase titles.  
• You cannot erase chapters in DVD-R/RW  
discs (Video mode).  
Erases all titles recorded on DVD. When  
originals are erased, play lists are also  
erased.  
• DVD (PLAY LIST):  
Erases all play lists created on DVD. Even if  
play lists are erased, the original titles are  
not erased.  
Before Starting Editing  
• Switch to the drive (HDD or DVD) to  
be edited.  
NOTE  
• When a Video mode disc is finalized, you  
1 Select “EDIT/ERASE” in START  
MENU screen, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
can no longer erase all titles.  
Before Starting Editing  
• Switch to the drive (HDD or DVD) to  
be edited.  
2 Press '/" to select “ERASE  
TITLES”, then press SET/ENTER.  
3 Press '/"/ \/|to select titles  
1 Select “EDIT/ERASE” in START  
MENU screen, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
to erase.  
• If you press Red (B) (CHAPTER), the  
screen will switch to the chapter  
thumbnail display so you can select  
and erase chapters.  
2 Press '/" to select “ERASE  
ALL TITLES”, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
4 Press SET/ENTER.  
• If there are other titles (chapters) you  
3 Press '/" to select what you  
want to erase, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
5 Press Yellow (D) (ERASE).  
ERASE ALL TITLES  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
6 Press \/|to select “YES”.  
SELECT AN ITEM BELOW TO ERASE ALL TITLES  
•
Once a title (chapter) has been erased,  
it cannot be restored. Carefully confirm  
before executing erase.  
HDD (ORIGINAL)  
HDD (PLAY LIST)  
• If you select “NO” and enter, operate  
4 Press \/|to select “YES”, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
from step 4 again.  
7 Press SET/ENTER.  
• Carefully confirm before executing  
erase.  
•
All selected titles (chapters) are erased.  
• To cancel erase, press Green (C)  
(CNL ERSE).  
• Operate according to the instructions  
on the screen.  
• If you select “NO” and enter, the  
screen in step 3 appears.  
5 Press SET/ENTER.  
• All titles (or play lists) are erased, and  
the screen in step 3 appears.  
To restore the erased content, press  
Green (C) (CNL ERSE). Operate  
according to the instructions on the  
screen. (Note: You can only undo  
once, to the state immediately before  
the last erase.)  
8
Press EXIT to exit from Edit mode.  
NOTE  
• A title which is recorded as an overwrite  
program will always be shown at the end of  
the list.  
If there is more than one overwrite  
programs, they will be shown in the order  
of timer recording. Note that even if you  
select “SORT” in the title name list, the  
display order will not change.  
6 Press EXIT to exit from Edit  
mode.  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                                                                                                                                          
                                                                                                                                                                          
Editing a Play List (HDD/DVD)  
5
1
Press '/" to select “COPY  
Creating a Play List  
TITLE/CHAPTER”.  
DVD-RW  
HDD  
2 Press SET/ENTER.  
•REC LIST (Thumbnail) screen of the  
original appears.  
VR MODE  
You can create a Play List by copying a title  
or chapter units from an original. Also you can  
select your favorite scenes from originals, and  
compile them into a Play List.  
6 1 Press '/"/ \/|to select title  
to copy.  
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
TITLE: CH33 FINE  
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 8:09 PM – 8:14 PM  
NOTE  
•Operations like “COPY TITLE/CHAPTER”  
and “COPY SPECIFIED SCENE” do not  
actually copy the original titles. These  
operations merely write the information  
“make this original title a title in the play  
list”. Therefore, you can edit without  
decreasing free space in the disc or  
touching the original titles.  
•When creating a play list from original titles,  
the original titles’ thumbnail and chapter  
mark information are not copied.  
•You cannot create a play list of “Copy  
Once” titles (program) recorded on HDD.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
•To select a chapter, press Red (B)  
(CHAPTER).  
2 Press SET/ENTER.  
•The selected title (chapter) becomes  
a Play List title.  
Creating from Part of an  
Original  
You can select a desired scene from an  
original title, and make it into a Play List title.  
Before Starting Editing  
•Switch to the drive (HDD or DVD) to  
be edited.  
Creating from Original  
Titles  
Makes a single original title into a play list  
title.  
1 Perform steps 1-4 of “Creating  
from Original Titles” in the left  
column.  
2 1 Press '/" to select “COPY  
SPECIFIED SCENE”.  
1 Select “EDIT/ERASE” in START  
MENU screen, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
2 Press SET/ENTER.  
3 Press '/"/ \/|to select title to  
copy, then press SET/ENTER.  
•To select from a chapter, press Red  
(B) (CHAPTER) and select the  
chapter.  
2 Press '/" to select “EDIT”, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
3 Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST to  
the PLAY LIST screen.  
•The screen switches to the Play List  
Edit Screen.  
4 Press |PLAY to start playback.  
•Find the scene to copy using  
FSTILL/PAUSE, JFWD, GREW,  
K, L, or SLOW.  
•There still is no title at this point, so a  
“NEW” title frame with no image is  
displayed.  
•To create a new Play List later, select  
the “NEW” title frame.  
5 Press SET/ENTER at the place  
where you want to start copying.  
EDIT(HDD PLAYLIST)  
TITLE: CH33 FINE  
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 8:09 PM – 8:14 PM  
CREATE NEW  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
EDIT(HDD PLAYLIST)  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
2
SELECT EDIT OR CREATE PLAYLIST  
01  
00: 00: 12  
00  
SPECIFY A RANGE  
TO COPY.  
NEW  
ENTER  
SET END POINT  
4 Press SET/ENTER.  
•If you fast reverse to a scene prior to  
the start point, the start point will be  
canceled.  
EDIT(HDD PLAYLIST)  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
SPECIFY THE RANGE TO SET PLAYLIST  
FROM THE ORIGINAL THEN CREATE PLAYLIST.  
•When the start point is set to near the  
beginning of a chapter, the beginning  
of the chapter will be selected as the  
start point. To make the original  
designated start point effective, set it  
again after combining up with the  
chapter just before. (page 86)  
COPY TITLE/CHAPTER  
SELECT ORIGINAL TITLE/CHAPTER AND ADD IT.  
COPY SPECIFIED SCENE  
SELECT A SCENE FROM ORIGINAL VIDEO  
AND ADD IT.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing a Play List (HDD/DVD)  
6 Find the place where you want to  
Adding a Scene from an  
Original to a Play List  
(ADD SCENE)  
end copying, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
•If you press RETURN, you can  
reselect the start point.  
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)  
TITLE: CH33 FINE  
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 8:09 PM – 8:14 PM  
CREATE NEW  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
DVD-RW  
HDD  
VR MODE  
Adds video selected from an original to the  
end of play list titles.  
1
07  
00: 00: 32  
14  
NOTE  
CONFIRM CONTENT?  
•The selected scene cannot be added if  
adding it will make the title longer than 12  
hours.  
•Scenes can be added as long as the  
length of the title after adding is less than  
the maximum of 12 hours.  
•When the end point is set to near the  
end of a chapter, the end of the  
chapter will be selected as the end  
point. To make the original  
designated end point effective, set it  
again after linking up with the chapter  
just before. (page 86)  
Before Starting Editing  
•Switch to the drive (HDD or DVD) to  
be edited.  
7 Press Red (B) (CONFIRMING) to  
confirm the content.  
1 Select “EDIT/ERASE” in START  
MENU screen, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
Press Yellow (D) (CREATE) to  
execute copy.  
Go to step 8.  
•You can reselect the end point by  
pressing RETURN.  
2 Press '/" to select “EDIT”,  
then press SET/ENTER.  
8 1 Press \/|to select “YES”.  
2 Press SET/ENTER.  
3 1 Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST  
to switch to Play List screen.  
2 Press '/"/ \/|to select title  
to edit.  
SAVE AS A NEW PLAYLIST?  
EDIT(HDD PLAY LIST)  
TITLE: CH33 FINE  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
YES  
NO  
n
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 8:09 PM – 8:14 PM  
1
2
3
•One play list title is created.  
NOTE  
NEW  
4
5
6
Selecting start or end point to add a scene.  
•You cannot set a range shorter than 3  
seconds.  
3 Press Yellow (D) (EDIT  
MENU).  
4 Press '/" to select “ADD  
SCENE” then press SET/  
ENTER.  
EDIT(HDD PLAYLIST)  
TITLE: CH33 FINE  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 8:09 PM – 8:14 PM  
ERASE SCENE  
CHANGE TITLE NAME  
ADD CHAPTER/TITLE  
SELECT ORIGINAL TITLE/CHAPTER AND ADD IT  
CHANGE THUMBNAIL  
DIVIDE CHAPTER  
ADD SCENE  
MOVE TITLE  
SPECIFY SCENE TO ADD  
SELECT A SCENE FROM ORIGINAL VIDEO AND  
ADD IT  
n
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Continued on Next Page |||  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing a Play List (HDD/DVD)  
•If you fast reverse to a scene prior to  
the start point, the start point will be  
canceled.  
•When the start point is set to near the  
beginning of a chapter, the beginning  
of the chapter will be selected as the  
start point. To make the original  
designated start point effective, set it  
again after combining up with the  
chapter just before. (page 86)  
5 Adding a Title or Chap-  
ter  
1 Select “ADD CHAPTER/TITLE”,  
then press SET/ENTER.  
2 Select a title (chapter) at the  
title (chapter) list, then press  
SET/ENTER.  
Go to step 9.  
Specifying and Adding a  
8 Press SET/ENTER at the end of  
the scene you want to add.  
•Press RETURN to reselect the start  
point of the scene. You can press  
RETURN to reselect the end point  
even after it is already set.  
Scene  
• Select “SPECIFY SCENE TO  
ADD”, then press SET/ENTER.  
Go to step 6.  
EDIT(HDD PLAYLIST)  
TITLE: CH33 FINE  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
ERASE SCENE  
2
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 8:09 PM – 8:14 PM  
ERASE SCENE  
CHANGE TITLE NAME  
01  
CHANGE THUMBNAIL  
00:00:32  
CHANGE TITLE NAME  
CHANGE THUMBNAIL  
DIVIDE CHAPTER  
ADD SCENE  
ADD CHAPTER/TITLE  
DIVIDE CHAPTER  
09  
ADD SCENE  
MOVE TITLE  
SELECT ORIGINAL TITLE/CHAPTER AND ADD IT  
CONFIRM CONTENT?  
MOVE TITLE  
SPECIFY SCENE TO ADD  
SELECT A SCENE FROM ORIGINAL VIDEO AND  
ADD IT  
n
RETURN  
CONFIRMING  
ADD  
n
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
•When the end point is set to near the  
end of a chapter, the end of the  
chapter will be selected as the end  
point. To make the original  
designated end point effective, set it  
again after combining up with the  
chapter just before. (page 86)  
6 Press '/"/ \/|to select title  
(chapter) to edit, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
•The selected title (chapter) pauses.  
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
TITLE: CH33 FINE  
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 8:09 PM – 8:14 PM  
ERASE SCENE  
CHANGE TITLE NAME  
CHANGE THUMBNAIL  
DIVIDE CHAPTER  
9 Press Red (B) (CONFIRMING) to  
2
01  
confirm the content.  
00: 00:00  
04  
Press Yellow (D) (ADD) to add.  
•If you press Red (B) (CONFIRMING),  
you can test play the added scene,  
from the start point to the end point. It  
may take about one minute for the  
confirm screen to appear.  
ADD SCENE  
MOVE TITLE  
SPECIFY RANGE TO  
ADD  
PLAY  
ENTER  
SET START POINT  
PLAYBACK  
•Press Yellow (D) (ADD) to add.  
7 1 Press |PLAY to start playback.  
•Find the scene to add using FSTILL/  
PAUSE, JFWD, GREV, K,  
L, or SLOW.  
101 Press \/|to select “YES”.  
2 Press SET/ENTER.  
•The scene is added after the selected  
title, and stored as a new title of the  
play list.  
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)  
TITLE: CH33 FINE  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 8:09 PM – 8:14 PM  
ERASE SCENE  
CHANGE TITLE NAME  
CHANGE THUMBNAIL  
DIVIDE CHAPTER  
ADD SCENE  
2
01  
00: 00:12  
00  
11Press EXIT to exit from EDIT  
mode.  
•A chapter mark is automatically set at  
the start point where the scene is  
added.  
MOVE TITLE  
SPECIFY RANGE TO  
ADD  
NOTE  
PLAY  
ENTER  
SET START POINT  
PLAYBACK  
•When adding a scene, select a scene  
which continues for at least 3 seconds.  
Scenes shorter than 3 seconds cannot be  
added.  
•Scenes can only be added and erased a  
maximum of 50 times per title.  
•If you press G REV or Kand reverse  
beyond the start point after setting a start  
point, the start point will cancel.  
•If scenes have been added or erased 51 or  
more times to a single title in a disc using  
another DVD recorder, Editing (Recording)  
may not function.  
2 Press SET/ENTER at the start  
point of the scene you want to  
add.  
ERASE SCENE  
2
CHANGE TITLE NAME  
01  
CHANGE THUMBNAIL  
00:00: 32  
DIVIDE CHAPTER  
09  
ADD SCENE  
MOVE TITLE  
SPECIFY RANGE TO  
ADD  
PLAY  
ENTER  
SET END POINT  
PLAYBACK  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing a Play List (HDD/DVD)  
6 Press SET/ENTER.  
Changing the Title  
•If a point prior to the selected title is  
selected as the destination, the title  
Sequence (MOVE TITLE)  
will move to the point immediately  
prior to the selected title.  
DVD-RW  
VR MODE  
HDD  
•Press Green (C) (UNDO) to restore to  
the state before the movement.  
Operate according to the instructions  
on the screen.  
Freely changes the sequence of titles.  
EDIT(HDD PLAYLIST)  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
SELECT EDIT OR CREATE PLAYLIST  
EDIT(HDD PLAYLIST)  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
TITLE: CH33 FINE  
1
2
TITLE INFO: 10/6 WED 4:00 PM – 4:10 PM  
NEW  
1
2
3
3
4
5
4
5
6
n
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
TITLE LIST  
n
ENTER  
SELECT  
TITLE LIST  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Before Starting Editing  
•Switch to the drive (HDD or DVD) to  
be edited.  
EDIT(HDD PLAYLIST)  
TITLE: CH33  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 4:00 PM – 4:10 PM  
1 Select “EDIT/ERASE” in START  
MENU screen, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
2 Press '/" to select “EDIT”, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
n
RETURN  
UNDO  
TITLE LIST  
3 1 Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST  
to switch to Play List screen.  
2 Press '/"/ \/|to select title  
to edit.  
Example: If Title 3 is selected and the  
destination cursor is set to Title 1, Title 3  
is moved to the spot in front of Title 1.  
EDIT(HDD PLAYLIST)  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
•If a point after the selected title is  
selected as the destination, the title  
will move to the point immediately  
after the selected title.  
TITLE: CH33 FINE  
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 4:00 PM – 4:10 PM  
1
2
NEW  
EDIT(HDD PLAYLIST)  
TITLE: CH33 FINE  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
3
4
5
TITLE INFO: 10/7 THU 8:09 PM – 8:14 PM  
1
2
3
n
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
TITLE LIST  
CHAPTERS  
EDIT MENU  
4
5
6
3 Press Yellow (D) (EDIT  
MENU).  
n
ENTER  
SELECT  
TITLE LIST  
ENTER  
RETURN  
4 Press '/" to select “MOVE  
TITLE”, then press SET/ENTER.  
EDIT(HDD PLAYLIST)  
TITLE: CH33 FINE  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
5 Press '/"/ \/|to select the  
TITLE INFO: 10/6 WED 4:00 PM – 4:10 PM  
thumbnail to move the title to.  
1
2
3
EDIT(HDD PLAYLIST)  
TITLE: CH33 FINE  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
TITLE INFO: 10/8 FRI 4:00 PM – 4:10 PM  
4
5
6
1
2
3
n
RETURN  
TITLE LIST  
UNDO  
4
5
6
Example: If Title 3 is selected and the  
destination cursor is set to Title 4, Title 3  
is moved to the spot after Title 4.  
n
ENTER  
SELECT  
TITLE LIST  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Selected title  
Cursor on the  
thumbnail to move  
the selected title to  
7 Press EXIT to exit from EDIT  
mode.  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing a Play List (HDD/DVD)  
Erasing Unnecessary  
Making Sections in a Title  
(DIVIDE CHAPTER)  
Scenes (ERASE SCENE)  
DVD-RW  
VR MODE  
DVD-RW  
HDD  
HDD  
VR MODE  
Selects and erases unnecessary scenes.  
Even if you erase a scene in a play list, this  
will not affect the original video.  
Divides a title into multiple chapters. This  
makes editing and dubbing in chapter units  
more convenient.  
1 Select “EDIT” at the “EDIT/  
ERASE” in START MENU, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
1 Select “EDIT” at the “EDIT/  
ERASE” in START MENU, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
•The Thumbnail screen appears.  
•The Thumbnail screen appears.  
2 Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST to 2 Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST to  
display Play List (Thumbnail)  
screen.  
display Play List (Thumbnail)  
screen.  
3 Erase the scene using the same  
operation used for erasing an  
original scene (step 4 on page 81-  
step 11 on page 82).  
3 Divide a title into chapters using  
the same operation used for  
chapter division of originals  
(steps 4 -9 on page 85).  
Combining Chapters  
Together  
Inputting/Changing  
Title Name  
(COMBINE CHAPTERS)  
(CHANGE TITLE NAME)  
DVD-RW  
VR MODE  
HDD  
DVD-RW  
VR MODE  
HDD  
This lets you combine two adjacent chapters  
into a single chapter.  
You can input up to 64 characters.  
1 Select “EDIT” at the “EDIT/  
ERASE” in START MENU, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
1 Select “EDIT” at the “EDIT/  
ERASE” in START MENU, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
•The Thumbnail screen appears.  
•The Thumbnail screen appears.  
2 Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST to  
display Play List (Thumbnail)  
screen.  
2 Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST to  
display Play List (Thumbnail)  
screen.  
3 Change or input the title name  
using the same operation used for  
changing or inputting an original  
title (steps 4 -7 on page 83).  
3 Combine chapters using the same  
operation used for chapter  
combination of originals (steps 3  
-7, left column on page 86).  
Changing Thumbnail  
NOTE  
•You cannot combine chapters automati-  
cally recorded when a scene was erased,  
or chapters recorded due to adding (with  
ADD SCENE).  
(CHANGE THUMBNAIL)  
DVD-RW  
HDD  
VR MODE  
Changes the image of title displayed in REC  
LIST to a scene you like in the title.  
1 Select “EDIT” at the “EDIT/  
ERASE” in START MENU, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
•The Thumbnail screen appears.  
2 Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST to  
display Play List (Thumbnail)  
screen.  
3 Change the thumbnail using the  
same operation used for changing  
an original thumbnail (steps 4-9  
on page 84).  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enjoying High Quality Sounds  
Playing 2 Channel Audio with an  
Playing Dolby Digital  
Analog Connection  
(5.1 Channel) and DTS Audio with  
a Digital Connection  
The Recorder  
• Connecting an amplifier with a Dolby Digital/DTS digital  
surround processor or a Dolby Digital/DTS digital  
surround amplifier to the Recorder’s coaxial or optical  
DIGITAL AUDIO Output jack (terminal) provides richer,  
more powerful audio play.  
To AUDIO  
Output jacks  
• To enjoy DTS Digital Surround audio, select DTS audio at  
the disc menu during DVD playback, or select DTS audio  
using the AUDIO button (under the cover) of the remote  
control.  
(Red)  
(White)  
■ Connection to a processor or amplifier with an optical  
or coaxial digital input jack (terminal)  
Audio cable  
(commercially available)  
The Recorder  
To amplifier  
audio input jacks  
(Red)  
(White)  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  
To DIGITAL  
AUDIO Output  
OPTICAL terminal  
COAXIAL jack  
To DIGITAL  
Audio equipment, etc.  
AUDIO Output  
COAXIAL jack  
Jack and Plug Colors  
Audio Left: White  
Audio Right: Red  
Optical digital cable  
(commercially available)  
or  
Coaxial digital cable  
(commercially available)  
NOTE  
To coaxial digital  
input jack  
To optical digital  
input terminal  
• When connecting audio equipment using analog  
connection, we recommend that you set “DD OUTPUT  
LEVEL” to “NO” (see page 103).  
If you set to “YES”, audio may sound abnormal during  
disc playback.  
Dolby Digital (5.1ch)/  
DTS processor or amplifier  
Important!  
• When using this connection, set “DIGITAL AUDIO  
OUTPUT” to “Dolby Digital” (see page 102).  
NOTE  
• To play a disc recorded with DTS, you need to use DTS  
processor or amplifier.  
• This connection is not possible if the processor or  
amplifier to which you want to connect does not have an  
optical or coaxial digital input jack (terminal).  
• Refer to the operation manual for the processor or  
amplifier for information about connecting to it.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enjoying High Quality Sounds  
Digital Connection to an MD Recorder or  
Other Audio Equipment without a Dolby  
Digital Decoder  
Playing 2 Channel Audio with a  
Digital Connection  
The Recorder  
Audio CD or Video CD  
• You can enjoy these discs by playing them back by the  
ordinary playback procedure. (The normal audio output  
is not played back for discs recorded with DTS.)  
DVD Video Disc  
• There is no audio signal generated for DVD video discs  
recorded with DTS. A processor or amplifier equipped  
with a DTS Surround decoder function is required to enjoy  
DTS audio.  
To DIGITAL  
AUDIO Output  
OPTICAL terminal  
DIGITAL AUDIO Output  
COAXIAL jack  
To DIGITAL  
AUDIO Output  
COAXIAL jack  
Optical digital cable  
(commercially available)  
or  
Coaxial digital cable  
(commercially available)  
To optical digital  
input terminal  
To coaxial digital  
input jack  
Audio equipment with an  
optical or coaxial digital  
input terminal  
Important!  
• When using this connection, set “DIGITAL AUDIO  
OUTPUT” to “PCM” (see page 102).  
Digital Connection to an MD Recorder to Record a CD  
• When you are using a digital connection to record  
the contents of a CD to an MD, the track numbers of  
the CD may not match the track numbers recorded  
to the MD.  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording from External Equipment  
Input of Video, Audio and Data Signals  
ÆDate and time data as well as the contents of cassette  
memory cannot be recorded with this Recorder.  
ÆVideo and audio signals of protected material or  
“Copy Once” material cannot be recorded.  
ÆMonaural audio cannot be input through the DV IN  
terminal.  
Recording from a Digital  
Camcorder Using i.LINK  
DVD-RW  
VR MODE  
DVD-RW  
VIDEO MODE  
HDD  
DVD-R  
• When this Recorder is connected with a DV-format  
camcorder using a DV cable, you can record and edit  
with minimal deterioration of picture and sound quality  
using a digital signal.  
• You can also display an operation panel for digital  
camcorder control on the screen, and operate using the  
buttons on the panel. This allows easy recording onto  
disc. Record after first performing “DV SETTING” (page  
104) at the START MENU.  
* i.LINK is a function that lets you control other equipment  
by input and output of video, audio, data and control  
signals between equipment having an i.LINK terminal.  
* i.LINK refers to the IEEE1394-1995 industry specification  
Audio Mode  
Digital camcorders typically have the following two audio  
modes.  
16-bit (48 kHz)  
Although this yields high sound quality, only one stereo  
audio signal can be processed.  
12-bit (32 kHz)  
Two stereo signals can be processed. In general,  
overdubbed audio is recorded in Stereo 2.  
ÆThis Recorder allows listening or recording of either  
Stereo 1 or Stereo 2 audio if the input audio is in the 12-bit  
audio mode.  
ÆThis Recorder is unable to process 44.1 kHz input audio  
signals.  
and extensions thereof. The  
compliant with the i.LINK standard.  
* i.LINK is a trademark.  
logo is used for products  
NOTE  
Connecting a Digital Camcorder  
• The DV IN terminal of this Recorder only enables input of  
DV-format camcorders (DVC-SD signals). It is not  
compatible with satellite receivers or Digital VHS video  
recorders since they employ a different format.  
• To connect the Recorder with a digital camcorder, set  
digital camcorder POWER to “PLAY (Video side)”, and  
connect while in the stopped state. If the DV is connected  
when POWER is set to “RECORD (Camera side)”, or  
when tape has been played back, the DV link will not  
work correctly.  
Using the DV IN Terminal (i.LINK)  
Refer to the user’s manual provided with the camcorder for  
information on the procedure for connecting the camcorder  
with this Recorder.  
The Recorder  
• There are some digital camcorders which cannot be  
operated using the On-Screen Control Panel of this  
Recorder, even if you set “DV LINK” under “DV SETTING”  
to “ON”. In cases like this, set “DV LINK” to “OFF”. (page  
104)  
• When this Recorder is connected to a camcorder  
equipped with a DV terminal, the signal may not be input  
to this Recorder depending on the camcorder. When this  
happens, use an analog connection (page 97).  
(Use analog connection when using the VL-DC3U video  
camera made by Sharp.)  
To DV IN terminal  
Digital camcorder  
To DV terminal  
DV cable  
(commercially available)  
Before connecting, set the power  
switch of the digital camcorder to  
“Video (Playback)” and stop the  
camcorder.  
• The DV IN terminal is not compatible with connection to a  
PC.  
• This Recorder cannot be controlled from other equipment  
connected to the DV IN terminal.  
• Only one camcorder can be connected to this Recorder  
using the DV IN terminal.  
• Connect this Recorder and the camcorder directly. The  
DV signal will not be input if the camcorder is connected  
to this Recorder through other equipment with a DV IN  
terminal.  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Select  
                                           
|
                                           
on the On-screen Control Panel to  
Recording from External Equipment  
Recording with This Recorder (DV  
Important!  
Capture)  
Abnormal images may be recorded or the Recorder  
enters the Pause mode when any of the following  
1 Press HDD or DVD to select the media to  
occur during DV capture.  
record to.  
• When the connected equipment plays back a portion  
where nothing is recorded or video containing a copy  
guard signal.  
• When the DV cable is disconnected or the camcorder  
power is turned off during DV capture.  
• When playback from the camcorder is stopped.  
2 Select audio to be input from the digital  
camcorder.  
• Before starting recording, check setting of “DV  
AUDIO INPUT” using “DV SETTING” (page 104).  
3 Press INPUT to select “DV”.  
• The setting will cycle as follows each time you press  
the button.  
L1 (IN 1) L2 (IN 2)  
TV channels DV (DV IN) L3 (IN 3)  
4 Perform digital camcorder playback.  
to select the desired button on  
• Press  
                                  
'
                                  
/
                                      
"
                                      
/
                                         
\
                                         
/
                                            
|
                                            
the On-screen Control Panel, then press SET/  
ENTER to operate.  
When “DV LINK” is set to “ON”  
DV LINK (ENABLES CONTROL OF DV CAMCORDER)  
PLAYBACK  
00 : 00 : 10  
PLAYBACK  
ENTER  
EXIT  
EXIT  
SELECT  
ENTER  
start playback, then press SET/ENTER.  
• If you press EXIT on the remote control, the On-  
screen Control Panel will disappear. To display it  
again, press ON SCREEN (under the cover).  
5 Press ●REC when you reach the scene you  
want to start recording.  
• The Recorder will start recording.  
6 Press REC PAUSE when you want to pause  
recording.  
• Press REC PAUSE again to cancel pause.  
7 Press REC STOP when you want to stop  
(end) recording.  
NOTE  
• Material protected with a copy guard cannot be recorded.  
• Date and time data as well as the contents of cassette  
memory cannot be recorded.  
• There are some digital camcorders which cannot be  
operated using the On-screen Control Panel, even when  
“DV LINK” is set to “ON”. In such cases, set it to “OFF”.  
(See page 104.)  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording from External Equipment  
1
2
Press HDD or DVD to select the media to  
Recording from a Camcorder  
(VCR) Using an Analog  
Connection  
record to.  
Select audio to be input from the external  
equipment.  
To record to HDD  
• Switch audio of the external equipment to the audio  
you want to capture.  
To record to DVD  
• Select audio using “EXTERNAL AUDIO” (page 98).  
• Select “L CH” or “R CH” with “DUAL MONO REC.  
SET” (page 98) to record in Video mode.  
DVD-RW  
DVD-RW  
HDD  
DVD-R  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
Material from a camcorder can be recorded with this  
Recorder using an analog connection. You can capture  
video by connecting a camcorder or VCR to the LINE IN 1,  
2 or 3 jacks of this Recorder.  
NOTE  
3
Press INPUT to set the connection to exter-  
nal input channel (example: L3).  
• The setting will cycle as follows each time you press  
the button.  
• More vivid images can be viewed by connecting the S-  
VIDEO IN jack on this Recorder with the S-video Out jack  
on the camcorder using an S-video cable.  
• Some camcorders may be required to be connected  
using a special cable.  
L1 (IN 1) L2 (IN 2)  
• Refer to the operation manual provided with the  
camcorder for further information on the procedure for  
connecting the camcorder.  
• Material protected with a copy guard cannot be re-  
corded. It may be impossible to get the correct video,  
even if you just view without recording.  
• Date and time as well as the contents of cassette memory  
cannot be recorded with this Recorder.  
• If you input video from an external equipment to this  
Recorder, there will be a slight difference in image quality  
between the video viewed from the external equipment  
directly on the TV, and video viewed as external input to  
the Recorder.  
TV channels DV (DV IN) L3 (IN 3)  
4
5
Play back the camcorder or VCR.  
Press ●REC when you reach the scene you  
want to start recording.  
• The Recorder starts recording.  
6
7
Press REC PAUSE when you want to pause  
recording.  
• Press REC PAUSE again to cancel Pause mode.  
Press REC STOP when you want to stop  
(end) recording.  
Example:  
To record by connecting a camcorder to the LINE IN 3  
jacks.  
The Recorder  
To S-VIDEO  
Input jack  
To VIDEO/AUDIO  
Input jacks  
S-video cable  
(commercially  
available)  
Video/audio cable  
(provided with camcorder or  
commercially available)  
To S-video  
output jack  
To video/audio  
output jack  
Camcorder  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Setting  
Settings of This Recorder  
This section explains various settings relating to recording and playback which can be used to get more out of the Recorder.  
• For details about each setting, see the corresponding pages.  
REC. FUNCTION s page 98  
VIEW/PLAY SETTING s page 100  
ADJUSTMENT s page 102  
INITIALIZE/FINALIZE s page 106  
REC. FUNCTION  
AUTO CHAPTER  
• This sets the interval of automatic chapter setting during recording.  
• Chapter marks set on a DVD-R/RW in Video mode cannot be combined by editing, so  
select an appropriate interval.  
10 (10 min interval)  
15 (15 min interval)  
30 (30 min interval)  
- - (off)  
EXACT RECORDING  
• This function works when timer recording (Easy Recording Guide/VCR Plus+/Timer  
Program) onto DVD-R/RW. If disc capacity runs low, and the program cannot be  
recorded to the end, this function will automatically change the recording mode so the  
program will fit.  
YES  
NO  
(The recording mode set in above situation will have lower picture quality than the  
originally set recording mode.)  
• If there is very little disc capacity left on the disc, the program may not fit even if Exact  
Recording is set.  
• When recording in EP or MN1 mode, there is no lower recording mode, so Exact  
Recording will not work.  
REC. AUDIO FORMAT  
• PCM: If you record by setting the recording mode to “FINE” or “MN32”, you can record  
audio as PCM (uncompressed) audio which can be played back with 2ch audio  
equipment.  
PCM  
DD 2CH  
* This will not work when recording with the recording mode set to anything other than  
“FINE” or “MN32”.  
* Recording is done with a recording mode whose image quality is slightly lower than  
FINE mode recorded with the “DD 2CH” setting.  
• DD 2CH: Records audio as Dolby Digital 2ch audio.  
EXTERNAL AUDIO  
• This selects audio to be input from an external equipment.  
STEREO: Recording standard stereo sound.  
DUAL MONO: Recording the sound that each channel carries as a separate sound.  
STEREO  
DUAL MONO  
DUAL MONO REC. SET  
• This lets you select whether to record the left or right audio channel when recording an L CH  
external source onto DVD-R/RW in Video mode.  
* This does not apply when recording from the DV IN terminal.  
R CH  
MANUAL REC. MODE  
• If you set by selecting one of the 32 picture quality levels for “MN”, recording will be  
done at that picture quality when “MN” is selected using REC MODE on the remote  
control. For details, see page 42.  
32 levels  
SAP SETTING  
• If you set this to “ON” while receiving a SAP (Separate Audio Program) broadcast, you  
can listen to and record the SAP audio. For details on ON/OFF setting, the audio you  
can listen to, and the audio you can record, see “About SAP” on page 99.  
ON  
OFF  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Setting  
About SAP  
Basic Operation for  
This Recorder can record stereo or SAP  
(Separate Audio Program) broadcasts, where  
available. If the broadcast is in stereo, the  
Recorder automatically records the stereo  
sound. If the broadcast is in SAP, you can  
record both the MAIN and the SAP sounds. If  
the broadcast is in stereo/SAP, you can  
record either the SAP sound by setting the  
SAP mode to “ON”, or stereo sound by  
setting the SAP mode to “OFF”.  
REC FUNCTION Setting  
This operation is available in both HDD mode  
and DVD mode.  
Example: Setting “EXTERNAL AUDIO” under  
“REC. FUNCTION”  
1 1 Press START MENU to  
display START MENU screen.  
2 Press '/"/\/|to select  
“OTHER SETTINGS”, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
SAP Broadcast  
The monitor output listed in the table shows  
the audio output mode. The contents of audio  
recording are different between VR mode and  
Video mode. See the table below for details.  
[
]
START MENU OTHER SETTINGS  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
EDIT/  
ERASE  
REC LIST  
DUBBING  
TIMER  
PROGRAM/  
CHECK  
INITIALIZE/  
FINALIZE  
OTHER  
SETTINGS  
Broadcast  
Received/SAP  
ON or OFF  
AUDIO  
OUTPUT  
AUDIO Recording  
Mode  
DISPLAYS SET ITEMS BEFORE REC/PLAYBACK  
L
R
L
R
INFORMATION  
+
MONO L+R  
L+R  
R
L+R  
SAP  
L+R  
R
L+R  
L
L+R  
SAP  
L+R  
L
L+R  
R
L+R  
SAP  
L+R  
R
STEREO SAP  
SAP OFF  
L R  
MAIN L+R  
L
+
STEREO SAP  
2 Press \/| to select “REC.  
SAP ON  
SAP  
MONO L+R  
L R  
MONO L+R  
L R  
L+R  
FUNCTION”.  
STEREO  
SAP OFF  
[
]
OTHER SETTINGS REC. FUNCTION  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
L
REC. FUNCTION  
VIEW/PLAY SETTING ADJUSTMENT  
L+R  
R
L+R  
L
L+R  
R
STEREO  
SAP ON  
AUTO CHAPTER  
EXACT RECORDING  
REC. AUDIO FORMAT  
EXTERNAL AUDIO  
DUAL MONO REC. SET  
MANUAL REC. MODE  
SAP SETTING  
L
+
MONO MONO MONO MONO MONO  
L R MONO MONO MONO MONO  
MAIN MONO MONO MONO MONO  
SAP MONO SAP SAP SAP  
MONO MONO MONO MONO MONO  
L R MONO MONO MONO MONO  
MONO MONO MONO MONO MONO  
L R MONO MONO MONO MONO  
MONO SAP  
SAP OFF  
+
MONO SAP  
SAP ON  
MONO  
SAP OFF  
3 Press '/" to select “EXTERNAL  
MONO  
SAP ON  
AUDIO”, then press SET/ENTER.  
: When recording to a DVD-R/RW disc in Video mode,  
the SAP channel is recorded on this channel.  
When recording audio in the PCM format with the  
recording mode set to “FINE” or “MN32”, audio is  
recorded in the same format as recorded to DVD-  
R/RW disc in Video mode.  
[
]
OTHER SETTINGS REC. FUNCTION  
REC. FUNCTION  
12/25 THU 10:28 PM  
VIEW/PLAY SETTING ADJUSTMENT  
AUTO CHAPTER  
EXACT RECORDING  
REC. AUDIO FORMAT  
EXTERNAL AUDIO  
DUAL MONO REC. SET  
MANUAL REC. MODE  
SAP SETTING  
• When a disc recorded in monaural audio is  
played back, monaural audio is played  
back even though “STEREO” is displayed  
on the screen.  
4 Press \/|to select the option  
you want to set, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
[
]
OTHER SETTINGS EXTERNAL AUDIO  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
SELECT EXTERNAL AUDIO MODE WHEN  
RECORDING.FROM EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT.  
STEREO  
DUAL MONO  
n
RETURN  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
5 Press EXIT to exit from External  
Audio Setting.  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Setting  
VIEW/PLAY SETTING  
PASSWORD  
•This sets the password for setting or changing Parental Control.  
PASSWORD  
SETTING  
4 digit number  
OFF, LEVEL 1-8  
DVD PLAY  
SETTING  
PARENTAL CONTROL  
•This lets you set Parental Control depending on disc content.  
•Level 1: For most restricted viewing → Level 8: For adult viewing  
(The smaller the number, the greater the level of restriction.)  
•When “PARENTAL CONTROL” is set to “OFF”, DVD discs can be  
played back regardless of the parental level.  
COUNTRY CODE  
* Refer to the Country  
Code List below.  
The parental level for USA is as follows.  
Level 7: NC-17  
Level 3: PG  
Level 6: R Level 4: PG13  
Level 1: G  
The parental level set up for Canada is prepared for future use. As for  
the set up of an appropriate level, please check the level when you  
purchase your DVD disc equipped with the parental control feature.  
•Parental Control cannot be set if a password has not been set.  
DISC LANGUAGE  
•This lets you select the language for subtitle, audio and menu  
displayed on the screen.  
SUBTITLE  
AUDIO  
MENU  
* Refer to the  
Language Code  
List below.  
Country Code List  
USA  
UK  
HOLLAND  
NORWAY  
DENMARK  
FINLAND  
BELGIUM  
HONG KONG  
SINGAPORE  
THAILAND  
MALAYSIA  
INDONESIA  
TAIWAN  
CANADA  
JAPAN  
ITALY  
SPAIN  
PHILIPPINE  
AUSTRALIA  
RUSSIA  
GERMANY  
FRANCE  
SWISS  
SWEDEN  
CHINA  
Language Code List  
AA Afar  
EU Basque  
KK Kazakh  
OM Afan (Oromo)  
OR Oriya  
PA Panjabi  
SW Swahili  
TA Tamil  
TE Telugu  
TG Tajik  
TH Thai  
TI Tigrinya  
TK Turkmen  
AB Abkhazian  
AF Afrikaans  
AM Ameharic  
AR Arabic  
AS Assamese  
AY Aymara  
AZ Azerbaijani  
BA Bashkir  
BE Byelorussian  
BG Bulgarian  
BH Bihari  
BI Bislama  
BN Bengali, Bangla  
BO Tibetan  
BR Breton  
CA Catalan  
CO Corsican  
CS Czech  
FA Persian  
FI Finnish  
FJ Fiji  
FO Faroese  
FR French  
KL Greenlandic  
KM Cambodian  
KN Kannada  
KO Korean  
KS Kashmiri  
KU Kurdish  
KY Kirghiz  
PL Polish  
PS Pashto, Pushto  
PT Portuguese  
QU Quechua  
RM Rhaeto-Romance TL Tagalog  
RN Kirundi  
RO Romanian  
RU Russian  
RW Kinyarwanda  
SA Sanskrit  
SD Sindhi  
SG Sangho  
SH Serbo-Croatian  
SI Singhalese  
SK Slovak  
FY Frisian  
GA Irish  
GD Scots Gaelic  
GL Galician  
GN Guarani  
GU Gujarati  
HA Hausa  
LA Latin  
LN Lingala  
TN Setswana  
TO Tonga  
TR Turkish  
TS Tsonga  
TT Tatar  
TW Twi  
UK Ukrainian  
UR Urdu  
UZ Uzbek  
VI Vietnamese  
VO Volapkü  
WO Wolof  
XH Xhosa  
YO Yoruba  
ZH Chinese  
ZU Zulu  
LO Laothian  
LT Lithuanian  
LV Latvian, Lettish  
MG Malagasy  
MI Maori  
MK Macedonian  
ML Malayalam  
MN Mongolian  
MO Moldavian  
MR Marathi  
HI Hindi  
HR Croatian  
HU Hungarian  
HY Armenian  
IA Interlingua  
IE Interlingue  
IK Inupiak  
IN Indonesian  
IS Icelandic  
IT Italian  
IW Hebrew  
JA Japanese  
JI Yiddish  
JW Javanese  
KA Georgian  
SL Slovenian  
SM Samoan  
SN Shona  
CY Welsh  
DA Danish  
DE German  
DZ Bhutani  
EL Greek  
MS Malay  
MT Maltese  
MY Burmese  
NA Nauru  
NE Nepali  
NL Dutch  
SO Somali  
SQ Albanian  
SR Serbian  
SS Siswat  
ST Sesotho  
SU Sundanese  
SV Swedish  
EN English  
EO Esperanto  
ES Spanish  
ET Estonian  
NO Norwegian  
OC Occitan  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Setting  
Password Setting  
Basic Operation for  
VIEW/PLAY SETTING  
This operation is available in both HDD mode  
and DVD mode.  
1 Select “PASSWORD SETTING” in  
step 3, then press SET/ENTER.  
2 Press \/|to select “YES”, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
3 Press Number buttons to input 4  
digit password, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
4 Press Number buttons to input  
password for confirmation, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
5 Press SET/ENTER at the “OK”  
screen.  
Example: Setting “DVD PLAY SETTING”  
under “VIEW/PLAY SETTING”  
1 1 Press START MENU to  
display START MENU screen.  
2 Press '/"/ \/|to select  
“OTHER SETTINGS”, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
[
]
START MENU OTHER SETTINGS  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
NOTE  
EDIT/  
ERASE  
REC LIST  
DUBBING  
If you forget your password  
•If you forget your password, and you wish  
to return the password to its initial state,  
press ■STOP/LIVE 4 times in a row at the  
Password Setting screen.  
TIMER  
PROGRAM/  
CHECK  
INITIALIZE/  
FINALIZE  
OTHER  
SETTINGS  
DISPLAYS SET ITEMS BEFORE REC/PLAYBACK  
INFORMATION  
Disc Language Setting  
•You can set subtitle language, audio  
language and menu language.  
2 Press \/|to select “VIEW/PLAY  
SETTING”, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
[
]
OTHER SETTINGS VIEW/PLAY SETTING  
REC. FUNCTION VIEW/PLAY SETTING  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
ADJUSTMENT  
1 Select “DISC LANGUAGE” in step 4,  
then press SET/ENTER.  
PASSWORD SETTING  
DVD PLAY SETTING  
2 Press \/|to select subtitle  
language, then press SET/ENTER.  
3 Press \/|to select audio lan-  
guage, then press SET/ENTER.  
4 Press \/|to select menu lan-  
guage, then press SET/ENTER.  
3 Press '/" to select “DVD PLAY  
SETTING”, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
[
]
OTHER SETTINGS VIEW/PLAY SETTING  
REC. FUNCTION VIEW/PLAY SETTING  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
ADJUSTMENT  
PASSWORD SETTING  
DVD PLAY SETTING  
4 Press '/" to select “PAREN-  
TAL CONTROL”, then press  
SET/ENTER.  
•The password input screen appears.  
It changes to the following screen  
after you input your password and  
press SET/ENTER.  
[
]
OTHER SETTINGS DVD PLAY SETTING  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
PARENTAL CONTROL  
DISC LANGUAGE  
SETS THE PARENTAL CONTROL OF DVD VIDEO  
SET THE PARENTAL CONTROL LEVEL  
OFF  
SET THE COUNTRY CODE  
USA  
n
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
5 Press \/|to select the desired  
parental control level, then press  
SET/ENTER.  
6 Press \/|to select the country  
code, then press SET/ENTER.  
7 Press EXIT to exit from Parental  
Control Setting screen.  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Setting  
ADJUSTMENT  
AUTO SETTING/MANUAL SETTING  
CLOCK  
SETTING  
•Before timer programming, check that the clock is set correctly, and  
set it correctly if it is not. If the clock is not set correctly, you cannot  
perform setting for features like VCR Plus+ programming.  
•Setting methods are slightly different from basic operation. See page  
30.  
AUTO SETTING  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
TIME ZONE  
MANUAL SETTIING  
TIME: XX:XX  
DATE: Month/Day  
YEAR: XXXX  
DST: ON/OFF  
VIDEO/  
AUDIO SET-  
TING  
TV MODE  
WIDE 16:9  
•If you switch your TV (i.e. because you have bought a new one) and  
the screen size of the connected TV changes, you will have to change  
the “TV MODE” setting.  
NORMAL 4:3  
LETTER BOX  
PAN SCAN  
•You can set the screen aspect ratio of the connected TV, and adjust  
video output.  
•Select “TV MODE” from “VIDEO/AUDIO SETTING”.  
WIDE 16:9:  
Select this when connecting with a TV with a 16:9  
screen aspect ratio.  
NORMAL 4:3: Select this when connecting with a TV with a 4:3 screen  
aspect ratio.  
LETTER BOX: If you connect with a TV whose screen aspect ratio is  
4:3 and playback a DVD with 16:9 video, the video will  
be played back with black bands at the top and bottom,  
while maintaining the 16:9 ratio.  
PAN SCAN: If you connect with a TV whose screen aspect ratio is  
4:3 and playback a DVD with 16:9 video, the video will  
be played back with the left and right sides of the image  
cut off to display in 4:3 screen aspect ratio.  
(This function works if the disc is labeled for 4:3PS.)  
CONNECTING TERMINAL  
•If you switch your TV (i.e. because you have bought a new one) and  
you change the TV terminal to which you connect, you will have to  
change the “CONNECTING TERMINAL” setting.  
•For details on connection with a TV, and connecting terminals, please  
see pages 22 to 25.  
VIDEO/S-VIDEO  
COMPONENT  
•“PROGRESSIVE OUT” can be set when you have selected “COMPO-  
NENT”.  
PROGRESSIVE OUT  
PROGRESSIVE  
SCAN ON  
•If you connect with the component terminal of a progressive compat-  
ible TV, playback of DVD video will be cleaner, with less flicker.  
•If you connect with a TV which is not progressive compatible, select  
“PROGRESSIVE SCAN OFF”.  
PROGRESSIVE  
SCAN OFF  
* If you connect with a TV which is not progressive compatible and set  
to “PROGRESSIVE SCAN ON”, video playback from the DVD will not  
be output to the TV.  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT  
•You can set this to enjoy Dolby Digital Surround when connecting with  
digital input compatible device using digital cable.  
PCM  
Dolby Digital  
PCM:  
This setting is for when you digitally connect with 2ch  
audio device or an MD recorder. This changes Dolby  
Digital audio to PCM (uncompressed) output which can  
be played back with 2ch audio device.  
Dolby Digital: This setting is for when you digitally connect with audio  
device which is compatible with Dolby Digital (5.1ch).  
You can also enjoy DTS audio if you connect with an  
amplifier or other component which is compatible with  
DTS digital surround.  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Setting  
ADJUSTMENT  
DD OUTPUT LEVEL  
•This lets you adjust the range between the loudest and softest sound  
(dynamic range), and play back at the average volume. Use this  
when it is hard to hear dialog.  
VIDEO/  
AUDIO SET-  
TING  
NO  
YES  
NO:  
YES*:  
This outputs recorded audio as is.  
This raises the average volume when playing back  
Dolby Digital audio so that the volume sounds the same as  
an audio CD. (If the audio sounds abnormal, set to “NO”.)  
* Lower the volume before setting. If you do not do so, the speaker  
may emit a loud sound, or excessive input may be applied to the  
speaker.  
3D Y/C SEPARATION  
•This setting enables cleaner viewing and recording of TV broadcasts,  
and video from equipment connected to external input jacks (termi-  
nals).  
YES  
NO  
YES:  
This enables recording with higher picture quality.  
(Normally this is set to “YES”.)  
NO:  
Set this to “NO” if the picture looks abnormal when  
receiving a weak broadcast signal, or when the picture is  
disturbed because you have connected VCR or game  
equipment to the external input terminals of the Re-  
corder.  
* This will not work with video input from the DV IN terminal or S-VIDEO  
jack (terminal).  
DNR (DIGITAL NOISE REDUCTION)  
•This lets you reduce noise for an easier to view picture when noise in  
the played back image is bothering you. It is recommended to set this  
to “ON” when playing back video recorded in long play modes like LP  
mode or EP mode, and to “OFF” when playing back discs with little  
noise (like DVD video).  
ON  
OFF  
CHANNEL  
PRESET  
SELECT RECEPTION TYPE FORMAT  
•This sets the type of TV broadcast received (AIR or CATV).  
AIR  
CATV  
SELECT CHANNEL PRESET METHOD  
•This sets whether to perform channel setting automatically or  
manually.  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
HI SP DUB PRIORITY  
•To perform high speed dubbing from the HDD to a DVD in Video  
mode, set this to “YES” before recording to the HDD.  
OPTION  
SETTING  
YES  
NO  
•If you wish to edit in frame units, set this to “NO”. For details of “HIGH  
SPEED DUBBING PRIORITY”, refer to page 58.  
SEAMLESS PLAYBACK  
•This setting is for smoother playback of the transitions between  
scenes when you have edited an original title or play list. (The  
transition point may shift about one second.)  
YES  
NO  
Continued on Next Page |||  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Setting  
ADJUSTMENT  
ALTERNATE RECORDING  
•This function is for switching recording to HDD when you originally set  
to record to DVD-R/RW but could not because of the disc situation.  
This function works in the following cases.  
OPTION  
SETTING  
YES  
NO  
*1 When there is not enough disc capacity left in DVD.  
2 When a disc which cannot record is loaded.  
3 When you forget to load a disc.  
4 When a disc is playing within 2 minutes prior to the start of timer  
recording.  
* In case 1, when the remaining capacity of HDD is less than  
that of DVD, the recording will continue on to DVD.  
LCD BACKLIGHT REC.  
•This sets whether to turn the LCD backlight on or off during timer  
NO  
YES  
recording.  
NO:  
This sets so that the LCD backlight remains lit, even during timer  
recording.  
YES:  
This lets you turn off the LCD backlight only when the power is off  
(standby state) and timer recording starts. It is convenient to set this,  
for example, when the light disturbs your sleep.  
AUTO POWER OFF  
•This sets the Recorder so that power is automatically shut off if it is in  
stopped state for about 3 hours.  
YES  
NO  
BLUE SCREEN  
•This lets you set so that noise on the TV screen is automatically  
switched to a blue screen if you select a channel broadcast of which  
is finished, or a channel with no broadcast.  
OFF  
ON  
DV SETTING  
•This lets you operate the connected digital camcorder from the  
DV LINK  
Recorder when capturing video into the Recorder via a DV connec-  
OFF  
tion. You can also select the type of audio to be captured from the  
camcorder.  
DV LINK  
OFF:  
Select this when you cannot operate the camcorder properly with  
the On-screen Control Panel.  
ON:  
ON  
DV AUDIO INPUT  
STEREO 1  
STEREO 2  
STEREO 1  
+ STEREO 2  
This lets you operate the camcorder using the On-screen Control  
Panel.  
DV AUDIO INPUT  
STEREO 1*:  
This lets you capture audio you recorded with the camcorder.  
STEREO 2*:  
This lets you capture camcorders’ audio you recorded using after  
recording.  
STEREO 1 + STEREO 2*:  
This lets you simultaneously capture audio from stereo 1 and audio  
from stereo 2.  
* When the connected digital camcorders’ audio output is set to 16  
bit, this setting will be invalid.  
DVD DISC PROTECTION  
•This protects the disc so you do not mistakenly record on it or erase  
its content.  
NOT PROTECT  
PROTECT  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Setting  
Basic Operation for  
ADJUSTMENT Setting  
Example: Setting “VIDEO/AUDIO SETTING”  
under “ADJUSTMENT”  
1 1 Press START MENU to  
display START MENU screen.  
2 Press '/"/ \/|to select  
“OTHER SETTINGS”, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
[
]
START MENU OTHER SETTINGS  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
EDIT/  
ERASE  
REC LIST  
DUBBING  
TIMER  
PROGRAM/  
CHECK  
INITIALIZE/  
FINALIZE  
OTHER  
SETTINGS  
DISPLAYS SET ITEMS BEFORE REC/PLAYBACK  
INFORMATION  
2 Press \/|to select “ADJUST-  
MENT”.  
OTHER SETTINGS ADJUSTMENT  
[
]
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
REC. FUNCTION  
VIEW/PLAY SETTING ADJUSTMENT  
CLOCK SETTING  
VIDEO/AUDIO SETTING  
CHANNEL PRESET  
OPTION SETTING  
3 Press '/" to select the setting  
you want to set, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
[
]
OTHER SETTINGS ADJUSTMENT  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
REC. FUNCTION  
VIEW/PLAY SETTING ADJUSTMENT  
CLOCK SETTING  
VIDEO/AUDIO SETTING  
CHANNEL PRESET  
OPTION SETTING  
4 1 Press '/" to select the item  
you want to select, then press  
SET/ENTER.  
[
]
OTHER SETTINGS VIDEO/AUDIO SETTING  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
TV MODE  
CONNECTING TERMINAL  
PROGRESSIVE OUT  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT  
DD OUTPUT LEVEL  
3D Y/C SEPARATION  
DNR  
SETS PROGRESSIVE SCAN OUTPUT  
YOU CAN ENJOY CLEAR IMAGES  
WHEN PROGRESSIVE TV IS PLAYED  
BACK VIA COMPONENT TERMINAL  
PROGRESSIVE SCAN  
ON  
PROGRESSIVE SCAN  
OFF  
n
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
2 Press \/|to select the de-  
sired option, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
5 Press EXIT to exit.  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Setting  
Initialization  
Before recording to DVD-RW, initialize the disc in VR mode  
or Video mode.  
Finalization  
Finalization is done so that a recorded DVD-R/RW disc can  
be played back with other recorders.  
You can also initialize the HDD. Initialize the HDD only after  
dubbing important recordings onto DVD-R/RW disc(s).  
INITIALIZE  
DVD VR MODE INIT.  
INITIALIZE  
•When recording with a DVD-RW in VR mode, initialize in VR mode  
before you start recording.  
YES  
NO  
(When you initialize, all of the recorded content of the disc is erased.  
Before initializing, check the content of the disc so that you do not  
erase any content you need.)  
•You cannot initialize if “DVD DISC PROTECTION” is set to  
“PROTECT”. (page 104)  
DVD VIDEO MODE INIT.  
YES  
NO  
•When recording with a DVD-RW disc in Video mode, initialize in Video  
mode before you start recording.  
(When you initialize, all of the recorded content of the disc is erased.  
Before initializing, check the content of the disc so that you do not  
erase any content you need.)  
•You cannot erase with DVD-R disc.  
AUTO INITIALIZE  
•This sets the Recorder so it automatically initializes any unused DVD-  
RW discs which are loaded into the Recorder.  
You can initialize in either VR mode or Video mode.  
VR  
VIDEO  
HDD INITIALIZE  
YES  
NO  
•If an HDD error message is displayed, or if you wish to return the HDD  
to the state it was in when the Recorder was purchased, initialize the  
HDD. All recorded video will be erased. (If you use the “ERASE ALL  
TITLES” function to erase the titles, protected titles will remain, but if  
you use the HDD initializing function, all titles will be erased.)  
Dub any important recordings to DVD-R/RW disc(s) before initializing  
the HDD.  
FINALIZE  
DVD FINALIZE  
•Set this when you want to playback a VR mode or Video mode disc  
using another recorder capable of playback.  
DVD  
FINALIZE  
YES  
NO  
If you finalize a recording on DVD-R disc, you will not be able to  
record any more on the disc.  
•Finalization can take anywhere from a few minutes to one hour.  
During finalization, all types of operation are disabled (including  
turning off power and removing the disc).  
•Do not unplug the power cord during finalization. Doing so may make  
the disc unusable.  
UNDO DVD FINALIZE  
YES  
NO  
•This resets a finalized DVD-RW disc so you can record on it again.  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Setting  
4 1 Press \/|to select “YES”,  
then press SET/ENTER.  
• Initializing (or finalizing) will be  
executed.  
Basic Operation for  
INITIALIZE/FINALIZE  
Example: Setting “DVD VR MODE INIT.” (VR  
INITIALIZE  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
mode)  
DVD VR MODE INIT.  
DVD VIDEO MODE INIT.  
AUTO INITIALIZE  
INITIALIZING  
HDD INITIALIZE  
1 1 Press START MENU to  
display START MENU screen.  
2 Press '/"/ \/|to select  
“INITIALIZE/FINALIZE”, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
[
]
START MENU INITIALIZE/FINALIZE  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
EDIT/  
ERASE  
REC LIST  
DUBBING  
INITIALIZE  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
TIMER  
PROGRAM/  
CHECK  
INITIALIZE/  
FINALIZE  
OTHER  
SETTINGS  
DVD VR MODE INIT.  
DVD VIDEO MODE INIT.  
AUTO INITIALIZE  
INITIALIZING COMPLETED  
INITIALIZES HDD/DVD AND FINALIZES DVD  
HDD INITIALIZE  
INFORMATION  
2 Press '/" to select “INITIAL-  
IZE” or “FINALIZE”, then press  
SET/ENTER.  
OK  
ENTER  
ENTER  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
INITIALIZE/FINALIZE  
• Initializing (or finalizing) will be  
completed.  
2 Press SET/ENTER.  
• Screen in step 2 appears.  
REVERTS DISC TO UNUSED STATE  
(ALL STORED DATA ERASED).  
INITIALIZE  
5 Press EXIT to exit from INITIAL-  
ENABLES PLAYBACK OF RECORDED  
DVD DISC ON OTHER DVD PLAYERS.  
DVD FINALIZE  
IZE/FINALIZE screen.  
NOTE  
n
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
• Finalization processing will take anywhere  
from a few minutes to about an hour.  
(Processing will take time if there is a lot of  
empty space or if there are many titles on  
the DVD disc.)  
3 Press '/" to select “DVD VR  
MODE INIT.”, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
INITIALIZE  
12/25 SAT 10:28 AM  
DVD VR MODE INIT.  
DVD VIDEO MODE INIT.  
AUTO INITIALIZE  
AFTER RECORDING, IT IS POSSIBLE TO  
USE A VARIETY OF EDITING FUNCTIONS  
TO CUSTOMIZE YOUR VIDEO.  
HDD INITIALIZE  
INITIALIZE DVD?  
YES  
NO  
n
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
The following problems do not always suggest a defect or malfunction of this Recorder.  
Perform the checks listed below before calling service.  
Problem  
Suggested Solution  
The Recorder power does not turn on.  
•
•
Is the power cord firmly plugged into the AC outlet?  
If the power cord is plugged into the outlet, unplug it once, wait about one minute, and then plug it in again.  
Then turn power on.  
The Recorder sounds like it is operating, even when power is  
turned off.  
•
This is the sound the Recorder makes during operation like timer recording.  
The disc is automatically ejected after closing the disc tray.  
•
•
•
•
Make sure that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up).  
Take out the disc and clean it.  
Make sure that region number on the disc match the region number in this Recorder.  
Make sure that the disc is playable.  
No picture.  
•
•
•
•
•
Make sure that the cables are connected correctly.  
Make sure that the connected TV or the AV amplifier is set to the correct input.  
Take out the disc and clean it.  
Make sure that region number on the disc match the region number in this Recorder.  
If you set to “PROGRESSIVE SCAN ON”, non-broadcast video signals will not be output from terminals other  
than COMPONENT Output jacks.(Page 102)  
The Recorder does not play a disc.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Take out the disc and clean it.  
Make sure that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up).  
Make sure that region number on the disc match the region number in this Recorder.  
Remove the dew in the Recorder.  
Check that the disc is recorded in NTSC format.  
The Recorder cannot playback video which was not recorded normally.  
Proper playback may be impossible due to the state of the disc recording, a scratched, warped or dirty disc, the  
state of the pick-up, or compatibility issues between this Recorder and the disc being used.  
Settings have disappeared.  
•
If, while its power is on, the Recorder is unplugged (or there is a power failure) for more than about 1 hour, the  
settings will be lost. Make sure that you turn off the Recorder before unplugging the power cord.  
Screen freezes and operation buttons do not work.  
•
•
•
Press ■STOP/LIVE and restart playback.  
Turn off the power and turn on the power again.  
If power does not go off, press the RESET button inside the front door of the Recorder.(Page 110)  
The remote control does not work.  
No sound or sound is distorted.  
•
•
•
•
Is the Tamper Proof function active?(Page 38)  
Set the remote control and the Recorder to the same remote control code.(Page 21)  
Use the remote control within its operating range.  
Replace the batteries.  
•
•
•
If the volume of TV or amplifier is set to minimum, turn the volume up.  
There is no sound during still mode, slow motion playback, fast forward and fast reverse.  
DVD audio recorded in DTS is only output from the DIGITAL AUDIO Output terminals. Connect a DTS-  
compatible digital amplifier or decoder to the DIGITAL AUDIO Output OPTICAL or COAXIAL terminal on this  
Recorder.  
•
•
•
•
Check that the audio cable is connected correctly.  
Check that the cable plugs are clean.  
Take out the disc and clean it.  
Audio may not be output depending on the audio recording status, such as when audio other than an audio  
signal or non-standard audio is recorded for the audio content of the disc.  
The picture from external input is distorted.  
•
If the signal is copy-protected, you cannot connect via this Recorder. Connect the external equipment directly  
to your TV.  
The screen is stretched vertically or  
horizontally.  
•
•
Set the TV mode according to the TV you are connecting.(Page 102)  
If the above operation does not set the TV mode, set it using the functions of the connected TV.  
A disc recorded using this Recorder cannot be played back  
on another DVD player.  
•
•
•
Check that the disc is finalized when the disc is in video mode.  
Some players will not play even a finalized disc.  
If the disc was recorded in VR mode, it can only be played back with an RW compatible player. (In some  
cases, the disc must be finalized.)  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Suggested Solution  
The playback screen will be disturbed if DVD video is recorded  
to a VCR, or played back through a VCR.  
•
This Recorder is compatible with the copy guard of analog copy protect system. Some discs contain a copy  
prohibiting signal. If you try to playback such a disc through a VCR, or record to a VCR and playback, copy  
guard will prevent normal playback.  
TV operates incorrectly.  
Recording stops.  
•
•
Some TVs with wireless remote control capability may operate incorrectly when using the remote control of  
this Recorder. Use such TV away from this Recorder.  
Recording may stop temporarily at parts where recording is impossible (due to scratches or disc fouling,  
etc.). When recording starts again, the starting part will be recorded as another title. If the disc is in a  
condition where recording is impossible, it is ejected.  
•
When the recording is interrupted, you might lose a few minutes of the recorded content immediately before  
the interrupted point.  
You recorded, but nothing was recorded on disc.  
Cannot record, or recording stops while in progress.  
•
•
If you record a channel with no broadcast (i.e. where the broadcast has ended), recording will be done with  
no video. Likewise, if you record a channel with poor reception, recording may be done with no video.  
Clean the disc.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Check whether there is enough empty space on the disc being recorded to.  
Check whether the disc is protected.  
Check whether the number of original titles is 199 (for the HDD) or 99 (for a DVD-R/RW).  
Check whether you are trying to record video whose recording is prohibited.  
Check whether there was a power failure while waiting for (or during) timer recording.  
Clean the disc.  
Proper playback may be impossible due to a scratched, warped or dirty disc, the state of the pick-up, or  
compatibility issues between this Recorder and the disc being used.  
When a digital camcorder is connected to the DV IN terminal,  
video from the camcorder does not appear, or there is no  
sound, or the system operates incorrectly.  
•
•
•
•
•
Check connections.  
Turn off the power of both the Recorder and camcorder once, and then turn it on again.  
Reconnect DV cable.  
Try setting “DV LINK” to “OFF” using “DV SETTING” screen.(Page 104)  
Switch input audio using “DV SETTING” screen.(Page 104)  
Cannot operate the digital camcorder connected to the DV IN  
terminal.  
•
•
Set “DV LINK” to “ON” using “DV SETTING” screen. You can operate using the On-screen Control Panel.  
Operation may be impossible, depending on the connected camcorder.  
Video is disturbed (looks abnormal) during external input or  
when receiving a broadcast with poor reception.  
•
Use with “3D Y/C SEPARATION” set to “NO”.(Page 103)  
Erase and edit are impossible.  
There is no video and no audio.  
•
When the timer dubbing is on standby, you cannot edit the content being dubbed.  
•
•
•
•
Is the power cord unplugged from the AC outlet?  
Is power in the “OFF” state?  
Does the broadcast have no video or audio?  
Has the Recorder been switched to external input?  
There is just audio with no video.  
•
Is the connection cable for video output connected properly?  
Horizontally wide video appears vertically tall, or black bands  
appear at the top and bottom of the screen.  
•
•
Is “TV MODE” set to match the connected TV.(Page 102)  
If you are using a wide TV, is the TV mode set to “WIDE 16:9”(Page 102)  
Square noise (mosaic) appears on the screen.  
•
Pictures in blocks may be conspicuous in scenes with rapid movement due to the characteristics of digital  
image compression technology.  
Video stops.  
•
•
Has the Recorder been subjected to shock or impact? Are you using it at an unstable location? The Recorder  
will stop if it senses shock or vibration.  
The picture may be disturbed in very rare cases due to the characteristics of the HDD. This is not a  
malfunction.  
Left and right channels of audio are reversed, or sound comes  
out of only one side.  
•
•
Are left and right audio cables connected to the opposite terminal, or is one side disconnected?  
If the message SET PROGRESSIVE SCAN TO “OFF” appears  
during Other Settings.  
Correctly set “CONNECTING TERMINAL” at “VIDEO/AUDIO SETTING” in “ADJUSTMENT”.(Page 102)  
DVD disc does not play back automatically.  
•
•
Has HDD been selected instead of DVD? Playback will start automatically by switching to DVD.  
Have you set a DVD video disc that has an automatic playback function?  
Continued on Next Page |||  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Suggested Solution  
Timer recording was set, but not executed.  
•
•
•
•
Was there a power failure while standing by for timer recording?  
Is the HDD or DVD full? Erase unnecessary titles from the list.  
Were you performing dubbing?  
If you use the Recorder at a location with low temperature, the HDD may enter the preparation state. Set and  
leave power “ON” for a while before timer recording is performed.  
•
Is the power cord unplugged from the AC outlet?  
The timer recorded content stops in the middle of recording.  
•
•
•
•
•
Was the power plug unplugged, or was there a power failure, during timer recording?  
Is the HDD or DVD full? Erase unnecessary titles from the list.  
Recording will stop if a program whose recording is forbidden begins in the middle of recording.  
Clean the disc.  
If there is a power failure or other power problem during recording to DVD-R/RW, recording will stop in the  
middle. If there is a power failure or other power problem during recording to HDD, that program will be lost.  
A timer recorded program is erased.  
•
The recorded program will be overwritten automatically in “Overwritten Program” setting under “Favorite  
Program”.  
The REC LIST (THUMBNAIL or TITLE LIST) is not displayed.  
•
•
The REC LIST cannot be displayed during Time Shift Viewing or Chasing Playback. Press the ■STOP/  
LIVE button, and return to live viewing.  
If you use the Recorder at a location with low temperature, the HDD may enter the preparation state. Please  
wait a while.  
•
•
There may be a problem with the HDD. Contact the nearest Sharp Authorized Service Center.  
When a CD is recorded to MD using digital connection, the CD  
and MD do not have the same track numbers.  
If the interval between CD tracks is short, the track numbers on the recorded MD may differ from the CD.  
The Recorder makes a sound even when there is no operation.  
•
•
•
•
If you do not operate the Recorder for a certain time while power is ON, you will hear the sound of the HDD  
operating. This is not a malfunction.  
The Recorder heats up during use.  
When using this Recorder, the console cabinet may heat up, depending on the use environment. This is not a  
malfunction.  
The Recorder makes a snapping sound when starting  
recording or playback.  
The Recorder may sometimes make a snapping sound when starting recording or playback if you have not  
operated it for a while. This is the sound of the Recorder operating, and is not a malfunction.  
A blinking “----” appears on the front display panel.  
The clock has not been set. Set the clock.  
NOTE  
• If this Recorder receives strong interference from strong external noise such as excessive static electricity, malfunction of  
power supply voltage caused by lightning during Recorder use or a wrong operation is sent to the Recorder, errors like the  
Recorder not accepting an operation may occur.  
• Press RESET with a toothpick or other narrow rod-like object (nonmetal) when the Recorder does not operate properly  
even after the power has been turned off and then back on again.  
• Since the clock, channel, timer recording programs and other data in memory are also reset when RESET has been  
pressed, they must be set again.  
• EZ Set Up function starts automatically when RESET is pressed.  
• When the problem persists even after pressing RESET, unplug the power  
cord and plug it again. If this does not solve the problem, contact the  
nearest Sharp Authorized Service Center.  
RESET button  
Service Information (For the U.S.)  
For the location of the nearest Sharp Authorized Service Center, or to obtain product literature, accessories, supplies or  
customer assistance, please call 1-800-BE-SHARP (1-800-237-4277) or visit SHARP’s website (http://www.sharpusa.com).  
1. Do not attempt to service this product yourself. Instead, unplug it and contact a qualified service technician.  
(See CONSUMER LIMITED WARRANTY at the end of this manual.)  
2. Be sure the service technician uses authorized replacement parts or their equivalents. Unauthorized parts may cause fire,  
electrical shock, or other hazards.  
3. Following any service or repair, be sure the service technician performs safety checks to certify that this product is in safe  
operating order.  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
On-screen Error Messages  
Messages Relating to DVD Discs and the HDD  
• The following messages appear on the TV screen in case the disc you tried to playback is not appropriate or  
the operation is not correct.  
Error message  
Possible Error  
Suggested Solution  
CANNOT PLAY BACK THIS DISC.  
• The disc cannot be played back with  
this Recorder.  
• Check the disc, and load it correctly.  
THIS IS A NON-STANDARD DISC.  
• If you load a disc which cannot be  
played with this Recorder (i.e. a  
scratched disc), or if you load a disc  
upside down, this message will  
appear, and the disc tray will  
automatically pop out.  
REGION CODE OF DISC IS WRONG.  
DISC IS NOT INSERTED.  
• Occurs if you load a DVD disc whose  
region number is not “ALL” or whose  
region number does not contain “1”.  
• Occurs if no disc is loaded in the disc  
tray.  
CANNOT OPERATE THIS FUNCTION.  
DISC IS PROTECTED.  
• Occurs if operation is incorrect.  
• Cancel disc protection, or reload a  
recordable disc.  
• Occurs if you attempt to record or edit  
a disc for which disc protection is set.  
• Occurs if you attempt DV input of  
video which cannot be recorded, and  
attempt to record to a DVD.  
COULD NOT REPAIR THE DISC.  
COULD NOT FINALIZE.  
• If there is a power failure during DVD  
recording, the system automatically  
tries to recover data after power is  
restored. This error occurs if such  
recovery is impossible.  
• Check the disc, and load it correctly.  
• Cannot record.  
• Occurs if the disc is scratched or  
dirty, etc.  
THIS VIDEO IS COPY PROTECTED.  
RECORDING IS NOT POSSIBLE.  
• Occurs if video with a copy guard  
signal is input.  
• Erase unnecessary titles.  
• Either erase unnecessary chapters, or  
combine chapters.  
CANNOT RECORD MORE.  
• Occurs if a title or chapter mark  
exceeds the recordable upper limit.  
• Number of titles: HDD 199/DVD 99.  
Number of chapters: HDD 999/  
DVD 999  
• Reload an appropriate recording  
disc.  
CANNOT RECORD ON THIS DISC.  
•
Occurs if you load a disc which cannot  
be recorded to with this Recorder, or a  
disc which is scratched or dirty.  
• Load a tape into the digital  
camcorder.  
NO TAPE INSERTED IN DV  
CAMCORDER.  
•
Occurs if you attempt operation when a  
tape has not been loaded in the digital  
camcorder linked via DV connection.  
• Check the power of digital camcorder  
or cable connection.  
CONNECTING TO DV CAMCORDER.  
• Occurs if the digital camcorder power  
goes off or the cable is pulled out  
while connecting to DV.  
• System is performing reconnection  
processing. Wait about 30 seconds.  
• Occurs if connection with the digital  
camcorder is broken.  
• Check the disc, and load it correctly.  
COULD NOT INITIALIZE.  
• Occurs if the disc is scratched or  
dirty, etc.  
• Load a disc with empty space.  
• Erase unnecessary titles.  
DISC IS FULL.  
CANNOT RECORD OR STORE.  
• Occurs if there is no empty space in  
the disc.  
• Load a CPRM compatible disc (DVD-  
RW Ver. 1.1 or higher) initialized in VR  
mode.  
THIS VIDEO CANNOT BE RECORDED  
TO THIS DISC.  
• Occurs if you try to record a “Copy  
Once” broadcast onto a disc which is  
not compatible with CPRM.  
• Connect a digital camcorder, and  
reset again to DV input.  
CAN’T DETECT CAMCORDER.  
• Occurs if you set to DV input without  
connecting a digital camcorder.  
• Occurs if multiple digital camcorders  
are connected.  
• Set the clock and perform timer  
programming again.  
SET THE DATE AND TIME.  
• Occurs if timer programming is done  
when the Recorder clock has not  
been set.  
Continued on Next Page |||  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
On-screen Error Messages  
Error message  
Possible Error  
Suggested Solution  
RECORDING WAS STOPPED DUE TO  
FULL DISC.  
• Occurs when empty space in the  
disc runs out.  
REPAIRING THE DISC.  
• Occurs when recording stops  
before disc information has been  
correctly written onto a DVD, due to  
a problem like a power failure.  
• Wait until DVD disc recovery is  
finished.  
THIS IS A NON-STANDARD DISC.  
REMOVE IT.  
• Occurs if the loaded disc cannot be  
recorded to or played because it is  
a non-standard or scratched, etc.  
• Remove the disc.  
THIS VIDEO CANNOT BE RECORDED • Occurs if you try to record “Copy  
• Record on CPRM compatible DVD-  
RW disc in VR mode.  
TO THIS DISC.  
Once” video onto DVD-R or non-  
CPRM compatible DVD-RW.  
TIMER RECORDING COULD NOT  
START.  
LIVE BROADCAST RECORDING  
PROHIBITED.  
RECORDING STOPPED.  
• Occurs if a program begins during  
recording, and recording of the  
broadcast itself is forbidden due to  
copyright protection.  
THIS VIDEO IS COPY PROTECTED.  
RECORDING IS NOT POSSIBLE.  
• Occurs if you attempt to record a  
program, and recording of the  
broadcast itself is forbidden due to  
copyright protection.  
CANNOT OPERATE DUE TO HDD  
ERROR.  
CAN VIEW LIVE BROADCASTS ONLY.  
CONTACT THE NEAREST SHARP  
AUTHORIZED SERVICER.  
• Occurs when there is a problem  
with the HDD, and when you  
perform an operation which  
requires HDD operation, like special  
playback or recording.  
• Initialize the HDD once. If initializa-  
tion does not solve the problem,  
please contact the nearest Sharp  
Authorized Service Center as soon  
as possible.  
SYSTEM ERROR.  
POWER IS OFF.  
• If a problem occurs with the HDD  
while power is “ON”, power is shut  
off automatically.  
CHECKING HARD DISC.  
CAN ONLY VIEW LIVE BROADCAST  
UNTIL CONFIRMATION IS OVER.  
• Occurs if there is a power failure, or  
the power cord is unplugged and  
plugged in again while power is  
“ON”.  
• It may take 1-2 minutes to check the  
HDD. During this time, you can only  
watch live broadcasts. Wait a while  
until the check is over.  
THIS PROGRAM IS COPY PRO-  
TECTED.  
CANNOT VIEW TIME SHIFT.  
• Occurs if time shift viewing is  
impossible because recording of  
the broadcast itself is forbidden by  
copyright protection.  
• You can only view live broadcasts.  
Messages during Special Playback  
Error message  
Possible Error  
Suggested Solution  
CANNOT OPERATE DUE TO THE  
CONDITION OF HARD DISC.  
• Occurs if you perform operation like  
special playback when there is  
problem with the HDD.  
• The HDD must be repaired, so  
contact the nearest Sharp Autho-  
rized Service Center as soon as  
possible.  
HARD DISC IS NOT READY YET.  
CANNOT OPERATE.  
• Occurs if you perform operation  
requiring operation of the HDD (like  
special playback or recording)  
during HDD preparation.  
• You can only view live broadcasts  
until preparation is finished. Wait a  
while until operation is enabled. (If  
you use the Recorder at a cold  
location and the HDD temperature  
is low, HDD preparation may take  
some time.)  
Messages during Dubbing  
Error message  
Possible Error  
Suggested Solution  
CANNOT SELECT MORE.  
• Occurs if you attempt to select 6  
titles (chapters) at the screen for  
selecting titles or chapters to be  
dubbed.  
• Dub 5 titles (or chapters) at a time.  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
On-screen Error Messages  
Messages during Dubbing  
Error message  
Possible Error  
Suggested Solution  
CANNOT HIGH SPEED DUB THIS  
TITLE.  
• Occurs if you attempt high-speed  
dubbing onto DVD in Video mode of  
a title for which “High Speed  
Dubbing Priority” has not been set,  
or if you attempt high speed  
dubbing of a title edited in frame  
units on the HDD.  
• Perform “Rate Conversion Dub-  
bing”.  
TITLE PROTECTION IS SET.  
CANCEL TITLE PROTECTION  
BEFORE DUBBING.  
• Occurs when you attempt to dub a  
title containing a “Copy Once” part  
for which title protection has been  
set.  
• If a title contains a “Copy Once”  
part, you can only move the  
original. If title protection is set for a  
title, you cannot move it, so perform  
dubbing (movement) after cancel-  
ing title protection.  
CANNOT DUB TO DISC DUE TO  
COPY PROTECTED PROGRAM.  
• Occurs if you attempt to dub a title  
containing a “Copy Once” part to  
DVD-R or a non-CPRM compatible  
DVD-RW.  
• Dub in VR mode to a CPRM-  
compatible DVD-RW.  
TIMER PROGRAM EXCEEDS THE  
MAX.  
• Occurs when you attempt to set  
timer recording for more than the  
maximum number (32) of timer  
programs.  
• Set the dubbing timer after  
canceling the timer recording for  
one program.  
CANNOT DUB TO THE DISC.  
• Occurs if an unrecordable disc is  
loaded (i.e. when the maximum  
number of titles or chapters is  
exceeded, when the disc is  
protected, when the disc is  
scratched or dirty, or when the disc  
is a ROM disc).  
• Replace with a recordable disc.  
CANNOT DUB FROM THE DISC.  
• Occurs when a disc other than a  
DVD-R/RW is loaded.  
• Dub from a DVD-R/RW disc.  
COPY PROTECTED PROGRAM WILL  
BE MOVED.  
• Occurs if you attempt to dub a title  
containing a “Copy Once” part.  
• Be careful because the dubbing  
source video is erased after  
dubbing.  
Messages during Editing  
Error message  
Possible Error  
Suggested Solution  
CANNOT SELECT MORE.  
• Occurs if you attempt to select  
more than 20 titles (chapters) when  
you perform Erase Selected Title.  
• Erase a maximum of 20 titles  
(chapters) at a time.  
CANNOT SET THIS POSITION.  
• Occurs if you attempt to designate  
a range shorter than 3 seconds and  
edit.  
• Designate a range of 3 seconds or  
more. (If you designate a range of 3  
seconds or more, you can  
designate in frame units.)  
CHAPTER IS FULL. CANNOT  
OPERATE THIS FUNCTION.  
• Occurs if the editing result exceeds  
the upper limit of total number of  
chapters (999).  
• Edit after erasing unnecessary  
chapter marks by combining  
chapters.  
CANNOT COMBINE THESE CHAP-  
TERS.  
• Occurs if you attempt to combine  
chapters which cannot be com-  
bined. (Chapters created when you  
erase a scene or chapter in a single  
title cannot be erased).  
Other Message  
Error message  
Possible Error  
Suggested Solution  
TURN OFF PROGRESSIVE SCAN  
PLAYBACK.  
• Occurs if the Recorder is con-  
nected with the Video In or S-Video  
In jack of a TV, and PROGRESSIVE  
OUT is set to “PROGRESSIVE  
SCAN ON”.  
• Set PROGRESSIVE OUT to  
“PROGRESSIVE SCAN OFF”.(Page  
102)  
• Correctly set “CONNECTING  
TERMINAL” at “VIDEO/AUDIO  
SETTING” in “ADJUSTMENT”.(Page  
102)  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Alternate  
Recording  
If you set to Exact Recording but the timer recording program will not fit into a single  
DVD-R/RW, the Recorder will automatically perform Alternate Recording to HDD.  
The Recorder will also perform Alternate Recording to HDD if you forget to load a DVD-  
R/RW.  
Angle  
Recorded onto some DVD discs are scenes which have been simultaneously shot from  
a number of different angles (the same scene is shot from the front, from the left side,  
from the right side, etc.). With such discs, you can select the angle on Function Control  
Screen to view the scene from different angles.  
AV AUTO REC This function lets you record video from an external equipment in linkage with the timer  
programming of that device. This can be done by connecting with a receiver or other  
equipment with a timer programming function.  
Chapter  
Number  
These numbers are recorded on DVD discs. A title is subdivided into many sections,  
each of which is numbered, and specific parts of video presentations can be searched  
quickly using these numbers.  
Chasing Play- This function lets you playback and view a program while it is being recorded onto  
back  
HDD.  
Copy Guard  
This function prevents copying. You cannot record software or broadcast programs  
marked by the copyright holder with a signal which limits copying.  
Digital Gamma Corrects for gradations in dark areas of images to make images clearer.  
Digital Super  
Picture  
Enhances the fine detail of the image and outlines of the objects it contains.  
Disc Menu  
This lets you select things like the subtitle language or overdub audio using a menu  
stored on the DVD video disc.  
Dolby Digital  
(5.1 channel)  
A sound system developed by Dolby Laboratories Inc. that gives movie theater ambi-  
ence to audio output when the product is connected to a Dolby Digital 5.1 channel  
processor or amplifier.  
Dolby Digital  
Output Level  
Setting that increases the average volume of Dolby Digital audio when playing a DVD.  
Dolby Virtual  
Surround  
This lets you enjoy Surround audio via analog connection with a stereo (2ch) TV or  
audio equipment.  
DTS  
This is a digital sound system developed by Digital Theater Systems for use in cinemas.  
This system uses 6 audio channels and provides accurate sound field positioning and  
realistic acoustics. (By connecting a DTS Digital Surround decoder, you can also listen  
to DTS Digital Surround sound.)  
Exact Dubbing This function is used when dubbing from HDD to DVD. It automatically selects the  
recording mode according to the recording time of the title so that the recording will fit  
into a single disc.  
Exact Record- This function automatically changes the recording mode to prevent recordings from  
ing  
running out before they are finished due to a lack of available DVD disc space by  
comparing the available disc space and the time required for the timer recording.  
EZ Set Up  
Tuner channels and clock are automatically set for both Air and CATV channels.  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Finalization  
This is done to enable playback of discs (Video mode) recorded with this Recorder  
using other DVD-RW and DVD-R compatible DVD players. (We do not guarantee that  
playback will be possible with all DVD players.)  
The DVD players which can play back VR mode discs are those with an “ ” indica-  
tion.  
High Speed  
This function lets you perform high speed dubbing to a DVD even in Video mode after  
Dubbing Prior- recording, by setting High Speed Dubbing Priority to “YES” when recording to HDD.  
ity  
Initialization  
This allows you to use the HDD or a DVD-RW disc in this Recorder. If you initialize a  
disc, all of the programs recorded on it are erased.  
Letter Box  
Screen size that cuts off the top and bottom of the image to allow playing of wide-  
screen (16:9) software on a connected 4:3 TV.  
4:3 LB  
Linear PCM  
Sound  
Linear PCM is a signal recording format used for Audio CDs.  
The sound on Audio CDs is recorded at 44.1 kHz with 16 bits. (On DVD discs, sound is  
recorded at between 48 kHz with 16 bits and 96 kHz with 24 bits.)  
MP3  
One type of audio compression that uses MPEG1. This format compresses sound to  
about 1/10, without impairing the original sound quality.  
Multi Angle  
This is a feature of DVD video discs. In some discs, the same picture is shot from  
different angles, and these are stored in a single disc so you can enjoy playback from  
different angles. (This function can be enjoyed if the disc is recorded with multiple  
angles.)  
Multi Audio  
This is a feature of DVD video discs. This function makes it possible to record multiple  
different audio tracks for the same video, so you can enhance your enjoyment by  
switching audio. (You can enjoy this function with discs recorded with multiple audio  
tracks.)  
Original  
A video (title) recorded from a TV broadcast or external input is called an “Original”.  
Pan Scan  
Screen size that cuts off the sides of the image to allow playing of wide-screen (16:9)  
software on a connected 4:3 TV.  
4:3 PS  
Parental Con- In some digital broadcasts and DVD video discs, a control level for disc viewing is set  
trol  
depending on the age of the viewer. With this Recorder, you can set the control level for  
viewing such broadcasts and discs.  
Play List  
A set of titles created by copying just the needed scenes from original titles is called a  
“Play List”. (The original titles remain as are.)  
Playback  
This information is recorded on video CDs (version 2.0). This allows you to actively  
Control (PBC) select the sections to be viewed or listened to, using a menu displayed on the TV.  
Rate Conver-  
sion Dubbing  
This function is used to select the picture quality of dubbed titles at the time of dubbing.  
This is a list screen which lets you check the recorded programs (titles) in list form. You  
can select either Thumbnail or Title List as the REC LIST.  
REC LIST  
Number identifying a geographic region of compatibility for a DVD.  
Region  
Number  
Continued on Next Page |||  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Remote Con-  
trol Code  
This is the type of the remote control signal for operating the recorder. There are two  
types of remote control signal: “Remote Control No. 1” (RC-1) and “Remote Control No.  
2” (RC-2).  
Resume Play- If you stop playback while it is in progress, the Recorder stores the stop position in  
memory, and this function lets you playback from that stopping point.  
back  
Simultaneous This function lets you play back and view already recorded programs while you are  
Recording/  
Playback  
recording. (However, you cannot play back from a DVD while recording to the DVD.)  
Skip  
This returns to the start of the chapter (or track) being played, or skips to the next  
chapter.(or track)  
Subtitles  
Time Number  
Time Shift  
These are the printed lines appearing at the bottom of the screen which translate or  
transcribe the dialog. They are recorded on DVD discs.  
This indicates the play time which has elapsed from the start of a disc or a title. It can  
be used to find a specific scene quickly. (It may not work with some discs.)  
This Recorder is designed so you can automatically record the program being viewed  
to the HDD by pressing the TIME SHIFT button. The automatically recorded program  
can be viewed using other types of playback.  
Title Menu  
In a DVD video disc, this is the menu for selecting things like the chapter to be played  
back and the subtitle language. In some DVD video discs, the title menu may be called  
the “Top Menu”.  
Title Number  
These numbers are recorded on DVD discs. When a disc contains two or more movies,  
these movies are numbered as title 1, title 2, etc.  
Track Number These numbers are assigned to the tracks which are recorded on video CDs and Audio  
CDs. They enable specific tracks to be located quickly.  
VBR Control  
VBR is the abbreviation for Variable Bit Rate control. This feature performs control by  
varying the bit rate (the amount of code transferred in a fixed period of time) by assign-  
ing a larger amount of code to complex video images such as sections containing rapid  
movement or sections containing sudden changes in color, and assigning a smaller  
amount of code in the opposite cases.  
Video Mode  
VR Mode  
This is a recording format for making DVD R/RW discs playable with other commercially  
available DVD players. (We do not guarantee that playback will be possible with all DVD  
players.)  
This recording format is the basic DVD-RW recording format, and lets you enjoy the  
various editing functions available with this Recorder.  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
HDD capacity: ................................ 80 GB*  
Power supply: ................................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz  
Power consumption  
General  
Timer  
Programs: ....................................... 32 programs/1 year  
Clock: .............................................. Quartz lock  
(12-hour digital display)  
(Normal):..................................... 40 W  
Power consumption  
Memory backup: ............................. Approx. 1 hour  
Input/Output  
VHF/UHF antenna input/  
(Standby): ................................... 0.7 W  
Dimensions: .................................... Approx. 430 mm × 59 mm × 323  
mm (W × H × D)  
output terminal:........................... 75Ω (F-shape connector)  
Video input: ..................................... Input 1, 2 (rear), 3 (front)  
Input level: ............................... 1 Vp-p (75Ω)  
Jacks: ...................................... RCA jack  
Video output:  
Output level: ............................ 1 Vp-p (75Ω)  
Jacks: ...................................... RCA jack  
S-Video input: ................................. Input 1, 2 (rear), 3 (front)  
Y-Input level: ............................ 1 Vp-p (75Ω)  
C-Input level: ........................... 0.286 Vp-p (75Ω)  
Jacks: ...................................... 4 pin mini DIN  
S-Video output:  
Y-Output level: ......................... 1 Vp-p (75Ω)  
C-Output level: ........................ 0.286 Vp-p (75Ω)  
Jacks: ...................................... 4 pin mini DIN  
Component video output:  
Output level: ............................ Y: 1 Vp-p (75Ω)  
PB, PR: 0.7 Vp-p (75Ω)  
Jacks: ...................................... RCA jack  
Audio input:..................................... Input 1, 2 (rear), 3 (front) L/R  
Input level: ............................... 2 V rms (Input impedance: more  
than 22 kΩ)  
Jacks: ...................................... RCA jack  
Audio output: .................................. L/R  
Output level: ............................ 2 V rms (Output impedance:  
less than 1.5 kΩ)  
Jack: ........................................ RCA jack  
Digital audio optical output:  
Terminal: .................................. Square Optical terminal  
Digital audio coaxial output:  
Jack: ........................................ RCA jack  
DV input:  
Approx. 1615/16" × 221/64" × 1223/32"  
Weight: ............................................ Approx. 5.0 kg (11.1 lbs)  
Operating temperature ................... 41°F to 95°F (5°C to 35°C)  
Storage temperature: ...................... –4°F to 131°F (–20°C to 55°C)  
Operating humidity: ........................ 10% to 80% (no condensation)  
TV systems: ..................................... NTSC system, 525 lines, 60  
fields  
Recording  
Recordable disc media: ................. DVD-RW, DVD-R  
Recording system (HDD): ............... Video: MPEG  
Audio: Dolby Digital (2ch)/Linear  
PCM (FINE mode only)  
Recording system (DVD-R/RW): ..... Video: DVD-Video Recording  
(VR mode)  
DVD-VIDEO (Video mode)  
Audio: Dolby Digital (2ch)/Linear  
PCM (FINE mode only)  
Recording time (Hard disc): ........... FINE (High picture quality):  
Approx. 20 hours  
SP (Standard): Approx. 33 hours  
LP (2X): Approx. 67 hours  
EP (3X): Approx. 100 hours  
MN (Manual): 32 levels between  
FINE and EP  
(However, the maximum  
continuous recording time is 12  
hours.)  
Recording time  
(With 4.7GB DVD-R/RW): ........... FINE (High picture quality):  
Approx. 1 hour  
SP (Standard): Approx. 2 hours  
LP (2X): Approx. 4 hours  
EP (3X): Approx. 6 hours  
Terminal: .................................. 4 pin (i.LINK/IEEE 1394  
standard)  
LASER Specification  
Wave length: ................................... DVD: 658 nm  
CD: 784 nm  
MN (Manual): 32 levels between  
FINE and EP  
Laser power: ................................... DVD: 100 mW  
CD: 225 mW  
Playback  
Playable discs:................................ DVD Video, DVD-R/RW, Audio  
CD (CD-DA), Video CD, CD-R/  
RW (CD-DA, Video CD format,  
MP3 file format)  
Specifications are subject to change without notice.  
* When referring to hard disc drive storage capacity, GB stands for  
one billion bytes.  
Tuner  
Channel coverage: ......................... VHF 2-13  
UHF 14-69  
CATV 1-125  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ESPAÑOL  
(Guía de operación rápida)  
MEDIDAS DE SEGURIDAD IMPORTANTES .... 121  
Guía de operación rápida en español ............. 122  
Conexión básica................................................................. 122  
EZ Set Up........................................................................... 122  
Antes de utilizar la grabadora ............................................ 123  
Grabación directa en HDD ................................................. 123  
Grabación directa en DVD ................................................. 123  
Reproducción HDD ............................................................ 124  
Reproducción DVD-RW/R .................................................. 125  
Reproducción de DVD Vídeo ............................................. 125  
Reproducción de Audio CD/Vídeo CD ............................... 125  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Para futura referencia, anote los números de modelo y de serie  
(indicados en la parte posterior este producto) en el espacio provisto.  
No. de modelo: DV-HR300U  
No. de serie:  
AVISO: PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE INCENDIO O ELECTROCHOQUE  
NO EXPONGA ESTE APARATO A LA HUMEDAD.  
Este símbolo previene al usuario  
del voltaje aislado dentro de la  
unidad que puede provocar  
PRECAUCION  
PELIGRO DE DESCARGA  
ELECTRICA NO ABRIR  
descargas eléctricas peligrosas.  
PRECAUCION:  
Este símbolo advierte al usuario  
que existen instrucciones de  
operación y de mantenimiento en la  
TPARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE DESCARGA ELECTRICA, NO  
QUITE LA CUBIERTA. EL USUARIO NO DEBERA DAR NINGUN  
TIPO DE SERVICIO A NINGUNA PARTE INTERNA. DEBERA SER  
REALIZADO SOLO POR PERSONAL DE SERVICIO CALIFICADO.  
literatura incluida en esta unidad.  
“ADVERTENCIA—Las reglas de la FCC (Comisinó Federal de  
Comunicaciones) estipulan que cualquier modificacinó o cambio a este  
equipo no aprobado expresamente por el fabricante podráanular la  
autorización del usuario para operar este equipo”.  
INFORMACION  
Este equipo se ha sometido a todo tipo de pruebas y cumple con las normas establecidas para dispositivo  
digital de Clase B, de conformidad con la Parte 15 de las reglas de la FCC (Comisión Federal de  
Comunicaciones). Estas reglas están diseñadas para asegurar una protección razonable contra  
interferencias perjudiciales en las instalaciones residenciales. Este equipo genera, utiliza y puede emitir  
energía de radiofrecuencia y, si no se instala y utiliza debidamente, es decir, conforme a las instrucciones,  
podrían producirse interferencias perjudiciales en las radiocomunicaciones. Sin embargo, no se garantiza  
que estas interferencias no se produzcan en una instalación determinada. Si este equipo ocasiona  
interferencias en la recepción de radio o televisión, lo cual puede comprobarse con sólo apagar y encender  
el equipo, intente corregir el problema mediante una o una combinación de las siguientes medidas:  
—Reoriente la antena receptora o cámbiela de lugar.  
—Aumente la separación entre el equipo y el receptor.  
—Enchufe el equipo a una toma de corriente situada en un circuito distinto del receptor.  
—Consulte a su distribuidor o a un técnico experto en radio/televisión.  
PRECAUCION:  
ESTA UNIDAD HA SIDO CLASIFICADA COMO PRODUCTO CLASS 1 LASER.  
EL USO DE MANDOS O AJUSTES O LA REALIZACION DE PROCEDIMIENTOS DISTINTOS DE LOS  
INDICADOS EN LA PRESENTE IMPLICA EL RIESGO DE EXPOSICION A UNA RADIACION PELIGROSA.  
COMO LOS RAYOS LASER UTILIZADOS EN ESTA UNIDAD PUEDEN RESULTAR PERJUDICIALES PARA SUS  
OJOS, NO INTENTE DESARMAR EL GABINETE.  
SOLICITE EL SERVICIO UNICAMENTE A PERSONAL CUALIFICADO.  
Aviso al instalador de sistemas CATV:  
Este aviso tiene la finalidad de llamar la atención del instalador de sistemas CATV para que tenga en cuenta  
el Artículo 820-40 de NEC, que ofrece instrucciones para realizar una conexión a tierra apropiada y, en  
particular, especifica que el cable de puesta a tierra deberá conectarse al sistema de puesta a tierra del  
edificio tan cerca del punto de entrada del cable como sea posible.  
®
Como socio de ENERGY STAR , SHARP ha determinado que este producto cumple con las pautas de ENERGY  
®
STAR para uso eficiente de energía. ENERGY STAR es una marca registrada estadounidense.  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MEDIDAS DE SEGURIDAD IMPORTANTES  
14. Puesta a tierra de la antena exterior – Si una antena exterior  
PRECAUCIÓN: Lea todas estas instrucciones  
o sistema de cables esta conectado al producto, asegúrese de  
antes de utilizar este producto y guárdelas para  
consultarlas posteriormente.  
que la antena o sistema de cables esté puesto a tierra de forma  
que proporcione cierta protección contra sobretensiones y  
acumulaciones de cargas estáticas. El estatuto 810 del Código  
Eléctrico Nacional ANSI/NFPA 70 proporciona información relativa  
a la puesta a tierra adecuada del poste y de la estructura de soporte,  
puesta a tierra del cable de entrada a una unidad de descarga de  
antena, tamaño de los conductores de puesta a tierra, ubicación  
de la unidad de descarga de antena, conexión a los electrodos de  
puesta a tierra y los requisitos correspondientes al electrodo de  
puesta a tierra. Refiérase al diagrama siguiente.  
La energía eléctrica permite realizar muchas funciones  
útiles. Este producto se ha diseñado y fabricado para  
garantizar su seguridad personal. EL USO INADECUADO  
PUEDE RESULTAR EN PELIGROS DE DESCARGAS  
ELÉCTRICAS O INCENDIOS POTENCIALES. Con el fin  
de respetar las medidas de seguridad incorporadas en  
este producto, tenga en cuenta las siguientes reglas  
básicas de instalación, uso y servicio técnico.  
CABLE DE ENTRADA  
DE ANTENA  
1. Lectura de las instrucciones – Todas las instrucciones de  
seguridad y uso deben leerse antes de utilizar el producto.  
2. Conservación de las instrucciones – Las instrucciones  
de seguridad y uso deben guardarse para usarlas como  
referencia en el futuro.  
ABRAZADERA DE PUESTA  
A TIERRA  
UNIDAD DE DESCARGA  
DE ANTENA  
(ESTATUTO 810–20 DEL NEC)  
3. Advertencias – Deben observarse todas las advertencias del  
EQUIPO DE  
CONDUCTORES DE PUESTA  
SERVICIO  
A TIERRA  
producto y de las instrucciones de uso.  
ELÉCTRICO  
(ESTATUTO 810–21 DEL NEC)  
4. Instrucciones – Deben seguirse todas las instrucciones de  
uso.  
5. Limpieza – Desenchufe este producto de la toma de  
alimentación antes de limpiarlo. No utilice limpiadores líquidos ni  
aerosoles. Utilice un paño húmedo.  
ABRAZADERAS DE PUESTA A TIERRA  
SISTEMA DE ELECTRODO DE  
PUESTA A TIERRA DEL SERVICIO  
DE ALIMENTACIÓN  
(PARTE 250. PARTE H DEL NEC)  
NEC- NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE (CÓDIGO ELÉCTRICO NACIONAL)  
6. Aditamentos – No utilice aditamentos no recomendados por  
el fabricante del producto, ya que pueden causar peligros.  
7. Agua y humedad – No utilice este producto cerca del agua,  
por ejemplo, cerca de una bañera, cubeta de lavado, fregadero  
de cocina, en un sótano húmedo, ni cerca de una piscina, etc.  
8. Accesorios – No coloque este producto sobre un carrito,  
soporte, trípode o mesa inestable. El producto podría caerse,  
causando heridas graves a niños o adultos y daños graves al  
propio producto. Utilícelo solamente con un carrito, soporte,  
trípode o mesa recomendado por el fabricante o vendido con el  
producto. Cualquier trabajo de montaje del producto deberá  
realizarse según las instrucciones del fabricante, y deberán  
utilizarse los accesorios de montaje recomendados por él.  
9. Transporte – Mueva el producto con cuidado  
15. Relámpagos – Como protección complementaria para este  
producto durante tormentas eléctricas o cuando no lo utilice durante  
mucho tiempo, desenchúfelo de la toma mural y desconecte la  
antena o sistema de cables. De esta forma se evitará que el  
producto se dañe debido a relámpagos y sobretensiones.  
16. Lineas eléctricas – Los sistemas de antenas exteriores no  
deben encontrarse cerca de líneas eléctricas aéreas o de otros  
circuitos de alimentación o de luz eléctrica, ni donde puedan  
caer sobre dichos circuitos o líneas. Cuando se instale un sistema  
de antena exterior, debe tenerse especial cuidado para evitar  
entrar en contacto con tales circuitos o líneas eléctricas, ya que  
tal contacto puede ser mortal.  
17. Sobrecarga – No sobrecargue las tomas murales, los cables  
prolongadores ni los receptores integrales, ya que si lo hace  
pueden producirse incendios o descargas eléctricas.  
cuando se encuentre en un carrito. Las  
paradas bruscas, la fuerza excesiva o las  
superficies desniveladas pueden causar que  
18. Introducción de objetos sólidos y líquidos – No  
introduzca nunca ningún tipo de objeto en este producto a través  
de las ranuras de la caja, ya que pueden entrar en contacto con  
puntos de tensión peligrosos o cortocircuitar componentes, lo  
que podría provocar incendios o descargas eléctricas. No  
derrame nunca ningún tipo de líquido sobre el producto.  
19. Servicio – No intente reparar por sí mismo este producto, ya  
que al abrir o extraer las cubiertas puede quedar expuesto a  
tensión peligrosa y demás peligros. Solicite asistencia técnica a  
personal especializado.  
el producto y el carrito se caigan.  
10. Ventilación – Las ranuras y aberturas de la caja se proporcionan  
para la ventilación del producto, para asegurar un funcionamiento  
fiable y para protegerlo contra el sobrecalentamiento, y a la misma  
vez, estas aberturas no deben bloquearse ni cubrirse. Con el fin  
de que las aberturas no queden bloqueadas, no coloque el  
producto sobre una cama, sofá, alfombra u otras superficies  
similares. Este producto no debe instalarse en un espacio cerrado,  
como un estante para libros, a menos que reciba una ventilación  
adecuada o que las instrucciones del fabricante hayan sido  
observadas.  
20. Averías que necesitan ser reparadas – Desenchufe este  
producto de la toma mural y solicite asistencia técnica a personal  
especializado en las siguientes condiciones:  
11. Fuentes de alimentación – Este producto debe utilizarse  
únicamente con el tipo de fuente de alimentación especificada  
en la etiqueta de características. Si no está seguro del tipo de  
suministro eléctrico existente en su hogar, consulte con el  
proveedor de producto o con la compañía eléctrica local. Con  
respecto al producto diseñado para utilizarse con pilas, o otras  
fuentes de suministro consulte el manual de instrucciones.  
12. Puesta a tierra o polarización – Este producto dispone de  
un enchufe polarizado de dos cables (una cuchilla del enchufe  
es màs grande que la otra) o con un enchufe puesto a tierra de  
tres cables (un tercer conector para puesta a tierra). El enchufe  
polarizado de dos cables encaja en la toma de alimentación en  
una única posición solamente. El enchufe a tierra de tres cables  
se conecta solamente en un tomacorriente con descarga a tierra.  
Si el enchufe no encaja, solicite a un electricista la sustitución de  
la toma de alimentación obsoleta. No modifique el enchufe y  
respete esta medida de seguridad.  
a. Cuando el cable de alimentación o el enchufe esté dañado.  
b. Si se ha derramado líquido sobre o caído objetos dentro del producto.  
c. Si el producto ha estado expuesto a la lluvia o al agua.  
d. Si el producto no funciona con normalidad al seguir las instrucciones  
del manual. Ajuste solamente los controles especificados en el  
manual de instrucciones, ya que el ajuste inadecuado de otros  
controles puede provocar daños que a menudo requieren un trabajo  
extenso por parte de un técnico especializado para que el producto  
recupere su funcionamiento normal.  
e. Si el producto se ha caído o se ha dañado de alguna manera.  
f . Cuando el producto exhiba un cambio evidente en su rendimiento  
(esto indica la necesidad de asistencia técnica).  
21. Piezas de recambio – Cuando sean necesarias piezas de  
sustitución, asegúrese de que el personal de servicio técnico ha  
utilizado las especificadas por el fabricante o que cuenten con  
las mismas características que las originales. Las sustituciones  
no autorizadas pueden provocar incendios, descargas eléctricas  
u otros peligros.  
22. Comprobación de seguridad – Después de haber finalizado  
cualquier servicio técnico o de reparación de este producto,  
solicite al técnico que realice comprobaciones de seguridad para  
determinar que el producto se encuentra en condiciones de  
funcionamiento.  
13. Protección del cable de la alimentación – Los cables de  
la alimentación deben instalarse de forma que nadie pueda  
caminar sobre ellos ni queden atrapados por artículos colocados  
sobre o contra ellos, poniendo mucha atención a las partes donde  
los cables entran en contacto con las clavijas, a las tomas de  
corriente y a los puntos por donde salen del producto.  
23. Calor – Este aparato deberá situarse alejado de fuentes de calor  
como, por ejemplo, radiadores, salidas de calor, estufas y otros  
aparatos que produzcan calor (incluyendo amplificadores).  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Guía de operación rápida en español  
5 Conecte los enchufes de salida VIDEO/  
Conexión básica  
AUDIO en su VCR, a los enchufes de entrada  
La conexión siguiente es la conexión básica para ver o  
de VIDEO/AUDIO en su TV usando un cable  
de audio/video.  
grabar programas de TV.  
TV  
Para los enchufes  
Video/audio IN  
Para los enchufes  
Video/audio IN  
Después de la conexión  
Conecte los cables de alimentación del TV y VCR. Luego  
vaya "EZ Set Up".  
Cable de  
Video/audio  
(includio)  
Cable de  
Video/audio  
(disponible  
EZ Set Up  
comercialmente)  
4
5
Cable coaxial  
Para el enchufe de  
ebtrada de antena  
IMPORTANTE (Precaución durante EZ Set Up):  
• No pulse el botón POWER de la grabadora ni del  
control remoto.  
(disponible comercialmente)  
3
Para el enchufe de  
salida de antena  
Para los enchufes de  
salida del video/audio  
VCR  
POWER  
Para el enchufe de  
entrada de antena  
Coaxial cable  
(incluido)  
La función de EZ Set Up ajusta automáticamente los canales  
del sintonizador y el reloj cuando el cable de la antena está  
conectado al panel trasero de la grabadora y la clavija del  
cable de alimentación está conectada a una toma de CA.  
2
Pala el enchufe  
PASS THIROUGH  
1 Asegúrese de que el cable de la antena esté  
conectado. Para conocer la configuración de  
la conexión, consulte “Conexión básica”.  
La grabadora  
Para le enchufe IN  
FROM ANTENNA  
2 Conecte el enchufe de alimentación de la  
1
grabadora un tomacorriente y el reloj de CA.  
A la salida de pared  
de anena/cable TV  
3 Los canales del sintonizador se ajustarán  
automáticamente.  
Para los enchufes  
de salida del  
VIDEO/AUDIO  
Cable de antena  
(disponible comercialmente)  
• Esta grabadora puede controlar y utilizar señales  
horarias (señales EDS), emitidas por algunos  
canales de televisión, para poner automáticamente  
en hora el reloj.  
1 Conecte el cable de antena de TV al enchufe  
IN FROM ANTENNA en la parte trasera de  
esta grabadora.  
NOTA  
• Si la alimentación se suministra a la grabadora antes de  
que el cable se encuentre conectado, EZ Setup Up no  
podrá preajustar los canales en la memoria. Si esto llega  
a suceder, pulse RESET en la parte delantera de la  
grabadora. La función EZ Set Up volverá a funcionar  
nuevamente.  
2 Conecte el enchufe PASS THROUGH en la  
parte trasera de esta grabadora, al enchufe  
de entrada de antena en su VCR usando el  
cable coaxial sumimistrado.  
• Si se conecta la alimentación durante EZ Set Up, el  
ajuste automático de los canales se interrumpirá y los  
canales del sintonizador no podrán ser preajustados.  
• La Puesta en Hora Automática del Reloj puede tardar  
varios minutos.  
NOTA  
• Si conecta esta grabadora directamente a su TV, omita el  
paso siguiente.  
3 Conecte el enchufe de salida de antena en  
su VCR al enchufe de entrada de antena en  
su TV, usando el cable coaxial.  
4
Conecte los enchufes de salida VIDEO/AUDIO  
en esta grabadora, a los enchufes de entrada  
VIDEO/AUDIO en su TV usando el cable de  
video/audio suministrado.  
Asegúrese de que los colores de los enchufes y  
clavijas coincidan cuando conecta el cable.  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                               
'/  
                                               
                                                  
"
                                                  
para seleccionar el canal  
Guía de operación rápida en español  
4 Pulse  
                                                                                               
Æ
                                                                                               
REC mientras se ven  
Antes de utilizar la grabadora  
emisiones.  
• Empieza la grabación y se visualiza  
el icono REC.  
• El indicador REC (para HDD) de la  
parte delantera de la grabadora se  
enciende en rojo durante la  
grabación.  
1 Coencte la alimentación del  
televisor.  
• Cuando la grabadora esté conectada  
a otro equipo de audio, encienda  
también ese equipo.  
• Cambie la entrada de TV a la entrada  
de AV utilizada para conectar la  
grabadora.  
Icono REC  
HDD  
REC  
OR  
I
G
I
N
AL  
F I NE  
REST. 19h8m  
2 Pulse POWER para encender la  
grabadora.  
1
1
0
/
/
0
1
1
:
2 0  
:
3 0  
• Cuando se conecte la alimentación  
de la grabadora por primera vez  
después de adquirirla, siguiendo EZ  
Set Up, se visualizará la pantalla OSD  
LANGUAGE Select y la función Guía  
de conexión se activará.  
5 Pulse REC PAUSE para hacer  
una pausa en la grabación.  
• La pausa de grabación no funciona  
durante la reproducción de  
persecución.  
• Durante la pausa, el indicador REC  
(para HDD) en la parte delantera de  
la grabadora parpadea.  
Siga las instrucciones de la pantalla.  
Grabación directa en HDD  
6 Pulse REC PAUSE para reanudar  
la grabación.  
1 Pulse HDD para seleccionar el  
Icono REC PAUSE  
modo HDD.  
• El botón HDD de la parte delantera  
de la grabadora se enciende.  
• El modo HDD se selecciona  
automáticamente cuando se conecta  
la alimentación.  
7 Pulse REC STOP para detener la  
grabación.  
2 Pulse los botones Number o CH  
Grabación directa en DVD  
que va a grabar.  
1 Pulse OPEN/CLOSE en la  
grabadora para abrir la bandeja  
del disco.  
3 Pulse REC MODE para  
seleccionar el modo de  
grabación.  
• El modo de grabación cambia como  
se muestra abajo cada vez que se  
pulsa el botón.  
OPEN/CLOSE  
FINE SP TP FP MNgg  
2 Ponga un disco DVD-RW o DVD-R  
• El modo de grabación establecido  
seleccionando “MN x x” es el modo  
de grabación establecido en la  
pantalla de selección MANUAL REC  
MODE.  
en la bandeja del disco.  
• Introduzca el disco con la cara de la  
etiqueta hacia arriba.  
• En el caso de un disco grabado en  
ambas caras, ponga la cara que  
quiera grabar hacia abajo.  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                               
'/  
                                               
                                                  
"
                                                  
para seleccionar el canal  
2 Pulse  
                                                                                               
|
                                                                                               
PLAY.  
7 Pulse  
                                                     
Æ
                                                     
REC.  
Guía de operación rápida en español  
3 Pulse OPEN/CLOSE para cerrar  
Reproducción HDD  
la bandeja del disco.  
4 Pulse DVD para seleccionar el  
1 Pulse HDD para seleccionar el  
modo DVD.  
modo HDD.  
• El botón DVD de la parte delantera  
de la grabadora se enciende.  
• El modo HDD se selecciona  
automáticamente cuando se conecta  
la alimentación.  
• El botón HDD de la parte delantera  
de la grabadora se enciende.  
• El modo HDD se selecciona  
automáticamente cuando se conecta  
la alimentación.  
NOTA  
5 Pulse los botones Number o CH  
• Para reproducir una lista de reproducción  
creada por edición, pulse ORIGINAL /  
PLAY LIST.  
que va a grabar.  
6 Pulse REC MODE para  
seleccionar el modo de grabacinó  
deseado.  
Cada vez que se pulse este botón, el  
ajuste cambiará entre “ORIGINAL” (títulos  
originales” y “PLAY LIST”..  
• El modo de grabación cambia como  
se muestra abajo cada vez que se  
pulsa el botón.  
• El indicador PLAY (para HDD) en la  
parte delantera de la grabadora se  
enciende en verde durante la  
reproducción.  
FINE SP TP FP MNgg  
• Para avanzar o retroceder  
rápidamente: Presione  
REV durante la reproducción.  
Cada vez que se pulsen estos  
botones, la velocidad cambiará entre  
los ajustes siguientes  
• El modo de grabación establecido  
seleccionando “MN x x” es el modo  
de grabación establecido en la  
pantalla de selección MANUAL REC  
MODE.  
FWD o  
• Empieza la grabación y se visualiza  
(2X aproximadamente) (8X aproximadamente) (32X aproximadamente)  
el icono REC.  
• El indicador REC (para DVD) de la  
parte delantera de la grabadora se  
enciende en rojo durante la  
grabación.  
Pulse |PLAY para volver a la  
reproducción normal.  
3 Para detener la reproducción,  
pulse ■ STOP/LIVE.  
DVD-RW  
REC  
OR  
I
G
I
N
AL VR  
F I NE  
REST. 1h0m  
Función de reanudación  
de la reproducción.  
1
1
0
/
/
0
1
1
:
0 0  
:
0 1  
• Si pulsa |PLAY a continuación, la  
reproducción se reanudará desde el punto  
donde usted la detuvo la última vez. Para  
reproducir desde el principio, cancele el  
modo de reanudación pulsando ■ STOP/  
LIVE y luego pulse |PLAY. (La  
8 Pulse REC PAUSE para hacer  
una pausa en la grabacinó.  
reanudación de la reproducción se  
cancelará cuando usted abra o cierre la  
bandeja del disco, desconecte la  
• La pausa no funcionará durante la  
grabación con temporizador.  
alimentación o cambie a HDD.)  
• Durante la pausa, el indicador REC  
(para DVD) en la parte delantera de  
la grabadora parpadea.  
9 Pulse REC PAUSE para reanudar  
la grabacinó.  
10Pulse REC STOP para detener la  
grabacinó.  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Pulse  
                                                                                               
|
                                                                                               
PLAY.  
6 Pulse  
                                                     
'
                                                     
/
                                                        
"/\  
                                                        
                                                           
                                                           
/
                                                              
|
                                                              
para seleccionar  
2 Pulse  
                                                                                               
|
                                                                                               
PLAY.  
Guía de operación rápida en español  
8 Para detener la reproducción,  
Reproducción DVD-RW/R  
pulse ■ STOP/LIVE.  
DVD RW DVD RW  
DVD R  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
Función de reanudación  
de la reproducción.  
1 Pulse OPEN/CLOSE en la  
grabadora para abrir la bandeja  
del disco.  
•Si pulsa |PLAY a continuación, la  
reproducción se reanudará desde el punto  
donde usted la detuvo la última vez. Para  
reproducir desde el principio, cancele el  
modo de reanudación pulsando ■ STOP/  
LIVE y luego pulse |PLAY. (La  
OPEN/CLOSE  
DVD  
reanudación de la reproducción se  
cancelará cuando usted abra o cierre la  
bandeja del disco, desconecte la  
alimentación o cambie a HDD.)  
•La función de reanudación de la  
reproducción no se activa durante la  
reproducción de CDs de vídeo.  
2 Ponga el disco que quiera  
reproducir en la bandeja del  
disco.  
Reproducción de DVD Vídeo  
DVD VIDEO  
•Introduzca el disco con la cara de la  
etiqueta hacia arriba.  
•En el caso de un disco grabado en  
ambas caras, ponga la cara que  
quiera ver hacia abajo.  
1 Pulse DVD e introduzca un disco.  
•El botón DVD de la parte delantera  
de la grabadora se enciende.  
•La reproducción puede empezar  
automáticamente dependiendo del  
disco.  
3 Pulse OPEN/CLOSE para cerrar  
la bandeja del disco.  
•La reproducción empieza desde el  
4 Pulse DVD para seleccionar el  
primer título.  
modo DVD.  
•El menú tal vez se visualice en primer  
lugar dependiendo del disco. Haga la  
operación de reproducción siguiendo  
las indicaciones de la pantalla.  
•Para detener la reproducción, pulse  
■ STOP/LIVE.  
•El botón DVD de la parte delantera  
de la grabadora se enciende.  
•El modo HDD se selecciona  
automáticamente cuando se conecta  
la alimentación.  
5 Pulse REC LIST para visualizar  
la pantalla REC LIST (imágenes  
miniatura).  
Reproducción de Audio CD/Vídeo CD  
VIDEO CD AUDIO CD  
•Si el disco introducido tiene una lista  
de reproducción y usted pulsa  
ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST, la pantalla  
cambiará a la lista de reproducción.  
1 Pulse DVD e introduzca un disco.  
•El botón DVD de la parte delantera  
de la grabadora se enciende.  
el título (o capítulo) que quiera  
ver.  
•La reproducción empieza desde la  
primera pista.  
LISTA DE GRABCIONES(HDD ORIG.)  
12/25 SÃB 10:28 AM  
3 Para detener la reproducción,  
TÎTULO: CH33 FINE  
pulse ■ STOP/LIVE.  
INF TÎTULO: 10/4 MON 4:00 PM – 4:10 PM  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 Pulse SET/ENTER.  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONSUMER LIMITED WARRANTY  
(Valid for warranty service in the U.S. only)  
CONSUMER LIMITED WARRANTY  
SHARP ELECTRONICS CORPORATION warrants to the first consumer purchaser that this Sharp brand product (the  
“Product”), when shipped in its original container, will be free from defective workmanship and materials, and agrees  
that it will, at its option, either repair the defect or replace the defective Product or part thereof with a new or  
remanufactured equivalent at no charge to the purchaser for parts or labor for the period(s) set forth below.  
This warranty does not apply to any appearance items of the Product nor to the additional excluded item(s) set forth  
below nor to any Product the exterior of which has been damaged or defaced, which has been subjected to improper  
voltage or other misuse, abnormal service or handling, or which has been altered or modified in design or  
construction.  
In order to enforce the rights under this limited warranty, the purchaser should follow the steps set forth below and  
provide proof of purchase to the servicer.  
The limited warranty described herein is in addition to whatever implied warranties may be granted to purchasers by  
law. ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR USE  
ARE LIMITED TO THE PERIOD(S) FROM THE DATE OF PURCHASE SET FORTH BELOW. Some states do not allow  
limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so the above limitation may not apply to you.  
Neither the sales personnel of the seller nor any other person is authorized to make any warranties other than those  
described herein, or to extend the duration of any warranties beyond the time period described herein on behalf of  
Sharp.  
The warranties described herein shall be the sole and exclusive warranties granted by Sharp and shall be the sole  
and exclusive remedy available to the purchaser. Correction of defects, in the manner and for the period of time  
described herein, shall constitute complete fulfillment of all liabilities and responsibilities of Sharp to the purchaser  
with respect to the Product, and shall constitute full satisfaction of all claims, whether based on contract, negligence,  
strict liability or otherwise. In no event shall Sharp be liable, or in any way responsible, for any damages or defects in  
the Product which were caused by repairs or attempted repairs performed by anyone other than an authorized  
servicer. Nor shall Sharp be liable or in any way responsible for any incidental or consequential economic or property  
damage. Some states do not allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above exclusion may  
not apply to you.  
THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS. YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY  
FROM STATE TO STATE.  
Model Specific Section  
Your Product Model Number & Description:  
DV-HR300U DVD RECORDER WITH HARD DISC  
(Be sure to have this information available when you need service  
for your Product.)  
Warranty Period for this Product:  
One (1) year parts and ninety (90) days labor from date of purchase.  
Non-rechargeable batteries.  
Additional Item(s) Excluded from  
Warranty Coverage (if any):  
Where to Obtain Service:  
From a Sharp Authorized Servicer located in the United States. To  
find the location of the nearest Sharp Authorized Servicer, call Sharp  
toll free at 1-800-BE-SHARP.  
What to do to Obtain Service:  
Ship prepaid or carry in your Product to a Sharp Authorized Servicer.  
Be sure to have Proof of Purchase available. If you ship the Prod-  
uct, be sure it is insured and packaged securely.  
TO OBTAIN SUPPLY, ACCESSORY OR PRODUCT INFORMATION, GO TO OUR WEBSITE AT www.sharpusa.com  
OR CALL 1-800-BE-SHARP.  
SHARP ELECTRONICS CORPORATION  
Printed in Malaysia  
Impreso en Malaysia  
B
TINS-A914WJZZ  
Sharp Plaza, Mahwah, New Jersey 07430-2135  
SHARP CORPORATION  
03P12-MSK  
Osaka, Japan  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Sharp Microwave Oven R 21 FBST User Manual
Singer Sewing Machine K4 User Manual
Sony Car Video System DVP FX820 User Manual
Sony Digital Camera A330 User Manual
Southbend Saw sb1018 User Manual
Stanley Black Decker Surge Protector SD67 User Manual
Stow Saw CD6CE13H18 User Manual
Sunbeam Bread Maker 5891 User Manual
Sunbeam Fan SFH431 UM User Manual
Swann Laptop 410769 001 User Manual